JP6225215B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a game machine in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of display areas.

  In conventional gaming machines, the identification symbol display device displays the variation of the identification symbol on the condition that a game medium such as a game ball launched on the game board passes through a predetermined passage area such as a start port. There is a gaming machine in which the displayed identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the first identification symbol displayed on the first identification symbol display device and the second identification symbol displayed on the second identification symbol display device are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 described above, when the game medium passes through the first passage area, the first identification symbol is changed and when the game medium passes through the second passage area, the second identification symbol is changed. I do. Further, in the gaming machine described above, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a display area of a display device different from the first identification symbol display device and the second identification symbol display device, corresponding to the variable display and stop display of the first identification symbol. Are displayed in a variable manner and stopped, or the second decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in correspondence with the variable indication and stop indication of the second identification symbol.

  For this reason, when the game medium passes through one of the passing areas and the variation display of the identification symbol is started and then the game medium passes through the other passing area, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol change simultaneously. While being displayed, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are simultaneously variably displayed. Then, one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, thereby shifting to the special gaming state.

  At this time, since the decorative symbol corresponding to one of the identification symbols stopped and displayed in a specific manner is also stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the player can confirm the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the specific manner. , It can be recognized that the state is shifted to the special game state.

JP 2011-101747 A

  However, in a gaming machine such as Patent Document 1 in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the display area of the display device in a variable manner, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display region. As a result, there was no relationship between the two decorative designs. As a result, the game became monotonous and led to a decrease in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and in a gaming machine in which decorative symbols are variably displayed at the same time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving relevance to the two decorative symbols. An object is to provide a possible gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later)
A game board on which a game medium rolls (for example, a game board 10 described later);
A first passage region (for example, a first start port 14A described later) provided in the game board;
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first passage area, first determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state to be described later) (for example, to be described later) Main CPU 60),
First identification symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 22 described later) for performing variable display of the first identification symbol in accordance with the determination result of the first determination means;
A second passage area provided in the game board (for example, a second start port 14B described later);
Second determination means (for example, a main CPU 60 described later) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second passage area;
Second identification symbol display means (for example, a second special symbol display device 23 described later) for performing variable display of the second identification symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means;
First decorative symbol display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 3 to be described later) capable of displaying decorative symbols;
With
The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be variably displayed at the same time,
In the first determination means or the second determination means, when it is determined to shift to a specific gaming state that is a gaming state different from the special gaming state, the specific gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. Without controlling the gaming state more advantageous than the gaming state before the occurrence,
When one of the first determination means or the second determination means determines that the game state is to be shifted to the special gaming state, the other determination means during the change of the identification symbol corresponding to the one determination means When the change of the identification symbol corresponding to the other determination means that is determined to shift to the specific gaming state is finished, the identification symbol corresponding to one determination means is stopped and displayed in a manner that does not shift to the special gaming state Is possible,
In front of the first decorative symbol display means is a second decorative symbol display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3A ′ shown in FIG. 117 described later) which is a decorative symbol display means different from the first decorative symbol display means. Third decorative symbol display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3B ′ shown in FIG. 117 to be described later), which is a decorative symbol display means different from both the first decorative symbol display means and the second decorative symbol display means; With
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are each movable from a standby position to a driving position (for example, on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 117 described later). , Initial positions of the sub liquid crystal display device 3A ′ and the sub liquid crystal display device 3B ′ are set)
In the driving position, the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means overlap with the first decorative symbol display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine (for example, in FIG. 117 described later). As shown, the sub liquid crystal display device 3A ′ and the sub liquid crystal display device 3B ′ can move to a position in front of the shutter accessory in a state of covering the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3),
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are capable of displaying the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display means when in the standby position, and display the decorative symbols. In the displayed state, it moves from the standby position to the drive position (for example, as shown in FIG. 117 to be described later), the sub liquid crystal display device 3A ′ and the sub liquid crystal display device 3B ′ are in the initial position in the first decorative pattern 31. Each of the second decorative symbols 32 is displayed, and from the initial position, the shutter accessory in a state of covering the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 while displaying the first decorative symbols 31 and the second decorative symbols 32 is displayed. It can move to a forward position).

According to this gaming machine, the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means move from the standby position to the driving position, and during that time, the decorative symbols displayed by the first decorative symbol display means are displayed. Therefore, the player's line of sight is guided from the standby position to the driving position, and finally the decorative symbol display including the first decorative symbol display means, the second decorative symbol display means, and the third decorative symbol display means is performed. It is possible to enhance interest in the means.
A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later) further includes a movable member that makes it difficult to see at least a part of the first decorative symbol display means from the front of the gaming machine. It is characterized by that.
According to this gaming machine, when a plurality of decorative symbols are variably displayed at the same time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving relevance to the two decorative symbols.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later)
A game board on which a game medium rolls (for example, a game board 10 described later);
A first passage region (for example, a first start port 14A described later) provided in the game board;
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first passage area, first determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state to be described later) (for example, to be described later) Main CPU 60),
A first identification symbol variation pattern for determining a first identification symbol variation pattern including a variation time for variably displaying a first identification symbol (for example, a first special symbol 221 described later) based on a determination result by the first determination unit. Determining means (for example, a main CPU 60 described later);
Based on the first identification symbol variation pattern determined by the first identification symbol variation pattern determination unit, first identification symbol display means for performing variation display of the first identification symbol (for example, a first special symbol display device described later) 22)
A second passage area provided in the game board (for example, a second start port 14B described later);
Second determination means (for example, a main CPU 60 described later) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second passage area;
A second identification symbol variation pattern for determining a second identification symbol variation pattern including a variation time for variably displaying a second identification symbol (for example, a second special symbol 231 described later) based on the determination result by the second determination means. Determining means (for example, a main CPU 60 described later);
Based on the second identification symbol variation pattern determined by the second identification symbol variation pattern determination unit, second identification symbol display means for performing variation display of the second identification symbol (for example, a second special symbol display device described later) 23)
A first decorative symbol (for example, a first decorative symbol 31 described later) corresponding to the first identification symbol is displayed, and a second decorative symbol (for example, a second decorative symbol 32 described later) corresponding to the second identification symbol is displayed. ) And a decorative symbol display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 3 described later);
First decorative symbol effect pattern determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later) for determining a first decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the first identification symbol change pattern determined by the first identification symbol change pattern determining means;
Second decorative symbol effect pattern determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later) for determining a second decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the second identification symbol variation pattern determined by the second identification symbol variation pattern determining means;
With
The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be variably displayed at the same time,
A first determination is made as to whether or not to variably display a third decorative symbol (for example, a third decorative symbol 33 described later) on condition that the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are variably displayed at the same time. 3 decoration symbol display determination means (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later),
The decorative design display means includes:
Based on the first decorative design effect pattern determined by the first decorative design effect pattern determination means, the first decorative design is displayed in a variable manner, and the second decoration determined by the second decorative design effect pattern determination means. It is possible to perform a variable display of the second decorative design based on the design effect pattern,
When it is determined by the third decorative symbol display determining means that the third decorative symbol is variably displayed, the third decorative symbol is variably displayed in a state in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed. It is characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, when the third decorative symbol is displayed, the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) are not displayed. to be born. In addition, since the third decorative symbol is displayed in the non-display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the non-display mode is displayed after the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. If the decorative design is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the first decorative design and the second decorative design are combined to produce the third decorative design.

A gaming machine according to another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The third decorative symbol display determining means determines that the third decorative symbol display is variably displayed when it is determined by the first determining means to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player.

  According to this gaming machine, the transition to the special gaming state can be expected by displaying the third decorative symbol.

A gaming machine according to another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
First decorative symbol stop mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later) for determining a stop mode of the first decorative symbol based on a determination result by the first determining unit;
Second decorative symbol stop mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later) for determining a stop mode of the second decorative symbol based on a determination result by the second determination unit;
Third decorative symbol stop mode determining means for determining a stop mode of the third decorative symbol based on the determination result by the first decorative symbol stop mode determining unit and the determination result by the second decorative symbol stop mode determining unit. (For example, a sub CPU 71 described later);
With
The decorative symbol display means stops and displays the third decorative symbol based on the third decorative symbol stop mode determined by the third decorative symbol stop mode determination unit.

  According to this gaming machine, since the stop mode of the third decorative symbol is determined based on the stop mode of the first decorative symbol and the stop mode of the second decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are further determined. Relevance can be given to symbols.

According to another preferred embodiment of the invention,
When the third decorative symbol is displayed, it is provided with condition establishment determination means (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later) for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is established,
The decorative symbol display means displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a state in which the third decorative symbol is not displayed when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition satisfaction determining unit. It is characterized by displaying.

  According to this gaming machine, since the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed again, the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be understood. Therefore, the transition determination result to the special game state can be clearly understood.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by providing a relationship between two decorative symbols when a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. it can.

It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention. It is the figure which expanded and showed the liquid crystal display device and its periphery in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is an enlarged view of the area | region (symbol display apparatus) enclosed with the dashed-two dotted line of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit (mainly main control circuit) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit (mainly sub control circuit) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows the determination table for normal symbols. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol hit determination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of a 1st special symbol. It is a figure which shows the hit determination table of a 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of a 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation time determination table. It is a figure which shows the chase time determination table. It is a figure which shows the modification of a pursuit time determination table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the main process performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the system timer interruption process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the input detection process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the input detection process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol control process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol control process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol memory | storage check process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol memory | storage check process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol variation time determination process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol display time management process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special game state start interval management process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during the 1st big prize opening open | release performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd big prize opening opening process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special game state completion | finish interval process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol game completion | finish process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol game completion | finish process performed with a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the main process performed with a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the command analysis process performed with a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the command analysis process performed with a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the display control process performed with a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the audio | voice control process performed with a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the lamp | ramp control process performed with a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the movable member control process performed with a subcontrol circuit. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol hit determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the 1st special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the hit determination table of the 2nd special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the 2nd special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the change time determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the chase time determination table in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol control process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol control process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation time determination process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol display time management process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol display time management process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the small hit | interval management process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of the 1st big winning opening at the time of a small hit performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of the 2nd big winning opening at the time of a small hit performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the small hit | end end interval process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol game completion | finish process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol game completion | finish process performed with the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main CPU in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main CPU in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol control process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol control process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening waiting time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in other embodiment. It is a time chart which concerns on operation | movement of a special winning opening in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables for determination regarding the jackpot in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for the decoration design effect pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for the decoration design effect pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for the decoration design effect pattern determination in other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the decoration symbol and shutter accessory in other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the decoration symbol and shutter accessory in other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the decoration symbol and shutter accessory in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the sub control circuit performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd display area deletion process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol forced stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter accessory moving control process performed in other embodiment. It is a time chart which concerns on operation | movement of the decoration symbol and shutter accessory in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for the decoration design effect pattern determination in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the movable accessory initial position control process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a time chart which concerns on the operation | movement of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment, a shutter accessory, and a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a time chart which concerns on operation | movement of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment, and a shutter accessory. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the decoration symbol and shutter accessory in the modification of other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the decoration symbol and shutter accessory in the modification of other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the decoration symbol and shutter accessory in the modification of other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the decoration symbol and shutter accessory in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decoration symbol determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decoration symbol determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decoration symbol determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for the decoration design effect pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the unification effect of the decoration symbol in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the unification effect of the decoration symbol in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the sub control circuit performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern change process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol forced stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern change process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol stop process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the unification effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the unification effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the unification effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the unification effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the unification effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decoration symbol change position determination in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle effect of the decoration design in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle effect of the decoration design in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle effect of the decoration design in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern change process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern change process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for the decoration design effect pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for additional display area determination in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the premise of the additional display effect in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the display area addition pattern at the time of big hit in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the display area addition pattern at the time of loss in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display effect of the decoration design in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display effect of the decoration design in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern change process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display effect of the decoration symbol in the modification of other embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Composition of gaming machine]
First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine will be described.

  In one example, the pachinko gaming machine has a structure in which a glass door, a dish unit, a launching device, and a game board are supported by a base door. The base door supports the discharge unit and the substrate unit on the back side, and is fitted into the opening of the main body.

  The glass door is pivotally attached to the base door so as to be openable and closable. A speaker and a lamp are disposed on the glass door.

  The dish unit is for storing game balls, and is disposed on the base door at the lower part of the glass door. This dish unit is configured as a unit in which a lower dish is integrated below a top dish.

  The launching device is for launching game balls stored in the upper plate to the game area. This launching device has a launching handle and is disposed at the lower right portion of the base door.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 10 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disposed in front of the base door so as to be positioned behind the protective glass in the glass door. The game board 10 has a game area 11 in which the launched game ball can roll down.

  The game board 10 includes guide rails 12A and 12B, a first start port 14A, a second start port 14B, a passage gate 15, a first large winning port 16A, a second large winning port 16B, a first shutter 17A, and a second shutter. 17B, the general winning opening 18, the symbol display device 2, the liquid crystal display device 3, the movable members 4A and 4B, and the display decoration member 5 are provided.

  The guide rail 12 </ b> A is disposed so as to surround the game area 11 in order to define the game area 11. The guide rail 12B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 10 together with the guide rail 12A, and is disposed on the left side of the game board 10 inside the guide rail 12A.

  The game ball launched by the launching device flows down toward the lower side of the game board 10 while changing its advancing direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like driven into the game board 10. In this process, the game ball wins the first starting port 14A, the second starting port 14B, the passing gate 15, the first major winning port 16A, the second major winning port 16B, or the general winning port 18, and does not win. The game balls are discharged from the outlet 19. When the rotation angle of the launching handle is small, the game ball flows down mainly on the left side of the game area 11 because the launching force applied to the game ball is small. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the launching handle is large, the game ball Since the launching force applied to the game is large, it flows down mainly on the right side of the game area 11. In general, the method of hitting the game ball to the left of the game area 11 is called left-handed, and the method of hitting the game ball to the right of the game area 11 is called right-handed. The present embodiment is configured to be suitable for right-handed in a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) and left-handed in other gaming states.

  The first start port 14A and the second start port 14B provide a chance to win a big hit lottery on the condition that a game ball is won (passed), and the results of the big hit lottery are a first special symbol display device 22 and a second special symbol display device. 23 (see FIG. 3) is given an opportunity to be displayed.

  The first start port 14 </ b> A is provided at a position below the liquid crystal display device 3. A first start port entrance sensor 141 (see FIG. 4) is disposed behind the first start port 14A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting entrance ball sensor 141 (see FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a predetermined number of game balls are passed through the payout opening. To the upper or lower plate. The result of the lottery for the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14A is displayed on the first special symbol display device 22 (see FIG. 3).

  The second start port 14B is provided directly below the first start port 14A, and a second start port entrance ball sensor 142 (see FIG. 4) is disposed behind the second start port 14B. When a game ball is detected by the second start entrance ball sensor 142 (see FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a preset number of game balls are passed through the payout opening. To the upper or lower plate. The result of the lottery for the winning of the game ball to the second start port 14B is displayed on the second special symbol display device 23 (see FIG. 3).

  The second starting port 14B has a difficulty in winning a prize defined by a pair of blade members 143 serving as ordinary electric accessories. The pair of blade members 143 can select an open state in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 14B is allowed and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 14B is not allowed. is there. These blade members 143 are rotated in the left-right direction by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 144 (see FIG. 4), and are configured as so-called electric tulips. When the pair of blade members 143 is stopped and displayed with a predetermined symbol (a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the lamps 201 and 202 (see FIG. 3)) in the normal symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3) to be described later, It becomes open for a predetermined number of times, and it becomes easy for a game ball to win the second start port 14B.

  For example, in the normal symbol game, the winning probability in the low probability state (the normal gaming state after the short-time end and the big hit gaming state) is, for example, 0/256 (see FIG. 7), and the pair of blade members 143 are opened. There is no. Therefore, in the low probability state, there is virtually no game ball winning at the second starting port 14B, and a big hit lottery is performed only by winning the game ball at the first starting port 14A, and the game proceeds. On the other hand, the winning probability in the high probability state (probability variation gaming state and during the short time in the normal gaming state) is, for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7). The game is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 14B is allowed. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, a big hit lottery is performed by winning game balls to both the first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B, and the game proceeds. Here, for the release of the pair of blade members 143 for one game of the normal symbol game, for example, one release time is 1.3 seconds, and the total number of releases is three times. The upper limit number of winning counts to the second start port 14B for the winning game is, for example, eight.

  Note that the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the electric tulip that rotates the blade member 143 to the left and right. For example, the tongue member (velo) moves before and after the game board 10 or rotates before and after the game board 10. It may be an open / close door (shutter) that moves to open and close the second start port 14B.

  The passing gate 15 provides an opportunity to perform a normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 14B, and is provided at the left center position of the game board 10. The passing gate 15 is provided with a passing ball sensor 151 (see FIG. 4), and a normal symbol lottery is performed when a game ball is detected by the passing ball sensor 151. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on a normal symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3) described later. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, an effect image that allows the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3. You may be made to do.

  The first big winning opening 16A and the second big winning opening 16B are portions that are opened in a special gaming state (a big hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B are arranged side by side in the lower right part of the game board 10, which is to the right of the first start opening 14A and the second start opening 14B. That is, the first grand prize winning opening 16A and the second big winning prize opening 16B are arranged at positions where winning can be made when the player makes a right turn. A first count sensor 161 and a second count sensor 162 (see FIG. 4) are provided at the first grand prize winning opening 16A and the second big winning prize opening 16B. The first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 are for counting the number of winning game balls to the first grand prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B. When the second count sensor 162 confirms the winning of the game ball, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate through the payout opening.

  The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B control the first grand prize winning port 16A and the second grand prize winning port 16B in an open state or a closed state. Usually, the first grand prize winning port 16A and the second grand prize winning port are controlled. It arrange | positions so that the opening | mouth 16B may be plugged up. The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B are driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 171 and a second big prize opening solenoid 172 (see FIG. 4). The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B are opened so that a game ball can be awarded to the first grand prize winning port 16A and the second big prize winning port 16B by the first grand prize winning solenoid 171 and the second grand prize winning solenoid 172. It is individually driven to change into a state and a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball. The first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23, which will be described later, drives the first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 to open the first special winning port 16A and the second large winning port 16B by the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B. 221 or the second special symbol 231 becomes a predetermined stop display mode and is performed when the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The open state of the first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B by the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B is the count value (game ball) by the first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 (see FIG. 4). Is maintained until the predetermined time (for example, 9) is reached or the open time elapses for a predetermined time (for example, about 25 seconds). On the other hand, when the number of passing game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first shutter 17A or the second shutter 17B reaches a predetermined time, the first grand prize opening 16A or the second big prize opening The first shutter 17A or the second shutter 17B is driven so as to close 16B.

  In the big hit gaming state, the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B are driven, so that the opening and closing of the first big winning port 16A and the second big winning port 16B are repeated. The first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B are alternately opened by the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B being driven alternately. That is, in the big hit gaming state, at least one of the first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B is in an open state, and when one of them is in an open state, The winning opening is closed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when one of the pachinko gaming machines 1 is in the open state, it is possible to execute the remaining ball monitoring process for the other large winning opening in the closed state.

  In general, the state where the big winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state is called “round game”, from the end of the round game (after closing the big winning opening) until the next round game is started (big winning) The closed state of the big winning opening until the mouth is opened is called “inter-round game” or “inter-round interval”.

  In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first grand prize winning port 16A and the second grand prize winning port 16B are alternately opened so that both are not closed (at least one is opened). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is no “inter-round game” (“inter-round interval”), and it is possible to digest the big hit gaming state in a shorter time than in the past.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round (1R) and the second round as a second round (2R). In the present embodiment, the number of times the first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B are opened in the big hit gaming state is 15, 8, or 4 times (see FIGS. 9 and 11). May be called “15R big hit”, a big hit with 8 open times will be called “8R big hit”, and a big hit with 4 open times may be called “4R big hit”.

  The general winning opening 18 is an accessory for paying out a specified number of game balls on condition that a game ball is won. Four general winning ports 18 are formed in the lower left part of the game board 10 that is to the left of the first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B. That is, the general winning opening 18 is arranged at a position where a winning can be made when left-handed. Behind the general winning opening 18, a general winning opening entering sensor 181 is provided, and the general winning opening entering sensor 181 detects the winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 18. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 18, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate through the payout port.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display device 2 includes a normal symbol display device 20, a normal symbol hold display device 21, a first special symbol display device 22, a second special symbol display device 23, and a first special symbol hold. It has a display device 24, a second special symbol hold display device 25, a first special symbol changing display lamp 26, and a second special symbol changing display lamp 27.

  The normal symbol display device 20 displays a lottery result for the “normal symbol game” that determines whether or not to open the second start port 14B by driving the normal electric accessory (the blade member 143 (see FIG. 1)). It includes two LED lamps 201 and 202. The two LED lamps 201 and 202 are arranged side by side and turned on or off after repeating blinking. When the combination of turning on and off the LED lamps 201 and 202 in the normal symbol display device 20 is in a predetermined mode, the blade member 143 (see FIG. 1) is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port 14B is opened and closed. Allow winning of game balls.

  The normal symbol hold display device 21 displays the number of times that the variable display of the held normal symbols can be performed by turning on or off the four LED lamps 211, 212, 213, and 214. The four LED lamps 211, 212, 213, and 214 are arranged side by side with the LED lamps 201 and 202 on the right side of the normal symbol display device 20. In the hold display by the LED lamps 211, 212, 213, and 214, for example, when the number of hold is “1”, the LED lamp 211 is turned on and the LED lamps 212, 213, and 214 are turned off. When the number of reservations is “2”, the LED lamps 211 and 212 are turned on and the LED lamps 213 and 214 are turned off. When the number of holds is “3”, the LED lamps 211, 212, and 213 are turned on and the LED lamp 214 is turned off. When the hold number is “4”, all of the LED lamps 211, 212, 213, and 214 are turned on.

  The 1st special symbol display device 22 and the 2nd special symbol display device 23 show the result of the big hit lottery with respect to the “special symbol game”, and each include a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display device 22 displays the variation of the first special symbol 221 in response to the start winning at the first starting port 14A, and displays the big hit lottery result based on the winning at the first starting port 14A. It is. The second special symbol display device 23 displays a variation display of the second special symbol 231 in response to a start winning at the second starting port 14B, and displays a big hit lottery result based on the winning at the second starting port 14B. It is. The variable display of the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 is performed by repeatedly turning on / off (flashing) the eight elements of the seven segments and the dots constituting the seven-segment LED. The result of the big hit lottery is displayed by a segment pattern formed by turning on / off the seven segments of the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 and the eight elements of the dots. Specifically, symbols (“A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “A”, “B”, symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23, “G”, “H”, “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, and “h”) for the presence of dots and seven segments “Dot + segment display A” is “A”, “dot + segment display B” is “B”, “dot + segment display C” is “C”, “dot + segment display D”. Is “D”, “dot + segment display E” is “E”, “dot + segment display F” is “F”, “dot + segment display G” is “G”, “dot + segment display H” is “ "H", "No dot + segment display A" is "a", "No dot + segment display B" is "b", "Dot “+ Segment display C” is “c”, “no dot + segment display D” is “d”, “no dot + segment display E” is “e”, “no dot + segment display F” is “f”, “No dot + segment display G” is displayed as “g”, and “No dot + segment display H” is displayed as “h”.

  The first special symbol hold display device 24 and the second special symbol hold display device 25 include four LED lamps 241, 242, 243, 244, 251, 252, 253, and 254, respectively. 241, 242, 243, 244, 251, 252, 253, 254 display the number of executions (holding number) of variable display of the first or second special symbol 221, 231 held by turning on or off. is there. Each of the first and second special symbol hold display devices 24 and 25 is arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The display mode of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold display device 24 and the second special symbol hold display device 25 is the same as the display mode of the hold number by the normal symbol hold display device 21.

  The first special symbol hold display device 24 and the second special symbol hold display device 25 enter the first or second start opening when the first or second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 are variably displayed. When a game ball is detected by the ball sensors 141 and 142 (see FIG. 4), the execution (start) of the variable display of the first or second special symbol 221 or 231 is suspended. When the first or second special symbol 221 or 231 that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first or second special symbol 221 or 231 that has been suspended is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 is suspended, and in this embodiment, the first and second start ports 14A and 14B are connected to each other. The maximum number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 by entering the ball is 4 respectively. When the first special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is held four times, information on the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol 221 is stored in the main RAM 62 (see FIG. 4). The first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory are stored in the first special symbol start memory area (0) as the start memory, and the information of the first special symbol game for four times held is stored. It is stored in the area (4) as a start memory. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held four times, the second special symbol game information corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol game in the main RAM 62 (see FIG. 4). The information of the second special symbol game for four times stored and reserved as the start memory in the symbol start memory area (0) includes the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4 ) Is stored as the start memory. Therefore, the total number of winning holds in both the first and second special symbols 221 and 231, that is, the first start port 14 </ b> A and the second start port 14 </ b> B is eight in total.

  In addition, instead of the first and second special symbol hold display devices 24 and 25, or in addition to the first and second special symbol hold display devices 24 and 25, the liquid crystal display device 3 to be described later performs a first start. You may make it display the winning suspension to the opening | mouth 14A, and the winning suspension to the 2nd starting port 14B.

  The first special symbol changing display lamp 26 and the second special symbol changing display lamp 27 are arranged on the left side of the first or second special symbol hold display devices 24 and 25.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the liquid crystal display device 3 has a demonstration display, a first start port 14 </ b> A, and a second start port 14 </ b> B, as well as various effects related to the display of fluctuation and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and games. Is displayed at the approximate center of the game board 10.

  The first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner and a stop manner corresponding to the variation display and the stop indication of the first special symbol 221 as identification information in the first special symbol display device 22 described later.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, a game ball can be won only at the first starting port 14A, and therefore the first special symbol 221 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped based on the winning at the first starting port 14A. . Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the first decorative symbol 31 in the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed in a variable display and a stop display corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol 221.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state (including the case of the probability variation gaming state + the short-time gaming state), the game ball can be won at both the first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B. The first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and stopped based on the winning to the mouth 14A, and the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed and stopped based on the winning to the second starting port 14B. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, the first decorative symbol 31 in the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed in a variable display and a stop display corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol 221. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 3 in the short-time gaming state, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in response to the variation display and the stop indication in the second special symbol 231.

  In the short-time gaming state (including the case of the probability variation gaming state + the short-time gaming state), in the big hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 14B, the normal big hit (the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state) If the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with three identical symbols (the number “6” in the illustrated example). After that, the state displayed on the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 3 is maintained (second decorative symbol 32). Thereby, it is suggested to the player that the second big symbol 231 is stopped and displayed that the big hit is usually won.

  The stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 (arranged by the number “6”) is maintained until the second special symbol 231 is stopped and displayed. At this time, if there is a hold for the first start port 14A or a change display of the first start port 14A, the first special symbol 221 is displayed in a variable display / stop display. The change display of the first special symbol 221 under such a situation is referred to as “chase” in the present embodiment. Then, when the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed, the specific first special symbol 221 corresponding to the big hit (probability fluctuation big hit) accompanied by the transition to the probability variation gaming state is stopped and displayed after the big hit ends. In this case, the normal jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is forcibly canceled (follow-up is successful), and the probability variation jackpot processing corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is prioritized. As a result, when the jackpot gaming state for the probability variation jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is ended, the jackpot gaming state is won despite the fact that the normal jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol 231 was won first. After the end of the game, the game changes to the probability variation gaming state.

  For example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT display may be used as a display device for displaying the first decorative pattern 31 instead of the liquid crystal display device 3 or in addition to the liquid crystal display device 3. Good.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the movable members 4A and 4B have special reach when a predetermined timing, for example, when the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed, during the notice effect, during the prefetch effect, It is movable when branching to, special reach development, rebirth production, big hit occurrence, or big promotion game round promotion production.

  The movable member 4 </ b> A imitates a character and is arranged above the liquid crystal display device 3. The movable member 4 </ b> A moves downward to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display device 3 and rotates at the center of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  The movable member 4B simulates a cylinder and is disposed below the liquid crystal display device 3. The movable member 4B moves up and down or vibrates left and right. The movable member 4B can perform an effect in which fireworks are launched from the movable member 4B by cooperating with the effect of the liquid crystal display device 3. Of course, in the movable members 4A and 4B, instead of fireworks, it is possible to produce an effect in which characters and numbers (decorative symbols, jackpot expectation, pseudo-repetition times, etc.) pop out.

  The display decoration member 5 performs a predetermined display such as numerals on a decoration member imitating a sphere. The display decoration member 5 incorporates a display unit 50 having two 7-segment LEDs 50A and 50B, and can display digital numbers. The display decoration member 5 functions as a countdown timer for a chance time (follow-up time) in which a normal jackpot “follow-up” (forced cancellation) in the probability variation gaming state can be performed.

  Of course, in the display decoration member 5, in addition to the follow-up time countdown, the jackpot expectation degree, the number of pseudo-reams, the remaining number of games in the short-time game state (or the short game time when digested), and the special performance mode after the short-time game state ends. A number such as a count may be displayed. As the display unit 50 in the display decorative member 5, other display means such as a dot matrix or a liquid crystal display device may be used.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control circuit 6 that controls a game and a sub-control circuit 7 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control circuit 6 includes a main CPU 60, a main ROM 61 (read only memory), a main RAM 62 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 63, a serial communication IC 64, and a reset clock pulse generation circuit 65. And connected to various devices and various switches.

  The main CPU 60 is connected to the main ROM 61 and the main RAM 62, and has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 61.

  The main ROM 61 stores various tables in addition to a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 60, for example, a program for causing the main CPU 60 to execute the processes shown in FIGS. .

  The main RAM 62 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 60. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 60, other readable / writable storage media can be used instead of the main RAM 62.

  The initial reset circuit 63 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  The serial communication IC 64 transmits a command from the main CPU 60 to the sub-control circuit 7 and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 65 is for generating a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process to be described later, and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  Various devices connected to the main control circuit 6 include sensors, solenoids, and a backup clear switch 80 in addition to the symbol display device 2.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display device 2 is a normal symbol display device 20 that performs variable display of a normal symbol in a normal symbol game, a normal symbol hold display device 21, and a variable symbol special symbol in a special symbol game as described above. The first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23, the first special symbol hold display device 24, the second special symbol hold display device 25, the first special symbol changing display lamp 26, and the second special symbol A symbol change display lamp 27 is included.

  The sensors shown in FIG. 4 include a first count sensor 161, a second count sensor 162, a general winning opening entrance ball sensor 181, a passing ball sensor 151, a first start opening entrance sensor 141, and a second start opening entrance sensor. 142 is included. The first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 are configured to supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when a game ball passes through a predetermined area of the first and second big prize opening 16A, 16B. is there. The general winning opening ball entering sensor 181 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when a game ball wins the general winning opening 18. The passing ball sensor 151 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when a game ball passes through the passing gate 15. The first start port entrance sensor 141 and the second start port entrance sensor 142 supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when a game ball wins the first and second start ports 14A and 14B. Is.

  The solenoids include a normal electric accessory solenoid 144, a first big prize opening solenoid 171 and a second big prize opening solenoid 172. The ordinary electric accessory solenoid 144 is for driving a pair of blade members 143 as an ordinary electric accessory in order to allow a winning of a game ball to the second start port 14B. The first big prize opening solenoid 171 is for driving the first shutter 17A in order to open the first big prize opening 16A. The second big prize opening solenoid 172 is for driving the second shutter 17B in order to open the second big prize opening 16B.

  The back clear switch 80 is for clearing backup data in the event of a power interruption or the like in accordance with the operation of the game hall manager.

  The main control circuit 6 is further connected with a payout / firing control circuit 81. The payout / launch control circuit 81 is connected to the payout device 82 and the launch device 83, and controls the payout device 82 and the launch device 83. A card unit 84 is further connected to the payout / firing control circuit 81. The card unit 84 can be transmitted / received to / from the ball lending operation unit 85 that outputs a signal requesting the card unit 84 to lend a game ball to the card unit 84 by a player's operation. The payout / launch control circuit 81 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 6 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82. The payout device 82 is made to pay out the game ball. The payout / firing control circuit 81 further supplies power to the firing solenoid according to the turning angle when the launching handle of the launching device 83 is gripped by the player and is turned clockwise. Control to fire the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control circuit 7 is connected to the main control circuit 6 via a command input port (not shown), and is configured so that a command is supplied from the main control circuit 6. . The sub control circuit 7 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 6, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a movable member control circuit 74, and a display control circuit 75. A voice control circuit 76, a lamp control circuit 77, and a button control circuit 78.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 72. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the sub control circuit 7 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 6.

  The program ROM 72 stores various tables in addition to a program for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 71, for example, a program for causing the sub CPU 71 to execute the processes shown in FIGS. ing. As the programs and various tables, those recorded in another computer-readable storage medium can be used instead of the program ROM 72 or in addition to the program ROM 72. As a storage medium in this case, for example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge can be used. Further, the above-described programs and tables may be downloaded from a server outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 73.

  The work RAM 73 stores various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71. As the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71, another readable / writable storage medium can be used instead of the work RAM 73 or in addition to the work RAM 73.

  The movable member control circuit 74 is used to drive and control the movable members 4A and 4B as an effect when the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 are variably displayed or as an effect in the big hit gaming state. .

  The display control circuit 75 controls display on the display decoration member 5 and the liquid crystal display device 3 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. The display control circuit 75 controls the display decoration member 5 so as to control the display decoration member 5 so that predetermined digital numbers are displayed in a variable manner or stopped.

  The display control circuit 75 also displays an image on the liquid crystal display device 3, an image data processor (VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, and a buffer for the image data. A frame buffer, a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal, and the like are included. The display control circuit 75 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 in the frame buffer in accordance with an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, and various effect image data.

  The display control circuit 75 further supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 3 at a predetermined timing. In the liquid crystal display device 3, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 76 is for performing control related to the sound generated from the speaker 761. For example, a sound source IC for performing control related to sound, a sound data ROM for storing various sound data, and an amplifier for amplifying the sound signal (AMP) is included. The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 761, for example, notification, production, and error notification. The sound source IC can select one piece of sound data from a plurality of pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in accordance with a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The sound source IC can further read out the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, convert the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supply the audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 761.

  The lamp control circuit 77 is for controlling a lamp 771 including a decoration lamp and the like, from a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns, and the like. It is configured. The lamp 771 performs various notifications such as production and notification. The button control circuit 78 is for controlling a button 781 including an operation button, a jog dial, and the like, and includes an interface circuit for inputting an operation signal from the button 781. The button 781 is for the player to perform a pressing operation, a rotating operation, or the like, for example, when performing an effect.

  FIG. 6 shows a state in which a signal is supplied from the main control circuit 6 to the sub control circuit 7 and no signal can be supplied from the sub control circuit 7 to the main control circuit 6. You may comprise so that a signal can be transmitted to the main control circuit 6 from the circuit 7. FIG.

[Game flow]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state is shifted between the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state with a low probability of winning a big hit (for example, 1/300), and shifts to when the big hit gaming state due to the normal big hit ends. In the present embodiment, 50% of the jackpot winning is a normal jackpot (see FIGS. 9 and 11).

  The probability variation gaming state is a gaming state with a high probability (for example, 1/30) of the jackpot winning probability, and transitions when the jackpot gaming state due to the probability variation jackpot ends. In the present embodiment, 50% of the jackpot winning win is a probability variation jackpot (see FIGS. 9 and 11). In the probability variation gaming state according to the present invention, the probability of winning in the normal symbol game is high (for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7)).

  The special game state (big hit game state) is a game state in which the first and second big prize winning openings 16A and 16B are opened. In the normal game state or the probability variation game state, a lottery is won to win the first or second special game state. The symbols 221 and 231 are in a specific form (derived special symbols “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, “H”, “a”, “b” ”,“ C ”,“ d ”,“ e ”,“ f ”,“ g ”,“ h ”(see FIGS. 9 and 11)), and then the process proceeds. 4R, 8R, and 15R are set as the special game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the big hit gaming state is completed by digesting a predetermined number of rounds, the game moves to either the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state with different big winning lottery probabilities, but has changed to any gaming state. There may be a short-time gaming state until the predetermined number of games is exhausted while giving notifications that are not known. Here, the short-time gaming state is a high probability of hitting in a normal symbol game (for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7)), and a winning of a game ball to the second start port 14B is achieved by opening the blade member 143. It is in a supported state.

  The number of short-time games is determined until the next big win lottery is won when the game moves to the probability variation game state, and becomes 20 times, 30 times, or 50 times when the game state changes to the normal game state. Therefore, if the blade member 143 is operating even when the maximum number of games of 50 times that is the maximum value set as the number of short-time games is exceeded, the special symbol game of 50 times after the end of the big hit gaming state is a probability It is determined that the game is a special symbol game with a variable gaming state, and regardless of the production or announcement of the liquid crystal display device 3 or the like, it is a probability variable gaming state in which the short-time gaming state continues until the next big win lottery is won. Determine. In addition, there is a case in which it is informed from the first special symbol game after the big hit gaming state is finished that the probability variation gaming state is present. In that case, it is determined that the game state is a probability variation game state in which the short-time game state continues until the next big win lottery is won.

  When the predetermined number of short-time games have been consumed and the short-time game state has ended, a transition is made to the special performance mode for production. The special effect mode is an effect in a normal gaming state where, for example, 15 games are continued. In this special effect mode, it is difficult for a reach effect to occur, but if a reach occurs, an effect with a high expectation level for a big hit is performed.

[Normal symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 7 shows a normal symbol hit determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data relating to the normal symbol hit determination table is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The normal symbol hit determination table is referred to when the normal symbol hit lottery is performed based on the acquired random number when the passing ball sensor 151 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 15. is there. In the normal symbol winning lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 255, and the winning probability in the low probability state (the normal gaming state after the short-time end and the big hit gaming state) is 0/256. Therefore, in the low probability state, the winning combination is not won, and there is virtually no winning of the game ball to the second start port 14B. On the other hand, the winning probability in the high probability state (probability changing gaming state and short time in the normal gaming state) is 255/256, which makes it easy to win.

[First special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 8 shows a special symbol hit determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data relating to the first special symbol hit determination table is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The first special symbol hit determination table is based on the first random symbol based on the acquired random number, when the first starting entrance ball sensor 141 detects that a game ball has won the first starting entrance 14A. This is referred to when the lottery is performed. In the first special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the winning random number value in the normal gaming state is one of “0”, and the winning random number value in the probability varying gaming state is “0” to “9” of 10 It is a piece. Therefore, the hit probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state and a high probability of 1/30 (10/300) in the probability variation gaming state. When the winning random number is acquired, after the fluctuation of the first special symbol 221 is stopped, the state shifts to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state). On the other hand, if a random number other than the winning random number (losing random number) is acquired, there is no transition of the gaming state after the first special symbol 221 stops changing.

[Design determination table for first special symbol]
FIG. 9 shows a symbol determination table for the first special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data relating to the symbol determination table of the first special symbol is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The symbol determination table of the first special symbol acquires a big hit random number in the winning lottery of the first special symbol 221 (“0” in the normal gaming state, “0” to “9” in the probability variation gaming state (FIG. 8). Reference)) is referred to. In the symbol determination of the first special symbol 221, the lottery random number range is 0-5. In the normal game state symbol determination, when the acquired random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “A” with a 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired random number is “1”, the derived special symbol is “8R certain variation big hit”. B ”, when the acquired random number is“ 2 ”, the derived special symbol is“ C ”with 4R probability variation jackpot, and when the acquired random number is“ 3 ”to“ 5 ”, the derived special symbol is“ D ”with 4R normal jackpot It corresponds to. In the symbol determination of the probability variation gaming state, when the acquired random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “E” with a 15R probability variable big hit, and when the acquired random number is “1”, the derived special symbol is with an 8R probability variable big hit. When the acquired random number is “2”, the derived special symbol is “G” with 4R probability variable big hit, and when the acquired random number is “3” to “5”, the special symbol derived with 4R normal big hit is “H”. Is supported.

  When the acquired random numbers in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, the short-time game from the first rotation after the end of the special game state until the next big bonus lottery in the special symbol wins It becomes a state. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is entered. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is entered. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set.

[Second special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 10 shows a special symbol hit determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data relating to the hit determination table of the second special symbol 231 is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The hit determination table of the second special symbol 231 is referred to when the second special symbol lottery is performed in response to the fact that the second starting port entrance ball sensor 142 detects that a game ball has won the second starting port 14B. It is what is done. In the second special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the winning random number value in the normal gaming state is one of “0”, and the random number in the probability variation gaming state is ten of “0” to “9”. is there. Therefore, the hit probability in the normal gaming state is a low probability of 1/300, and the hit probability in the probability variation gaming state is a high probability of 1/30 (10/300). When the big hit random number is acquired, after the fluctuation of the second special symbol 231 is stopped, the state shifts to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state). On the other hand, when a non-hit random number (losing random number) is acquired, there is no transition of the gaming state after the second special symbol 231 stops changing.

[Second special symbol determination table]
FIG. 11 shows a symbol determination table for the second special symbol 231 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data relating to the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 acquires a big hit random number in the winning lottery of the second special symbol 231 ("0" in the normal gaming state, "0" to "9" in the probability variation gaming state (Fig. 10))). In the symbol determination of the second special symbol 231, the random number range is 0-5. In the normal game state symbol determination, when the acquired random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “a” with a 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired random number is “1”, the derived special symbol is “8R certain variation big hit”. b ”, when the acquired random number is“ 2 ”, the derived special symbol is“ c ”with 4R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired random number is“ 3 ”to“ 5 ”, the derived special symbol is“ d ”with 4R normal big hit. It corresponds to. In the symbol determination of the probability variation gaming state, when the acquired random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “e” with a 15R probability variable big hit, and when the acquired random number is “1”, the derived special symbol is with an 8R probability variable big hit. When the acquired random number is “2”, the derived special symbol is “g” with 4R probability variable big hit, and when the acquired random number is “3” to “5”, the derived special symbol is “h” with 4R normal big hit. It corresponds to.

  When the acquired random numbers in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, the short-time game from the first rotation after the end of the special game state until the next big bonus lottery in the special symbol wins It becomes a state. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is entered. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is entered. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set.

[Variation time determination table]
FIG. 12 shows a variation time determination table for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data relating to this variation time determination table is stored in the main ROM 61. In FIG. 12, it is not classified as a normal gaming state and a probability variation gaming state, but for convenience, it is classified as a normal gaming state A, a normal gaming state B, and a probability variation gaming state. Here, “normal gaming state A” means a gaming state with a low probability of winning a big hit (normal gaming state) and no short time, and “normal gaming state B” means a low probability of winning a big hit (normal gaming state). And it means a game state with a short time.

  The variation time determination table is the first based on the derived special symbols determined in the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 in FIG. 9 or the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 in FIG. This is for determining the variation time of the special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231. The range of the random time for determining the variation time is 0-2.

  In determining the variation time in the normal gaming state A (no time saving), the derived special symbol is “A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”, that is, the special symbol winning lottery When the result is “probability variation jackpot”, when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 35 seconds, when “1”, the variation time is 50 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 60 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “D” or “d”, that is, when the result of the special symbol hitting lottery is “ordinary big hit”, when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 40 seconds, “ When “1”, the variation time is 55 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 65 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “-” (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol hitting lottery is “losing”, when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 10 seconds, “1 "", The fluctuation time is 25 seconds, and when "2", the fluctuation time is 45 seconds.

  In determining the variation time in the normal gaming state B (with short time), the derived special symbol is “A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”, that is, the special symbol winning lottery When the result is “probability variation jackpot”, when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 20 seconds, when “1”, the variation time is 30 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 40 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “D” or “d”, that is, when the result of the special symbol hitting lottery is “ordinary big hit”, when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 25 seconds, “ When “1”, the variation time is 35 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 45 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “-” (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “losing”, when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 7 seconds, “1” "", The fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and when "2", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds.

  In determining the variation time in the probability variation gaming state, the derived special symbol is “E”, “e”, “F”, “f”, “G” or “g”, that is, the result of the lottery of the special symbol is “probability” In the case of “large variation hit”, the fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds, “1” is the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, and “2” is the fluctuation time is 25 seconds. . When the derived special symbol is “H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “ordinary jackpot” (excluding the normal jackpot in the second special symbol 231 (derived symbol “h”)), the obtained variation time When the decision random number is “0”, the variation time is 20 seconds, when “1”, the variation time is 25 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 30 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “-” (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “losing”, when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 5 seconds, “1” "", The fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and when "2", the fluctuation time is 15 seconds.

  When the derived special symbol is “h”, that is, when the winning lottery result of the second special symbol 231 in the probability variation state is “ordinary big hit”, the variation time is determined based on the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. To do.

[Pursuit time determination table]
FIG. 13 shows a pursuit time determination table for the pachinko gaming machine 2. This pursuit time determination table is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation time when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is “normal big hit”. Data relating to the follow-up time determination table is stored in the main ROM 61, and the follow-up time is determined based on the last special symbol and the obtained random time for determining the change time (random number range 0 to 2).

  Here, the “special symbol” is the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the probability variation jackpot that has caused the transition to the current probability variation state. That is, the pursuit time is defined according to a special symbol (number of big hit rounds) that has become a trigger for the transition to the probability variation state.

  The “follow-up time” is a change time when the jackpot lottery result is a normal jackpot in the probability varying game state that has shifted to after the end of the special game state (big hit game state) after the stop display of the previous special symbol. During the pursuit time, even if the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed, the winning lottery result of the first special symbol 221 triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14A is displayed. Based on this, the first special symbol 221 repeatedly performs variable display / stop display. In other words, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol 231 during the chase time, the winning lottery result of the first special symbol 221 is displayed first, and when the display result is a specific mode corresponding to the probability variation big hit, The probability variation jackpot in the winning lottery of the first special symbol 221 is prioritized over the normal jackpot in the winning lottery of the 2 special symbol 231. That is, even if a normal jackpot is won in one special symbol, until the one special symbol is stopped after the fluctuation time ends, a probable big hit is allocated in the lottery of the other special symbol, and When the variation time to stop before one special symbol stops is selected, the other probability variation big hit symbol stops before the one special symbol that is changing. Based on the winning contents of both sides and the fluctuation time, when the other probable big hit symbol stops, the symbol that is scheduled to stop at the normal big hit of one special symbol is forcibly stopped at the lost symbol and the change ends The pursuit is realized by doing.

  When the special symbol is “A” or “a” (15R probability variation big hit in the normal gaming state A and B), the follow-up time (second special symbol 231) is obtained when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”. When “1” is “ordinary big hit”) is 150 seconds, when “1” is the follow-up time is 180 seconds, when “2” is the follow-up time is 210 seconds, and the average follow-up time is 3 minutes (180 seconds) ).

  When the special symbol is “B” or “b” (8R probability variation big hit in the normal gaming state A, B), when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”, the follow-up time is 100 seconds, “1 "" Is the follow-up time is 120 seconds, and "2" is the follow-up time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the follow-up time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  If the special symbol is “C” or “c” (4R probability variation big hit in normal gaming state A, B), when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, the follow-up time is 50 seconds, “1 "", The follow-up time is 60 seconds, and when "2", the follow-up time is 70 seconds, and the average value of the follow-up time is 1 minute (60 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “E” or “e” (15R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the follow-up time is 200 seconds when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, and when the follow-up time is “1” When the follow-up time is 240 seconds and “2”, the follow-up time is 280 seconds, and the average value of the follow-up time is 4 minutes (240 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “F” or “f” (8R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the follow-up time is 150 seconds when the obtained random number for variation time determination is “0”, and when the follow-up time is “1” When the follow-up time is 180 seconds and “2”, the follow-up time is 210 seconds, and the average follow-up time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “G” or “g” (4R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the follow-up time is 100 seconds when the obtained random time for variation time determination is “0”, and when the follow-up time is “1” When the follow-up time is 120 seconds and “2”, the follow-up time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the follow-up time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  Probability fluctuation jackpot ("A", "a", "B", "b", "C" or "c") in the special gaming state A, B and probability fluctuation jackpot in the probability variation gaming state ( In both cases of “E”, “e”, “F”, “f”, “G” or “g”), the follow-up time (average value) is preferentially given to the probability variation big hit with a large number of rounds advantageous to the player. Has been. In other words, the special symbol that is more advantageous to the player is given priority to the pursuit time (average value), and the pursuit possibility (the second special symbol 231 is changed with the fluctuation time corresponding to “normal jackpot” in the probability variation gaming state). In the case of a change, the chance to win the probability variation big win in the winning lottery of the first special symbol 221 is higher than the second special symbol 231 (the possibility that the first special symbol 221 stops and displays first). .

  Also, the probability variation jackpot (“A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”) in the special gaming state A, B and the probability variation in the probability variation gaming state In jackpot (“E”, “e”, “F”, “f”, “G” or “g”), the probability variation jackpot in the probability variation gaming state is favored for the follow-up time (average value). ing. In other words, the special symbol acquired in a more advantageous situation for the player has a higher pursuit time (average value), and the pursuit possibility (the second fluctuation time corresponding to the “normal jackpot” in the probability variation gaming state is the second. When the special symbol 231 is fluctuating, the probability variation big hit is won in the first special symbol 221 winning lottery, and the first special symbol 221 may be stopped and displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231). Has been made.

[Pursuit Time Determination Table (Modification)]
FIG. 14 shows a modification of the pursuit time determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This pursuit time determination table is basically the same as the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. 13. For example, the relationship between the special symbol and the acquired random time for determining the fluctuation time and the pursuit time determined at that time is also illustrated. This is the same as the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. 14 is different from the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. Is different.

  When the special symbol is “A”, “a”, “E”, or “e” (normal gaming state A, B or 15R probability variation big hit in probability variation state), the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “ When “0”, the chase time is determined from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state, when “1”, the chase time is determined from the eleventh rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and when “2”, the special game is determined. The pursuit time is determined from the 21st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is “A”, “a”, “E” or “e”, the progress of the short-time game after the end of the special game state when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0” The follow-up time is determined regardless of the stage (number of times of digestion). When “1”, the follow-up time is not determined from the first rotation to the tenth rotation after the end of the special game state, and the normal fluctuation time (for example, FIG. 12). A variation time similar to the derived symbol “H” in the probability variation gaming state (hereinafter the same) is determined, and in the case of “2”, the pursuit time is determined from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state. Usually, the variation time is determined.

  When the special symbol is “B”, “b”, “F” or “f” (normal gaming state A, B or 8R probability variation big hit in probability variation state), the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “ When “0”, the pursuit time is determined from the 11th rotation after the end of the special gaming state, when “1”, the pursuit time is determined from the 21st rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and when “2”, the special game is determined. The pursuit time is determined from the 31st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is “B”, “b”, “F”, or “f”, when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, it is 10th from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state. The normal fluctuation time is determined without determining the pursuit time until the first rotation, and when it is “1”, the normal fluctuation time is not determined from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of “2”, the normal fluctuation time is determined without determining the pursuit time from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state.

  When the special symbol is “C”, “c”, “G”, or “g” (normal gaming state A, B or probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “ When “0”, the chase time is determined from the 31st rotation after the end of the special gaming state, when “1”, the chase time is determined from the 41st rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and when the game is “2”, the special game is determined. The pursuit time is determined from the 51st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is “C”, “c”, “G”, or “g”, when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, 30th from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state. The normal fluctuation time is determined without determining the pursuit time until the first rotation, and when it is “1”, the normal fluctuation time is not determined from the first rotation to the 40th rotation after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of “2”, the normal fluctuation time is determined without determining the pursuit time from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state.

  When the special symbol is “A”, “a”, “E” or “e” (normal gaming state A, B or 15R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the special symbol is “B”, “b”, When “F” or “f” (normal gaming state A, B or 8R probability variation big hit in probability variation state), the special symbol is “C”, “c”, “G” or “g” (normal gaming state) Comparing the cases of A, B, or 4R probability variation jackpots in the probability variation state), the probability variation jackpot that has become the trigger for the transition to the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation jackpot with a greater number of rounds more advantageous to the player In other words, the special symbol that is more advantageous to the player is given preferential treatment to the progress stage (number of times of digestion) of the short-time game, and the possibility of follow-up (the second special with the fluctuation time corresponding to “normal jackpot” in the probability variation gaming state First special when symbol 231 is changing Won probability change big hit in per drawing of the handle 221, a first special symbol 221 is adapted to be possible to display stops first) is higher than the second special symbol 231.

[Main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a main process performed by the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60).

  In this main process, the main CPU 60 first executes an initial setting process (S11). In this processing, the main CPU 60 executes RAM access permission, backup restoration processing, work area initialization, and the like. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S12.

  In S12, the main CPU 60 executes normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 60 extracts a random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the passing ball sensor 151, refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 7) stored in the main ROM 61, and selects the normal symbol lottery. Judge whether or not you win. The main CPU 60 further executes a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 62. Note that when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory (the blade member 143 (see FIG. 1)) is in an open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start port 14B. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S13.

  In S13, the main CPU 60 executes normal symbol display device control processing. In this procedure, the main CPU 60 stores in the main RAM 62 a control signal for driving the normal symbol display device 20 based on the result of the normal symbol lottery stored in the main RAM 62, and the control signal is stored in the normal symbol display device 20. Send to. Based on the received control signal, the normal symbol display device 20 repeatedly displays blinking of the two LED lamps 201 and 202, and then variably displays them as normal symbols, and then displays the lamps 201 and 202 on or off. Take control.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a random number initial value update process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the initial value random value counter, the rendering condition selection random value counter, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol control process in S15 and a second special symbol control process in S16. The first special symbol control process and the second special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, respectively. However, after the first special symbol control process (S15) is executed, the second special symbol control process is performed. If (S16) is executed and completed, the process proceeds to S17.

  In S17, the main CPU 60 executes a special symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 60 drives the first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 in the first special symbol control process or the second special symbol control process of FIG. 19 or FIG. The control state flag is stored in the main RAM 62, and a control signal corresponding to the control flag is transmitted to the first or second special symbol display device 22,23. The first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 controls the turning on / off of each segment of the 7-segment LED and the dots based on the received control signal, so that the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display device 22 2 Change and stop display of special symbol 231 is performed. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S12, and the processes of S12 to S17 are repeated.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process performed by the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60). This system timer interrupt process is a process that may be executed by interrupting the main process even when the main process shown in FIG. It is executed according to a clock pulse generated every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

  In the system timer interrupt process, the main CPU 60 first increments the count values of the jackpot determination random number counter, the jackpot symbol determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, the variation time determination random number counter, etc. by “1”. The random number update process is executed (S21).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes an input detection process for detecting the winning or passing of the game ball to the starting port or the like (S22). Details of the input detection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

  Next, the main CPU 60 waits for a synchronization between the main control circuit 6 and the sub-control circuit 7 and opens a big prize opening for measuring the opening times of the first and second big prize openings 16A and 16B. Update processing of various timers such as a time timer is executed (S23). Then, an output process is executed in order to supply a signal for drive control based on various variables to a solenoid, a motor or the like (S24).

  Next, after executing a command output process for supplying various commands to the sub-control circuit 7 (S25), the main CPU 60 sends a prize ball control command for causing the payout device to perform a prize ball to the payout / firing control circuit. A payout process such as transmission is executed (S26). When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished, the address is returned to the address before the occurrence of the interrupt, and the main process is executed.

[Input detection processing]
17 and 18 are flowcharts showing the input detection processing executed in S22 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the input detection process, the main CPU 60 first loads the state of the first start-entry ball sensor 141 (S31), and determines whether or not the first start-entry ball sensor 141 has reacted. A determination process is executed (S32). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first start-entrance ball sensor 141 has reacted (S32: YES), the main CPU 60 loads the first special symbol hold number counter (S33), and holds the first special symbol hold. A process of determining whether or not the number counter is the upper limit value (the number of holdings is 4) is executed (S34).

  In S34, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (the number of reservations is four) (S34: NO), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the first special symbol reservation number counter. (S35).

  When the process of S35 is completed, when the main CPU 60 determines in S32 that the first start-in entrance ball sensor 141 is not responding (S32: NO), or in S34, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol hold number When it is determined that the counter is the upper limit value (the number of holdings is 4) (S34: YES), the state of the second start port entrance sensor 142 is loaded (S36), and the second start port entrance sensor 142 is loaded. A process of determining whether or not has reacted is executed (S37). In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the second starting entrance sensor 142 has responded (S37: YES), the main CPU 60 loads the second special symbol hold number counter (S38), and holds the second special symbol hold. A process of determining whether or not the number counter is the upper limit value (the number of holdings is 4) is executed (S39).

  In S39, when determining that the second special symbol reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (the number of reservations is four) (S39: NO), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the second special symbol reservation number counter. (S40).

  When the process of S40 is completed, when the main CPU 60 determines in S37 that the second starting-entrance ball sensor 142 is not responding (S: 37NO), or in S39, the second special symbol holding number counter is the upper limit value. When it is determined that (the number of holdings is 4) (S39: YES), as shown in FIG. 18, the main CPU 60 loads the state of the passing ball sensor 151 (S41) and passes the passing ball sensor 151. A process of determining whether or not has reacted is executed (S42). In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the passing ball sensor 151 has reacted (S42: YES), the main CPU 60 loads the normal symbol hold ball counter (S43), and the normal symbol hold counter is the upper limit value (hold). A process of determining whether or not the number is 4) is executed (S44).

  In S44, when the main CPU 60 determines that the normal symbol hold count counter is not the upper limit (the hold count is 4) (NO), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the normal symbol hold count counter (S45).

  When the process of S45 is completed, when the main CPU 60 determines in S42 that the passing ball sensor 151 is not responding (S42: NO), or in S44, the main CPU 60 sets the normal symbol hold count counter to the upper limit value (hold). If it is determined that the number is four) (S44: YES), the state of the first count sensor 161 is loaded (S46), and processing for determining whether or not the first count sensor 161 has reacted is executed. (S47). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first count sensor 161 has reacted (S47: YES), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the first count sensor reaction number counter.

  When the processing of S48 is completed, or when the main CPU 60 determines in S47 that the first count sensor 161 is not responding (S47: NO), the state of the second count sensor 162 is loaded (S49). Then, a process of determining whether or not the second count sensor 162 has reacted is executed (S50). In this process, when it is determined that the second count sensor 162 has reacted (S50: YES), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the second count sensor reaction number counter.

  When the process of S51 is completed, or when the main CPU 60 determines in S50 that the second count sensor 162 is not responding (S50: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol control process executed in S15 of FIG. In FIG. 19, the numerical values written on the sides of S 62 to S 69 indicate the control state flags of the first special symbol 221 corresponding to those steps, and function as the control state flags of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control state flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates the game state of the first special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S62 to S69 to be executed. Here, S62 is the first special symbol memory check process (00), S63 is the first special symbol variation time management process (01), S64 is the first special symbol display time management process (02), and S65 is the special game state start. Interval management process (03), S66 is the first big prize opening open process (04), S67 is the second big prize opening open process (05), S68 is the special game state end interval process (06), S69 is the first One special symbol game end process (07).

  In the first special symbol control process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 stored in the main RAM 62 (S61), and then the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. In accordance with the numerical value, it is determined whether or not various processes are executed in each step (S62 to S69), and the step for the numerical value is executed to advance the first special symbol game. Specifically, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to “00” and “00” when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) and the result of the big hit determination is lost. By sequentially setting “01”, “02”, and “07”, the processing of S62, S63, S64, and S69 shown in FIG. 19 is executed at a predetermined timing. On the other hand, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to “00”, “01”, when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) and the result of the big hit determination is big hit. By setting “02” and “03” in this order, the processing of S62, S63, S64, and S65 shown in FIG. 19 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the special gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the special gaming state is executed, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag in the order of “04” and “05”, thereby performing the processing of S66 and S67 shown in FIG. 19 at a predetermined timing. Will be executed and a special game will be executed. When the special game state is terminated in the process of S66 or S67 shown in FIG. 19 after the control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 also performs the special game state end interval process (06 of S68). ) And the first special symbol game end process (07) of S69.

  Details of the processes in S62 to S69 of FIG. 19 will be described later individually, but the processes in S62 to S69 will be briefly described below. The main CPU 60 executes the process in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step. That is, before the predetermined timing is reached, the process is terminated without executing the process in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 16 is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In the first special symbol memory check process (00) of S62, the main CPU 60 performs the first special symbol variation time management process (S63) on the condition that the value of the first special symbol hold count counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 221 is set, and the variation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the first special symbol memory check process, the control state flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the first special symbol of S63 is elapsed after the elapse of the variation time set as the waiting time timer. The variable time management process is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process (01) of S63, the main CPU 60 indicates that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process, and the first special symbol variation time management process (01). When a predetermined fluctuation time elapses in the fluctuation of the symbol 221, the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol display time management is set to the control state flag (02) when the fluctuation of the first special symbol 221 is stopped. In addition to setting, the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. In the first special symbol variation time management process, the control state flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that after the fixed waiting time set as the waiting time timer elapses, One special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol display time management process (02) of S64, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation. When elapses, a process of determining whether or not a big hit is performed. When the main CPU 60 is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the special game state start interval management process, and sets the time corresponding to the special game state start interval as a waiting time timer. set. In the first special symbol display time management process, by setting the control state flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer, the time corresponding to the special gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer is set. After the elapse of time, the special game state start interval management process (03) of S65 is set to be executed.

  In the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S65, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process, and sets the special gaming state start interval. When the corresponding time has elapsed, processing for opening the first grand prize winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets a value indicating the process during opening of the first big prize opening, the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 and sets the upper opening limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first big prize opening opening time. Set to timer. In the special game state start interval management process, after the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 and the first big prize opening time timer are set, the first big prize opening time timer is set. It is set so that the first big prize opening opening process (04) of S66 is executed.

  In the first big prize opening opening process (04) of S66, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special prize 221 is the value (04) indicating that the first special symbol 221 has a control state flag indicating the big prize opening opening process. Whether or not the condition that the entrance prize counter is a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or more and the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the first big prize opening time timer is “0”) are satisfied. Execute the process of determining. When the main CPU 60 determines that any one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening release number maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. Execute. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 and determines that it is not the final round. A value (05) indicating the second big winning opening opening process is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second big winning opening opening timer. In the first big winning opening opening process, the control state flag (05) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the second big winning opening releasing process (05) of S67 is executed and the first special symbol 221 is executed. When the control state flag (06) is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S68 is set to be executed.

  In the second big prize opening opening process (05) of S67, the main CPU 60 determines the second special prize 221 when the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (05) indicating the second big prize opening opening process. Whether the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or more, or the condition that the upper opening limit time has passed (the second big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied The process which determines whether or not is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines that any one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening release number maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. Execute. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 and determines that it is not the final round. A value (04) indicating a process during opening of the first big prize opening is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 and an opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first big prize opening time timer. In the second big prize opening opening process, the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the first big prize opening opening process (04) of S66 is executed again, and the first special symbol is executed. When the control state flag (06) of 221 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S68 is set to be executed.

  In the special game state end interval process (06) of S68, the main CPU 60 determines that the first big prize opening opening time when the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (06) indicating the special game state end interval. Clear the time set in the timer or the second grand prize opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the residual ball of the big prize opening that was finally released within that time Process. When the time corresponding to the special game state end interval (residual ball check processing time) has elapsed, a value (07) indicating the end of the special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. In the special game state end interval process, the first special symbol game end process (07) of S69 is set to be executed by setting the control state flag (07) of the first special symbol 221.

  In the first special symbol game end process (07) of S69, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol game 221 has a first special symbol game 221 value (07) indicating that the first special symbol game has ended. A value (00) indicating storage check processing is set. In the first special symbol game ending process, the first special symbol memory check process of S62 is set to be executed again, and this subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol control process executed in S16 of FIG. In FIG. 20, the numerical values written on the sides of S72 to S79 indicate the control state flags of the second special symbol corresponding to those steps, and the memory functioning as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the area. The control state flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates the game state of the second special symbol game, and allows one of the processes in S72 to S79 to be executed. Here, S72 is the second special symbol memory check process (00), S73 is the second special symbol variation time management process (01), S74 is the second special symbol display time management process (02), and S75 is the special game state start. Interval management process (03), S76 is the first big prize opening open process (04), S77 is the second big prize opening open process (05), S78 is the special game state end interval process (06), S79 is the first 2 is a special symbol game end process (07).

  In the second special symbol control process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 stored in the main RAM 62 (S71), and then the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. In accordance with the numerical value, it is determined in each step (S72 to S79) whether or not various processes are to be executed, and the step for the numerical value is executed to advance the second special symbol game. Specifically, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag to “00”, “01”, “02” when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) and the result of the big hit determination is lost. , And “07” in order, the processing of S72, S73, S74, and S79 shown in FIG. 20 is executed at a predetermined timing. On the other hand, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to “00”, “01”, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) and the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. By setting “02” and “03” in this order, the processing of S72, S73, S74, and S75 shown in FIG. 20 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the special gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the special gaming state is executed, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag in the order of “04” and “05”, so that the processing of S76 and S77 shown in FIG. Will be executed and a special game will be executed. When the special game state is terminated in the processing of S76 and S77 shown in FIG. 20 after the control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 also performs the special game state end interval process (06 of S78). ) And the second special symbol game end process (07) of S79.

  The details of the processing from S72 to S79 in FIG. 20 will be described later individually, but the processing from S72 to S79 will be briefly described below. The main CPU 60 executes the process in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step. That is, before the predetermined timing is reached, the process is terminated without executing the process in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 16 is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In the first special symbol memory check process (00) of S72, the main CPU 60 performs the second special symbol variation time management process (second special symbol 231) on the condition that the value of the second special symbol hold count counter is not zero ( The control state flag (01) of the second special symbol indicating S73) is set, and the variation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the second special symbol storage check process, the control state flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the second special symbol of S73 is elapsed after the elapse of the variation time set as the waiting time timer. The variable time management process is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process (01) of S73, the main CPU 60 indicates that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process, and the second special symbol variation time management process (01). When a predetermined fluctuation time elapses in the fluctuation of the symbol 231 (when the second special symbol 231 is suspended), the control state flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the second special symbol display time management is set. In addition to setting, the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. In the second special symbol variation time management process, the control state flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer are set, so that after the fixed waiting time set as the waiting time timer elapses, 2 Special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol display time management process (02) of S74, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation. When elapses, a process of determining whether or not a big hit is performed. When the main CPU 60 is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the special game state start interval management process, and sets the time corresponding to the special game state start interval as a waiting time timer. set. In the second special symbol display time management process, by setting the control state flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer, the time corresponding to the special gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer is set. The special game state start interval management process (03) of S75 is set to be executed after the elapse.

  In the special game state start interval management process (03) of S75, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management process, and sets the special game state start interval to the special game state start interval. When the corresponding time has elapsed, processing for opening the first grand prize winning opening 16A is executed. Further, the main CPU 60 sets a value indicating processing during the opening of the first grand prize opening in the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first big prize opening. Set to time timer. In the special game state start interval management process, after the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and the first big prize opening time timer are set, the first big prize opening time timer is set. It is set so that the first big prize opening opening process (04) of S76 is executed.

  In the first big prize opening opening process (04) of S76, the main CPU 60 determines the first special prize 231 when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (04) indicating the first big prize opening opening process. Whether the condition that the big prize winning prize counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or the condition that the upper limit opening time has passed (the first big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied The process which determines whether or not is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines that any one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening release number maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. Execute. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process to the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and determines that it is not the final round. A value (05) indicating the process during opening of the second big prize opening is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and an opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second big prize opening time timer. In the first big prize opening opening process, the second special symbol opening process (05) of S77 is executed by setting the control state flag (05) of the second special symbol 231 and the second special symbol 231 is executed. When the control state flag (06) is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S78 is set to be executed.

  In the second big prize opening opening process (05) of S77, the main CPU 60 determines the second special symbol 231 when the control state flag is a value (05) indicating the second big prize opening opening process. Whether the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or more, or the condition that the upper opening limit time has passed (the second big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied The process which determines whether or not is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines that any one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening release number maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. Execute. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process to the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and determines that it is not the final round. A value (04) indicating the first big winning opening opening process is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first big winning opening opening time timer. In the second big winning opening opening process, the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 is set, so that the first big winning opening releasing process (04) of S76 is executed again, and the second special symbol is executed. When the control state flag (06) of 231 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S78 is set to be executed.

  In the special game state end interval process (06) of S78, the main CPU 60 determines that the first big prize opening opening time when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (06) indicating the special game state end interval. Clear the time set in the timer or the second grand prize opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the residual ball of the big prize opening that was finally released within that time Process. Then, when the time corresponding to the special game state end interval (residual ball check processing time) has elapsed, a value (07) indicating the end of the second special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. In the special game state end interval process, the second special symbol game end process (07) of S79 is set to be executed by setting the control state flag (07) of the second special symbol 231.

  In the second special symbol game end process (07) of S79, the main CPU 60 performs the second special symbol memory check process when the control state flag of the second special symbol is a value (07) indicating the end of the special symbol game. A value (00) indicating is set. In the second special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol memory check process of S71 to be executed again, and ends this subroutine.

[First special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 21 shows the first special symbol memory check process executed in S62 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol memory check process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (00) indicating the first special symbol memory check (S81). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value indicating the first special symbol storage check (S81: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S82. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value indicating the first special symbol storage check (S81: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S82, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is zero. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is 0 (there is no start memory of the first special symbol game) (S82: YES), the first special symbol. It is determined that no data is stored in the start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the process proceeds to S83. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is not 0 (there is a start memory of the first special symbol game) (S82: NO), the main CPU 60 corresponds to the first special symbol 221. Since there is a start memory to be processed, the process proceeds to S84.

  In S83, the main CPU 60 determines that there is no first special symbol game start-up memory in the processing of S82, so sets the first special symbol demo display processing flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM, and ends this subroutine. The main CPU 60 transmits a demo display start command to the sub-control circuit 7 in accordance with the first special symbol demo display processing flag set in the main RAM. The demo display start command may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7 when the first special symbol demo display processing flag is set in S83, but will be described later together with the first special symbol demo display processing flag set in S83. 22 may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when the second special symbol demo display processing flag is set.

  In S84, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol non-change flag is set. Here, the first special symbol non-change flag is set in S176 in FIG. 27 described later, and is set when the game state shifts to the special game state (big hit game state) based on the second special symbol 231. It is. That is, the first special symbol non-change flag is a flag for preventing the first special symbol game from being played when the special game state based on the second special symbol is being executed. Therefore, if the main CPU 60 determines in S84 that the first special symbol non-variation flag is set (S84: YES), this subroutine is terminated. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S84: NO), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the first special symbol demo display processing flag (S85). The main CPU 60 transmits a demo display end command to the sub-control circuit 7 in accordance with the first special symbol demo display processing flag being cleared from the main RAM. The demo display end command may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7 when the first special demo display processing flag is cleared in S85, but the second special symbol demo display processing flag is cleared in S105 of FIG. 22 described later. When it is done, it may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the control state flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S86), and shifts the process to S87.

  In S87, the main CPU 60 executes special gaming state determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads out the game state flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of determination values (hit determination values) as wins based on the read game state flags. To do. That is, when the gaming state flag has a predetermined value, the hit determination table for the probability variation state with a large number of hit determination values is referred to. When the gaming state flag is not the predetermined value, the hit determination value is A hit determination table for a small number of normal gaming states is referred to (see FIG. 8). As described above, when the gaming state flag has a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is in a probability variation state, the probability of shifting to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state) is higher than that in the normal gaming state. It becomes.

  Then, the main CPU 60 extracts the big hit determination random number value in the first special symbol start storage area that is extracted in the start winning prize and is set in the first special symbol 221 start storage area (0), and the selected hit determination table. refer. Then, the main CPU 60 determines that the hit determination random number value matches the hit determination value, that is, if the hit determination random number value is “0” in the normal gaming state, and hits in the probability varying gaming state. If the determination random number value is “0 to 9”, a process of determining a win is executed (see FIG. 8). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to shift to the special game state advantageous to the player as the special game state determination process.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol determination process (S88). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines a winning symbol when the result of the hit determination is a win based on the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 shown in FIG. The process for determining the lost symbol is executed. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S89.

  In S89, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol variation time determination process. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines the variation time of the first special symbol 221 based on the gaming state at the time of winning the lottery, the first special symbol 221 determined in the process of S88, and the random number for determining the variation time ( (See FIG. 12). Then, the main CPU 60 stores the determined variation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. The main CPU 60 determines the variation display mode of the first special symbol 221 in the first special symbol display device 22 based on the data indicating the determined variation time. Data indicating the variation time stored in the RAM 62 is supplied from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a first special symbol variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 executes effect display according to the received first special symbol variation pattern designation command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the determined fluctuation time in the waiting time timer (S90), and then executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display ( S91), this subroutine is finished.

[Second special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 22 shows the second special symbol memory check process executed in S72 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol memory check process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (00) indicating the second special symbol memory check (S101). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the second special symbol storage check (S101: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S102. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value indicating the second special symbol storage check (S101: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S102, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is zero. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is 0 (there is no start memory of the second special symbol game) (S102: YES), the second special symbol It is determined that no data is stored in the start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the process proceeds to S103. On the other hand, if the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is not 0 (there is a start memory of the second special symbol game) (S102: NO), the main CPU 60 corresponds to the second special symbol 231. Since there is a start memory to be processed, the process proceeds to S104.

  In S103, the main CPU 60 determines that there is no start memory of the second special symbol game in the processing of S102, so sets the second special symbol demo display processing flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. The main CPU 60 transmits a demo display start command to the sub-control circuit 7 in accordance with the second special symbol demo display processing flag set in the main RAM 62. The demo display start command may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when the second special symbol demo display processing flag is set in S103, but together with the second special symbol demo display processing flag set in S103, 21 may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7 when the first special symbol demo display processing flag is set in S83 of FIG.

  In S104, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol non-change flag is set. Here, the second special symbol non-change flag is set in S156 of FIG. 26 to be described later, and is set when shifting to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the first special symbol 221. It is. That is, the second special symbol non-change flag is a flag for preventing the second special symbol game from being played because the special game state based on the first special symbol 221 is being executed. Therefore, if the main CPU 60 determines in S104 that the second special symbol non-variation flag is set (S104: YES), this subroutine is terminated. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S104: NO), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the second special symbol demo display processing flag (S105). The main CPU 60 transmits a demo display end command to the sub-control circuit 7 in accordance with the second special symbol demo display processing flag being cleared from the main RAM 62. The demo display end command may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7 when the second special symbol demo display processing flag is cleared in S105, but the first special symbol demo display processing flag is set in S85 of FIG. When cleared, it may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the control state flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S106), and shifts the process to S107.

  In S107, the main CPU 60 executes special gaming state determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads out the game state flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of hit determination values (win determination values) based on the read game state flag. To do. That is, when the gaming state flag has a predetermined value, the hit determination table for the probability variation state with a large number of hit determination values is referred to. When the gaming state flag is not the predetermined value, the hit determination value is A hit determination table for a small number of normal gaming states is referred to (see FIG. 10). As described above, when the gaming state flag has a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is in the probability variation state, the probability of shifting to the winning gaming state (special gaming state) is higher than that in the normal gaming state. It becomes.

  The main CPU 60 refers to the hit determination random number value in the second special symbol start storage area extracted in the start winning prize and set in the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the selected hit determination table. To do. Then, the main CPU 60 determines that the hit determination random number value matches the hit determination value, that is, if the hit determination random number value is “0” in the normal gaming state, and hits in the probability varying gaming state. If the random number for determination is “0 to 9”, it is determined to be a win (see FIG. 10). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to shift to the special game state advantageous to the player as the special game state determination process.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a second special symbol determination process (S108). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines a winning symbol when the result of the hit determination is a win based on the symbol determination table of the second special symbol shown in FIG. Performs a process of determining a lost symbol. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S109.

  In S109, the main CPU 60 executes a second special symbol variation time determination process. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23. However, the second special symbol 231 is provided according to the pursuit time determination table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14) on the condition that it is a normal big hit in the probability variation gaming state. As the fluctuation time, a fluctuation time (chase time) longer than usual is set. On the other hand, when it is not the normal big hit during the probability variation gaming state, the variation time is set according to the variation time determination table of FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the determined fluctuation time in the waiting time timer (S110), and then executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display ( S111), this subroutine is terminated.

[Second special symbol variation time determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the second special symbol variation time determination process executed in S109 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time determination process, first, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state (S121). When determining that the main CPU 60 is in the probability variation gaming state (S121: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game derives a normal jackpot (S122). That is, a process of determining whether or not the determined second special symbol 231 corresponds to the special symbol for deriving the normal jackpot is executed. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that a normal jackpot is to be derived (S122: YES), it sets a follow-up notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S123). Here, the follow-up notification flag notifies that the player has won the normal jackpot in the probability-variable gaming state (the special symbol for deriving the normal jackpot), and the follow-up notification flag is set when the follow-up notification flag is set. A process for transmitting a follow-up notification start command to start the operation to the sub-control circuit 7 is executed. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 7 can recognize that the follow-up time has started.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines the variation time of the second special symbol 231 with reference to the pursuit time determination table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14), and executes a process of setting the variation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. (S124). At this time, the main CPU 60, based on the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the previous special gaming state stored in the main RAM 62 and the random time for determining the variation time of the special symbol in the previous special gaming state, The fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 in the second special symbol game is determined with reference to the pursuit time table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14). Then, the main CPU 60 transmits the pursuit time (variation time) to the sub control circuit 7. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 7 can perform an effect corresponding to the pursuit time.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that it is not in the probability variation gaming state (S121: NO), or is in the probability variation gaming state (S121: YES), it determines that there is no normal big hit (S122: NO), the variation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined according to the variation time determination table of FIG. 12, and the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is set (S125). That is, in S125, the variation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined as usual and set.

  The main CPU 60 ends this subroutine when the variation time for the second special symbol 231 is set in S124 or S125.

[First special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation time management process executed in S63 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process ( S131). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S131: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S132. On the other hand, if the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S131: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S132, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the first special symbol 221 is “0”, and determines that the waiting time timer is “0” (S132: YES). , The process proceeds to S133. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S133, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (a big hit gaming state). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined first special symbol 221 is “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, or “H” ( (See FIG. 9). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving the special gaming state (YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S134 and determines that the symbol is not a symbol for deriving the special gaming state. If (NO), the process proceeds to S136.

  In S134, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the second special symbol 231 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is changing (YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S135 and determines that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (NO), the process proceeds to S136.

  In S135, the main CPU 60 executes the forced stop and forced change processing of the second special symbol 231. That is, determining the special symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in the first special symbol 221 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol 231 means that within the pursuit time, the first special symbol 221 wins lottery. Therefore, the win corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is prioritized. Therefore, when the derived symbol corresponding to the special game state (big hit game state) of the second special symbol 231 is fluctuating, it is changed to the special symbol of losing and forcibly stopped, and the second special symbol 231 When the special game state (big hit game state) is canceled and the second special symbol 231 is changing in the derived symbol corresponding to the loss, it is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol.

  In S136, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Run.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting (storing) the post-confirmation waiting time as a waiting time timer in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 62 (S137). When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Second special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation time management process executed in S73 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process ( S141). If the main CPU 60 determines that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S141: YES), the process proceeds to S142. On the other hand, if the main CPU 60 does not determine that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S141: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S142, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the second special symbol 231 is “0”, and determines that the waiting time timer is “0” (S142: YES). , The process proceeds to S143. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S143, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (a big hit gaming state). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined second special symbol 231 is “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, or “h” ( (See FIG. 11). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving the special gaming state (YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S144 and determines that the symbol is not a symbol for deriving the special gaming state. If (NO), the process proceeds to S146.

  In S144, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the first special symbol 221 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is changing (S144: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S145 and determines that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (S144: NO), the process proceeds to S146.

  In S145, the main CPU 60 executes the forced stop and forced change processing of the first special symbol 221. That is, since the special symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is determined in the second special symbol 231 while the first special symbol 221 is changing, priority is given to the stop display of the second special symbol 231 that is a big hit. First, the first special symbol 221 is forcibly stopped to shorten the fluctuation stop time. At this time, if the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) of the first special symbol 221 is changing, the first special symbol 221 is changed to the special symbol of losing and forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol 221 is stopped. When the first special symbol 221 is changing in the derived symbol corresponding to the loss, the special game state (big hit game state) is canceled and the special symbol is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol.

  In S146, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting (storing) the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Run.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting (storing) the post-confirmation waiting time as a waiting time timer in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 62 (S147). When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished. In addition, the process which sets the 2nd special symbol non-variation flag performed by S156 mentioned later following this process may be performed.

[First special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol display time management process executed in S64 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process. Execute (S151). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management processing (S151: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S151: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S151, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S151: YES), the first special symbol display. A process of determining whether or not the value of the post-confirmation waiting time timer corresponding to the management process is “0” is executed (S152). If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is “0” (S152: YES), the main CPU 60 performs processing in S153 and determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is not “0”. In this case (S152: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S153, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state (a big hit) based on the first special symbol 221. When the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the special gaming state (S153: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S154, and when it determines not to shift to the special gaming state (S153: NO), the main CPU 60 performs the process to S161. Transition.

  In S154, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, after executing the process of setting the special gaming state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S155), the main CPU 60 executes the process of setting the second special symbol non-change flag (S156), and the process in S157 To migrate. That is, the main CPU 60 keeps the first special symbol 221 in the stop display state during the special gaming state, but does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol 231.

  In S157, the main CPU 60 executes a process for determining whether or not the follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the follow-up notification flag is set (S157: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the follow-up notification flag to forcibly terminate the follow-up notification (S158). , The process proceeds to S159. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub-control circuit 7. As a result, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the follow-up notification, for example, the countdown at the display decorative member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when determining that the follow-up notification flag is not set (S157: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S159.

  In S <b> 159, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, it is possible to determine whether or not the short-time gaming state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time-count counter is not “0”, the main CPU 60 can determine that the game is in the time-saving game state, and thus the process proceeds to S160 to clear the time-count counter. In S160, the main CPU 60 performs a process of clearing the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. In addition, you may perform the process which sets the 2nd special symbol non-variation flag performed by S156 following this process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the hour / times counter is “0” (S159: YES), it can be determined that the hour / times counter is not in the short-time gaming state, so there is no need to clear the hour / times counter. Exit the subroutine.

  In S161, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting a value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Second special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol display time management process executed in S74 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (02) indicating the special symbol display time management process. (S171). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management processing (S171: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S172. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S171: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S172, when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process, the value of the waiting time after confirmation corresponding to the second special symbol display management process is A process for determining whether or not it is “0” is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is “0” (S172: YES), the main CPU 60 performs processing in S173 and determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is not “0”. In this case (S172: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S173, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state based on the second special symbol 231 (winning). When the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the special gaming state (S173: YES), it shifts the process to S174, and when it determines not to shift to the special gaming state (S173: NO), it performs the process to S181. Transition.

  In S174, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, after executing the process of setting the special gaming state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S175), the main CPU 60 executes the process of setting the first special symbol non-change flag (S176), and the process in S177 To migrate. That is, the main CPU 60 keeps the second special symbol 231 in the stop display state during the special gaming state, but does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol 221.

  In S177, the main CPU 60 executes a process for determining whether or not the follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the follow-up notification flag is set (S177: YES), after executing the process of clearing the follow-up notification flag to forcibly terminate the follow-up notification (S178). , The process proceeds to S179. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub-control circuit 7. As a result, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the follow-up notification, for example, the countdown at the display decorative member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when determining that the follow-up notification flag is not set (S177: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S179.

  In S <b> 179, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, it is possible to determine whether or not the short-time gaming state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time-count counter is not “0”, the main CPU 60 can determine that the time-count game state is in effect, and thus the process proceeds to S180 to clear the time-count counter. In S180, the main CPU 60 performs a process of clearing the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S179: YES), it can be determined that the time reduction counter state is not in effect, so it is not necessary to clear the time reduction counter. Exit the subroutine.

  In S181, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting a value (07) indicating the second special symbol ending process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

[Special gaming state start interval management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special gaming state start interval management process executed in S65 of FIG. 19 or S75 of FIG.

  In this special gaming state start interval management process, first, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process. The determination process is executed (S191). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process (S191: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S192. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process (S191: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S192, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special gaming state start interval management process is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (S192: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of S193 and determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”. (S192: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S193, the main CPU 60 executes a special winning opening opening preparation process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 62. Specifically, the main CPU 60 sets the number of big hits corresponding to the special symbol from which the special gaming state is derived, that is, “15”, “8”, or “4” as the upper limit value of the winning prize opening number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the value (04) indicating the first big prize opening opening process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 62, and the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231. (S194), the process for setting the first big winning opening opening upper limit time in the big winning opening opening time timer is executed (S195), and this subroutine is finished. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special gaming state, the first grand prize opening 16A is opened before the second big prize opening 16B.

[Processing during the opening of the first big prize opening]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening opening process executed in S66 of FIG. 19 or S76 of FIG.

  In the first big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (04) indicating the first big winning opening opening process. The process which determines whether is performed (S201). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (04) indicating the first big prize opening opening process (S201: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S202. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is not the value (04) indicating the first big prize opening opening process (S201: NO), this subroutine Exit.

  In S202, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value (“15”, “8” of the round number set in S193 of the special gaming state start interval management process shown in FIG. Or “4”). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value (S202: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S212 and determines that the value of the round number counter is not the upper limit value. (S202: NO), the process proceeds to S203.

  In S203, the main CPU 60 adds the value of the round number counter to “1” after performing the first big prize opening opening process (S204).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a residual ball check process for the second big winning opening 16B (S205). In this process, the main CPU 60 checks whether or not there is an uncounted game ball remaining in the second large winning opening 16B after the second large winning opening 16B is closed. By this process, the number of game balls won in the second grand prize opening 16B can be accurately counted including the winning balls after reaching the predetermined number of game balls (so-called over winning).

  In such residual ball check processing of the second grand prize opening 16B, the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions (the number of winning game balls) at the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first big prize opening 16A is 9 or more. The process is repeated (S206: NO, S207: NO) until it is determined that the prize winning opening timer is 0 (S207: YES).

  As can be seen from S203, the residual ball check process of the second grand prize opening 16B is performed while the first big prize opening 16A is open. Therefore, it is possible to omit an interval between rounds after the second grand prize winning opening 16B is closed until the first big winning prize opening 16A is opened. Thereby, since the time required to end the special game state can be shortened by the interval between rounds, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  The main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions (the number of winning game balls) at the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first grand prize opening 16A is 9 or more (S206: YES), or the big prize opening timer. Is determined to be 0 (S207: YES), the remaining ball check process (S205) of the second big winning opening 16B is finished, and the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second big winning opening 16B is finished. A process of clearing the number of reactions is executed (S208).

  Next, after the main CPU 60 performs the closing process of the first grand prize opening 16A (S209), the main CPU 60 enters the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. A process of setting the value (05) indicating the process during the opening of the two big winning openings to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is executed (S210). Further, the main CPU 60 executes a process for setting the upper limit opening time of the second big prize opening 16B in the big prize opening time timer (S211), and ends this subroutine. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special gaming state, on condition that the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit round (S202: NO), the second big prize opening 16B is opened after the first big prize opening 16A is closed. . On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the number of rounds has reached the upper limit round (S202: YES), the control state flag (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process is used as the control state flag in the main RAM 62. A process of setting in a predetermined function area is executed (S212), and this subroutine is terminated.

[Processing during the opening of the second big prize opening]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening opening process executed in S67 of FIG. 19 or S77 of FIG.

  In the second grand prize opening opening process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (05) indicating the second big winning opening open process. The process which determines whether is performed (S221). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (05) indicating the second big prize opening opening process (S221: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S222. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is not the value (05) indicating the second big prize opening opening process (S221: NO), this subroutine Exit.

  In S222, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value (“15”, “8”) of the round number set in S193 of the special gaming state start interval management process shown in FIG. Or “4”). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value (S222: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S232 and determines that the value of the round number counter is not the upper limit value. (S222: NO), the process proceeds to S223.

  In S223, the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the value of the round number counter after performing the second big prize opening opening process (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a residual ball check process for the first big winning opening 16A (S225). In this process, the main CPU 60 checks whether or not there is an uncounted game ball remaining in the first big winning opening 16A after the first big winning opening 16A is closed. By this processing, the number of game balls won in the first grand prize opening 16A can be accurately counted including the winning balls after reaching the predetermined number of game balls (so-called over winning).

  In such a residual ball check process of the first big winning opening 16A, the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions (the number of winning game balls) at the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second big winning opening 16B is 9 or more. The process is repeated (S226: NO, S227: NO) until it is determined that the prize winning opening timer is 0 (S226: NO).

  As can be seen from S223, the remaining ball check process of the first big prize opening 16A is performed while the second big prize opening 16B is open. Therefore, it is possible to omit an interval between rounds after the first grand prize winning opening 16A is closed until the second big prize winning opening 16B is opened. Thereby, since the time required to end the special game state can be shortened by the interval between rounds, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  The main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions (the number of winning game balls) at the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second big prize opening 16B is 9 or more (S226: YES), or the big prize opening timer. Is determined to be 0 (S227: YES), the remaining ball check process (S225) of the first big winning opening 16A is ended, and the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first big winning opening 16A A process of clearing the number of reactions is executed (S228).

  Next, after the main CPU 60 performs the closing process of the second big prize opening 16B (S229), the main CPU 60 enters the predetermined area that functions as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. A process of setting the value (04) indicating the process during the opening of the 1st big winning opening to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is executed (S230). Further, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the opening upper limit time of the first big prize opening 16A in the big prize opening time timer (S231), and ends this subroutine. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special gaming state, on condition that the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit round (S222: NO), the first big prize opening 16A is opened after the second big prize opening 16B is closed. . On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the number of rounds has reached the upper limit round (S222: YES), the control state flag (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process is used as the control state flag in the main RAM 62. A process of setting in a predetermined function area is executed (S212), and this subroutine is terminated.

[Special game state end interval processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special gaming state end interval process executed in S68 of FIG. 19 or S78 of FIG.

  In this special gaming state end interval process, first, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process. Processing is executed (S241). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is a value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process (S241: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S242 and indicates the special gaming state end interval process. If it is determined that it is not (06) (S241: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S242, the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing either the first big winning opening opening time timer or the second big winning opening opening time timer set last. The main CPU 60 further executes a process of setting the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer (S243), and then executes a remaining ball check process of the last winning prize opening (S244). Until the set waiting time (residual ball check processing time) elapses (S245: YES), the main CPU 60 checks the remaining balls for the first big winning port 16A or the second big winning port 16B in the final round in the special gaming state. The process is executed (S244, S245: NO).

  When the residual ball check process is completed (S245: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the reaction count counter of the first count sensor 161 or the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the last prize winning opening (final round). At the same time (S246), the first special symbol game end process or the second special symbol game end process is performed as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 displaying the special symbol from which the special gaming state is derived. A process of setting the indicated value (07) in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62 is executed (S247), and this subroutine is terminated.

[First special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol game end process executed in S69 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end process. (S251). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S251: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S252 and controls the control state. If it is determined that the flag is not the value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end process (S251: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S252, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time-saving counter is “0” (S252: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S254, and determines that the value of the time-saving game is not “0”. (S252: NO), a process of subtracting “1” from the time reduction counter is executed (S253).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol game is a first special symbol game in which a special game state of a big jackpot is derived (S254). If the main CPU 60 determines that it is not the first special symbol game in which the special game state of the big jackpot is derived (S254: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S256 and derives the special game state of the normal jackpot. If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S254: YES), the number of time reductions corresponding to the derived special game state (usually big hit) is added to the time reduction number counter (S255). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is “D” or “H” corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, “50”, “30”, or “20” is set in the time-count counter according to the obtained random number. Set one of the following. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S256.

  In S256, the main CPU 60 executes processing for updating the specific short time counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the specific short time counter used when the special game state derived in the first special symbol game is a probability variation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 60 is “A”, “B”, “C”, “E”, “F”, or “G” whose derived special symbol corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. In this case, a process is performed to set the specific short time counter to infinity (until the next special gaming state is derived), and when the derived special symbol is “D” or “H” corresponding to 4R normal big hit Then, a process of clearing the specific short time counter is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol non-change flag (see S156 in FIG. 26) is set (S257). If the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol non-change flag is not set (S257: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S259 and determines that the second special symbol non-change flag is set. In this case (S257: YES), after executing the process of clearing the second special symbol non-change flag (S258), the process proceeds to S259.

  In S259, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates the data (first special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of holdings corresponding to the first special symbol 221 so as to decrease by “1”, and stores the data in the first special symbol storage area. Update. In this process, when the first special symbol game is in the special gaming state (probability change big hit), the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the first special symbol game are used. The random number for determining the variation time is stored and held in the main RAM 62 until a special game state (probability variation big hit) is derived next.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (00) indicating the first special symbol storage check as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62 (S260), and ends this subroutine.

[Second special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol game end process executed in S79 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol is a value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end process ( S271). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end processing (S271: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S272 and controls the control state. If it is determined that the flag is not the value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end process (S271: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S272, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time-saving counter is “0” (S272: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S274, and determines that the value of the time-saving game number is not “0”. (S272: NO), a process of subtracting “1” from the time reduction counter is executed (S273).

  In S274, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game is the second special symbol game in which the special game state of the big jackpot is derived (S274). If the main CPU 60 determines that the game is not the second special symbol game from which the normal big hit special gaming state is derived (S274: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S276 and derives the normal big hit special gaming state. If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S274: YES), the number of time reductions corresponding to the derived special game state (normal jackpot) is added to the time reduction number counter (S275). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is “d” or “h” corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, “50”, “30”, or “20” is set in the hour / count counter according to the obtained random number. Set one of the following. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S276.

  In S276, the main CPU 60 executes processing for updating the specific short time counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the specific short time counter used when the special gaming state derived in the second special symbol game is a probability variation big hit. Specifically, when the derived special symbol is “a”, “b”, “c”, “e”, “f”, or “g” corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, the main CPU 60 shortens the specified time. The number counter is set to infinity (until the next special gaming state is derived), and when the derived special symbol is “d” or “h” corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, this specific short time counter is cleared. Process.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol non-change flag (see S176 of FIG. 27) is set (S277). If the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S277: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S279 and determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is set. In this case (S277: YES), after executing the process of clearing the first special symbol non-change flag (S278), the process proceeds to S279.

  In S279, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates data indicating the number of holdings corresponding to the second special symbol 231 (second special symbol start storage information) so as to decrease by “1”, and stores the second special symbol storage area. Update. In this process, when the second special symbol game is in the special gaming state (probability change big hit), it is used in the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the second special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The random number for determining the variation time is stored and held in the main RAM 62 until a special game state (probability variation big hit) is derived next.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (00) indicating the second special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 (S280), and ends this subroutine.

  In the present embodiment, the pursuit target is the first special symbol 221, and after executing the first special symbol control process (S15) as the processing order, the second special symbol control process (S16) is performed. By doing in this way, the scheduled stop time of the first special symbol 221 scheduled to stop the probable big hit symbol is exactly the same as the scheduled stop time of the second special symbol 231 scheduled to stop the normal big hit symbol, that is, the remaining fluctuation time. Even if they are the same, the first special symbol control process (S15) is executed first, so that the second special symbol 231 is forcibly and controlled in advance in the first special symbol control process (S15). The change process can be executed. As a result of processing similar to the prefetch control, a probable big hit based on the first special symbol 221 is executed, and the second special symbol 231 is forcibly stopped due to a loss, so the same remaining fluctuation time is selected. In some cases, it is possible to pursue, and it is possible to extend the pursuit period. If the second special symbol is to be pursued, the second special symbol control process can be handled by switching the flow before the first special symbol control process, and a highly versatile gaming machine can be provided. .

  Next, processing in the sub-control circuit 7 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sub-control circuit 7. The sub-control circuit 7 receives various commands from the main control circuit 6 and displays control processing (see FIG. 37), sound control processing (see FIG. 38), lamp control processing (see FIG. 39), and movable member control. Various processes such as a process (see FIG. 40) are executed. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

  In the main process of the sub control circuit 7, the sub CPU 71 first executes an initialization process (S291). In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes an initialization setting process in response to power-on.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a random value update process (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of updating the random number values (the effect determining random value, the jackpot effect determining random value, the stop symbol determining random value, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S293.

  In S293, the sub CPU 71 executes command analysis processing. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 6 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. Run.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sequentially executes a display control process (S294), a sound control process (S295), a lamp control process (S296), and a movable member control process (S297), and then shifts the process to S292. The processes of ˜297 are repeatedly executed. Details of the processing of S292 to 297 will be described later.

[Command analysis processing]
35 and 36 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process executed in S293 of FIG.

  In this command analysis process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether or not there is a received command (S301). If it is determined that there is a reception command (S301: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302, and if it is determined that there is no reception command, the sub-CPU 71 ends this subroutine.

  In S302, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of reading command data stored in the reception buffer. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S303.

  In S303, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for determining whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received. In this process, if it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has been received (S303: YES), the process proceeds to S304, and if it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has not been received (S303: NO), The process proceeds to S305.

  In S304, the sub CPU 71 executes effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is based on a variation pattern designation command, an effect determining random number value, etc. from among a plurality of predetermined effect patterns according to the effect determining table stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 7. Determine the production pattern. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S305, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for determining whether or not a derived symbol designation command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the derived symbol designation command has been received (S305: YES), the process proceeds to S306, and if it is determined that the derived symbol designation command has not been received ( (S305: NO), the process proceeds to S307.

  In S306, based on the derived symbol designation command, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining a derived ornament symbol to be stopped in the variation from a plurality of predetermined derived ornament symbols, and ends this subroutine.

  In S307, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for determining whether or not a follow-up notification start command has been received. The follow-up notification start command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 60 when the follow-up notification flag is set in the main RAM 62 by the main CPU 60 in S123 of FIG. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification start command has been received (S307: YES), the process proceeds to S308, and if it determines that the follow-up notification start command has not been received ( (S307: NO), the process proceeds to S310.

  In S308, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting a follow-up notification preparation flag in the work RAM 73 (S308), and then executes a process of setting a follow-up time timer (S309). The follow-up notification preparation flag is a flag necessary for executing the follow-up notification effect. This is confirmed in S323 of the display control process of FIG. 37, S331 of the voice control process of FIG. 38, S341 of the lamp control process of FIG. 39, and S351 of the movable member control process of FIG. The pursuit time timer is loaded in S324 of the display control process of FIG. 37, S332 of the voice control process of FIG. 38, S342 of the lamp control process of FIG. 39, and S352 of the movable member control process of FIG. is there. The value of the follow-up time timer is determined by the main CPU 60 with reference to FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14) in S124 of FIG. 23, and is the variation time (follow-up time) of the second special symbol 231 set in the main RAM 62. Sent from the main CPU 60.

  In S310, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for determining whether or not a follow-up notification end command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification end command has been received (S310: YES), the process proceeds to S311 and if it is determined that the follow-up notification end command has not been received ( (S310: NO), the process proceeds to S312.

  In S <b> 311, the sub CPU 71 ends the present subroutine after executing a process of clearing the follow-up notification preparation flag from the work RAM 73.

  In S <b> 312, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for determining whether or not a demonstration display start command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display start command has been received (S312: YES), the process proceeds to S313, and if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display start command has not been received ( (S312: NO), the process proceeds to S314.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting a demonstration display execution flag in the work RAM 73, and ends this subroutine.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for determining whether or not a demonstration display end command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display end command has been received (S314: YES), the process proceeds to S315, and when it is determined that the demonstration display end command has not been received ( (S314: NO), the process proceeds to S316.

  In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of clearing the demonstration display execution flag from the work RAM 73, and ends this subroutine.

  In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs processing corresponding to the received other command, for example, start winning update processing for updating the start winning memorized number (holding number), special gaming state effect (special gaming state start effect, first or A determination process of an effect during the opening of the second grand prize winning openings 16A and 16B and an effect at the end of the special gaming state is executed. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Display control processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display control process executed in S294 of FIG. This display control process is a process for controlling display on the liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decoration member 5.

  In the display control process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether or not the demonstration display execution flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S321). In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display execution flag is set (S321: YES), after executing the demonstration display process (S322), the process proceeds to S323, and the demonstration display execution is performed. If it is determined that the flag is not set (S321: NO), the process proceeds to S323.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for determining whether or not the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S323: YES), the process proceeds to S324, and the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S323: NO), the process proceeds to S327.

  In S324, after loading the chase time timer, the sub CPU 71 executes chase time countdown display processing (S325). This process is performed as a digital numeral display by two 7-segment LEDs in the display decoration member 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the follow-up time countdown may be made to accurately display the remaining time of the follow-up time (displayed at a time), or to be divided into a plurality of times by selecting continuation / non-continuation at specific times. May be displayed. For example, when 90 seconds is determined as the follow-up time, the countdown may start from 90 seconds and end at 0 seconds, or the countdown may start from 45 seconds and start again at 45 seconds. You may make it do. The displayed count value may be increased during the pursuit time countdown. The follow-up time may be counted down in another display device such as the liquid crystal display device 3 instead of the display decoration member 5 or in addition to the display decoration member 5.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a first start opening winning promotion display process (S326). In this process, in the liquid crystal display device 3, a game ball is won at the first start opening 14 </ b> A and a display indicating that a big hit lottery on the first special symbol display device 22 should be performed is performed. This is because there is a player who stops the launch of the game ball by so-called “stopping” when a reach effect is produced as an effect of the decorative symbol in a predetermined gaming state or when the decorative symbol is arranged. This is because it is necessary to prompt the player to place a game ball in the first starting port 14A. In addition, when the decorative symbols are prepared, the special game state is digested by right-handed, so if the player misunderstands that the special game state will start, the player will make a right-hand shot. Since it is not possible to win a game ball to the first start port 14A, it is also urged to win a game ball to the first start port 14A in order to urge attention that the special game state does not start immediately ) Is important. In addition to such a display prompting the first starting port 14A to win a game ball, it is preferable that the liquid crystal display device 3 actively performs explanation of the follow-up time and display that it is the follow-up time. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 3, the display of the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is retracted downward, and the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed / stopped thereabove. You may make it display.

  When the sub CPU 71 completes the process of S326 or determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is not set in S323 (S323: NO), the display process in the other liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decorative member 5 is performed. Is executed (S327), and this subroutine is terminated.

  The display processing in the liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decoration member 5 is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting data for display on the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 75. For example, when displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 3, in the display control circuit 75, a VDP (not shown) uses decorative symbol data based on data for displaying an effect image from the sub CPU 71, Various image data such as background image data and effect image data are read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3.

[Voice control processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the voice control process executed in S295 of FIG. This sound control process is a process for controlling sound data (notification sound, sound effect, music, speech, etc.) output from the speaker 761.

  In this voice control process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether or not the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S331). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S331: YES), the process proceeds to S332, and the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S331: NO), the process proceeds to S335.

  In S332, after loading the chase time timer, the sub CPU 71 executes chase time countdown audio output processing (S333). This process is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting audio data to the audio control circuit 76 and controlling the speaker 761 by the audio control circuit 76. For example, music specific to the chase time is output from the speaker 761, and the remaining chase time is notified by voice such as “remaining 30 seconds”.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a first start opening winning promotion sound output process (S334). In this process, for example, a voice such as “Please insert a ball into the start chucker (first start port 14 </ b> A)” is output via the speaker 761.

  When the sub CPU 71 completes the process of S334 or determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is not set in S331 (S331: NO), the sub CPU 71 executes another audio output process (S335). finish.

[Lamp control processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the lamp control process executed in S296 of FIG. This lamp control process is a process for controlling an effect pattern (lamp lighting / extinguishing) by the lamp 771.

  In the lamp control process, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S341). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S342, and the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S341: NO), the process proceeds to S344.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 executes the chase time countdown lamp output process after loading the chase time timer (S343). This process is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting lamp lighting pattern data to the lamp control circuit 77 and controlling the lamp 771 by the lamp control circuit 77. In the lamp 771, for example, the lamp 771 is turned on / off in a pattern unique to the follow-up time.

  When the sub CPU 71 completes the process of S343 or determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is not set in S341 (S341: NO), the sub CPU 71 executes other lamp output processes (S344). finish.

[Moving member control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the movable member control process executed in S296 of FIG.

  In this movable member control process, first, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S351). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S351: YES), the process proceeds to S352, and the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S351: NO), the process proceeds to S354.

  In S352, after loading the follow-up time timer, the sub CPU 71 executes the follow-up movable process (S353). This process is executed when the sub CPU 71 transmits data for moving the movable members 4A and 4B to the movable member control circuit 74, and the movable member control circuit 74 controls the movable members 4A and 4B. In this process, the movable member control circuit 74 moves, for example, the launch tube as the movable member 4B up and down and vibrates left and right, or vibrates the character body as the movable member 4A at the standby position above the liquid crystal display device 3. And moved to the center of the liquid crystal display device 3 and rotated at the center of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  When the sub CPU 71 completes the process of S353 or determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is not set in S351 (S351: NO), the sub CPU 71 executes other movable member moving processes (S354), and this subroutine. Exit.

[Modification]
Next, modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following, explanations in common with the pachinko gaming machine described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40 will be omitted basically, and the differences will be mainly explained. And

  In this modification, a small hit is added as a hit in addition to the probability change big hit and the normal big hit, and the pursuit time corresponding to the small hit can be set. Here, the “small hit” means a hit where there is no change in the gaming state before and after the small hit gaming state that shifts after the small hit. Specifically, when the small hit game state is digested in the normal game state and the small hit game state is digested, the game state after the small hit game state remains the normal game state before the small hit game state, and the probability variation game There is no transition to the state. Similarly, when the small hit game state is digested in the probability variation gaming state, the gaming state after this small hit gaming state remains the probability variation gaming state before the small hit gaming state, and the normal gaming state There is no transition to.

  The small hit game state in this modified example is that the first big winning opening 16A is opened for the small hit with the first special symbol 221 and the second big winning opening 16B is opened for the small hit with the second special symbol 231. The total opening time is extremely short, for example, 1.8 seconds.

  The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first big winning opening 16A or the second winning opening 16B may be designed as appropriate. In the small hit gaming state, the first big winning opening 16A and the second winning prize are the same as in the big hit gaming state. The mouth 16B may be opened alternately.

[First special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 41 shows a first special symbol hit determination table of a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This first special symbol hit determination table is a modification of the first special symbol hit determination table of FIG.

  The first special symbol hit determination table of the modified example is based on the first random number acquired based on the detected random number triggered by the first start opening ball entry sensor 141 detecting that a game ball has won the first start opening 14A. This is referred to when a lottery is performed per special symbol. In the first special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the big hit random number value in the normal gaming state is “0”, and the big hit random number value in the probability variation gaming state is “0” to “9” 10 It is a piece. Therefore, the jackpot probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot probability is a high probability of 1/30 (10/300) in the probability variation gaming state. Further, the small hit random numbers in the normal gaming state are “10” and “11”, and the small hit random numbers in the probability varying gaming state are also “10” and “11”. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1/150 (2/300) in both the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

  When the big hit random number is acquired, the game shifts to a special game state after the fluctuation of the first special symbol 221 is stopped. When the small hit random number is acquired, the small hit game number is changed after the fluctuation of the first special symbol 221 is stopped. Migrate to On the other hand, when a random number other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number (losing random number) is acquired, the game state does not change after the first special symbol 221 stops changing.

[Design determination table for first special symbol]
FIG. 42 shows a symbol determination table of the first special symbol of a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The symbol determination table for the first special symbol is a modification of the hit determination table for the first special symbol in FIG.

  The symbol determination table of the first special symbol of the modified example obtains a big hit random number or a small hit random number in the winning lottery of the first special symbol 221 (“0”, “10”, “11”, probability variation in the normal gaming state) This is referred to when "0" to "11" are acquired in the gaming state (see FIG. 41). In the symbol determination of the first special symbol 221, a random number for symbol determination is used, and the lottery random number range is 0-5.

  In the normal game state symbol determination, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “A” at 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired symbol determination random number is “1”, 8R If the derived special symbol is “B” at the probability variation jackpot and the acquired symbol determination random number is “2”, the derived special symbol is “C” at the 4R probability variation jackpot, and the acquired symbol determination random numbers are “3” to “5”. In the case of "", the derived special symbol corresponds to "D" with 4R normal jackpot. Further, when the acquired special gaming state determination random number corresponds to the small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “E”.

  In the symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “F” at 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired symbol determination random number is “1” In the case where the derived special symbol is “G” at the 8R probability variable big hit and the acquired symbol determining random number is “2”, the derived special symbol is “H” at the 4R probability varying big hit, and the acquired symbol determining random number is “3” to “3”. In the case of “5”, the derived special symbol corresponds to “I” with 4R normal jackpot. When the acquired special gaming state determination random number corresponds to a small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “J”.

  When the random numbers for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state until the next big winning lottery in the special symbol winning lottery It becomes short-time gaming state. When the symbol random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the special gaming state ends. When the symbol random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the thirty rotation after the special gaming state ends. When the symbol random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the special gaming state ends. In the case of a small hit, the short-time gaming state will not be newly started, that is, if the small hit is won in the non-short-time gaming state (normal gaming state A), the small hit gaming state If the short win is won in the short time gaming state (the normal gaming state B and the probability variation gaming state), the short time gaming state is continued after the small hit gaming state ends. However, the number of time reductions will be inherited.

[Second special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 43 shows a second special symbol hit determination table of a modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This second special symbol hit determination table is a modification of the second special symbol hit determination table of FIG.

  The second special symbol hit determination table of the modified example is when the second special symbol lottery is triggered by the fact that the second starting port entrance sensor 142 detects that a game ball has won the second starting port 14B. Is referred to. In the second special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the winning random number value in the normal gaming state is one of “0”, and the winning random number value in the probability varying gaming state is “0” to “9” of 10 It is a piece. Therefore, the jackpot probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot probability is a high probability of 1/30 (10/300) in the probability variation gaming state. Further, the small hit random numbers in the normal gaming state are “10” and “11”, and the small hit random numbers in the probability varying gaming state are also “10” and “11”. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1/150 (2/300) in both the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

  When the big hit random number is acquired, the game shifts to a special game state after the second special symbol 231 stops changing, and when the small hit random number is acquired, after the second special symbol 231 stops changing, the small hit game state Migrate to On the other hand, when a random number other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number (losing random number) is acquired, the game state does not change after the second special symbol 231 stops changing.

[Second special symbol determination table]
FIG. 44 shows a symbol determination table of the second special symbol of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This symbol determination table for the second special symbol is a modification of the hit determination table for the first special symbol in FIG.

  The symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 of the modified example acquires a big hit random number or a small hit random number in the winning lottery of the second special symbol 231 (“0”, “10”, “11”, probability in the normal gaming state) This is referred to when “0” to “11” are acquired (see FIG. 43) in the variable gaming state. In the symbol determination of the second special symbol 231, a symbol random number for symbol determination is used, and the random number range is 0 to 5.

  In the normal game state symbol determination, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “a” at 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired symbol determination random number is “1”, 8R If the derived special symbol is “b” at the probability variation jackpot and the acquired symbol determination random number is “2”, the derived special symbol is “c” at the 4R probability variation jackpot, and the acquired symbol determination random numbers are “3” to “5”. In the case of "", the derived special symbol corresponds to "d" with 4R normal big hit. Further, when the acquired special gaming state determination random number corresponds to a small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “e”.

  In the symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “f” at 15R probability variable big hit, and when the acquired symbol determination random number is “1” In the case where the derived special symbol is “g” at the 8R probability variation jackpot and the acquired symbol determination random number is “2”, the derived special symbol is “h” at the 4R probability variation jackpot, and the acquired symbol determination random numbers are “3” to “3”. In the case of “5”, the derived special symbol corresponds to “i” with 4R normal jackpot. Further, when the acquired special gaming state determination random number corresponds to a small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “j”.

  If the random numbers for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, the winning of the big symbol lottery in the special symbol big lottery from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state It becomes a short game state until it is done. When the random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the special gaming state ends. When the acquired random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the special gaming state ends. When the random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the short-time gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is entered. In the case of a small hit, the short-time gaming state will not be newly started, that is, if the small hit is won in the non-short-time gaming state (normal gaming state A), the small hit gaming state If the short win is won in the short time gaming state (the normal gaming state B and the probability variation gaming state), the short time gaming state is continued after the small hit gaming state ends. However, the number of time reductions will be inherited.

[Variation time determination table]
FIG. 45 shows a variation time determination table for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 according to a modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This variation time determination table is a modification of the variation time determination table of FIG.

  The variation time determination table of the modified example is based on the derived special symbol determined in the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 in FIG. 42 or the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 in FIG. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is determined. The range of the random time for determining the variation time is 0-2.

  In determining the variation time in the normal gaming state A (no time saving), the derived special symbol is “A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”, that is, the special symbol winning lottery When the result is “probability variation jackpot”, when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 35 seconds, when “1”, the variation time is 50 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 60 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “D” or “d”, or “E” or “e”, that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “ordinary big hit” or “small hit”, the obtained variable time determination When the random number is “0”, the variation time is 40 seconds, when it is “1”, the variation time is 55 seconds, and when it is “2”, the variation time is 65 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “-” (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol hitting lottery is “losing”, when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 10 seconds, “1 "", The fluctuation time is 25 seconds, and when "2", the fluctuation time is 45 seconds.

  In determining the variation time in the normal gaming state B (with short time), the derived special symbol is “A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C”, or “c”, that is, a special symbol winning lottery When the result is “probability variation jackpot”, the fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, the fluctuation time is “30”, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the fluctuation time is “2”. Is 40 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “D” or “d”, or “E” or “e”, that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “ordinary big hit” or “small hit”, the obtained variable time determination When the random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 25 seconds, when it is “1”, the fluctuation time is 35 seconds, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation time is 45 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “-” (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “losing”, when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 7 seconds, “1” "", The fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and when "2", the fluctuation time is 30 seconds.

  In determining the variation time in the probability variation gaming state, the derived special symbol is “F”, “f”, “G”, “g”, “H” or “h”, that is, the result of the lottery of the special symbol is “probability” In the case of “large variation hit”, the fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds, “1” is the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, and “2” is the fluctuation time is 25 seconds. . When the derived special symbol is “I”, “J”, or “j”, that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “ordinary big hit” or “small hit” of the first special symbol 221, the obtained variation time When the decision random number is “0”, the variation time is 20 seconds, when “1”, the variation time is 25 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 30 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “-” (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “losing”, when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, the variation time is 5 seconds, “1” "", The fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and when "2", the fluctuation time is 15 seconds.

  If the derived special symbol is “i”, that is, if the winning lottery result of the second special symbol 231 in the probability variation state is “normal jackpot”, the variation time is determined based on the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. To do.

[Pursuit time determination table]
FIG. 46 shows a chase time determination table of a modified example in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This pursuit time determination table is a modification of the pursuit time determination table of FIG.

  The pursuit time determination table of the modified example is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation time when the result of the winning lottery of the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is “normal big hit”. The pursuit time is determined on the basis of the special symbol of the previous hit and the acquired random number for changing time (random number range 0 to 2).

  When the special symbol is “A” or “a” (15R probability variation big hit in the normal gaming state A and B), the follow-up time (second special symbol 231) is obtained when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”. When “1” is “ordinary big hit”) is 150 seconds, when “1” is the follow-up time is 180 seconds, when “2” is the follow-up time is 210 seconds, and the average follow-up time is 3 minutes (180 seconds) ).

  When the special symbol is “B” or “b” (8R probability variation big hit in the normal gaming state A, B), when the obtained random number for determining the variation time is “0”, the follow-up time is 100 seconds, “1 "" Is the follow-up time is 120 seconds, and "2" is the follow-up time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the follow-up time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  If the special symbol is “C” or “c” (4R probability variation big hit in normal gaming state A, B), when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, the follow-up time is 50 seconds, “1 "", The follow-up time is 60 seconds, and when "2", the follow-up time is 70 seconds, and the average value of the follow-up time is 1 minute (60 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “F” or “f” (15R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the follow-up time is 200 seconds when the obtained random time for determining the variation time is “0”, and when the follow-up time is “1” When the follow-up time is 240 seconds and “2”, the follow-up time is 280 seconds, and the average value of the follow-up time is 4 minutes (240 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “G” or “g” (8R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the follow-up time is 150 seconds when the obtained random number for variation time determination is “0”, and when the follow-up time is “1” When the follow-up time is 180 seconds and “2”, the follow-up time is 210 seconds, and the average follow-up time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “H” or “h” (4R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), when the obtained variation time determination random number is “0”, the follow-up time is 100 seconds, and when “1” When the follow-up time is 120 seconds and “2”, the follow-up time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the follow-up time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “J” or “j” (small hit in the probability variation state), the follow-up time is 150 seconds when the obtained random time for determining the change time is “0”, and the follow-up is carried out when it is “1” When the time is 180 seconds and “2”, the follow-up time is 210 seconds, and the average follow-up time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  Probability fluctuation jackpot ("A", "a", "B", "b", "C" or "c") in the special gaming state A, B and probability fluctuation jackpot in the probability variation gaming state ( In the case of “F”, “f”, “G”, “g”, “H”, or “h”), the follow-up time (average value) increases as the probability variation jackpot with a large number of rounds advantageous by the player. Preferential treatment. In other words, the special symbol that is more advantageous to the player is given priority to the pursuit time (average value), and the pursuit possibility (in the probability variation gaming state, the second special symbol 231 is a fluctuation time corresponding to “normal jackpot”. In the case of fluctuation, the chance of winning the probability variation big win in the winning lottery of the first special symbol 221 and the possibility that the first special symbol 221 stops and displays earlier than the second special symbol 231 is increased. ing.

  Also, the probability variation jackpot (“A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”) in the special gaming state A, B and the probability variation in the probability variation gaming state With jackpot (“F”, “f”, “G”, “g”, “H”, or “h”), the probability variation jackpot in the probability variation gaming state is more favorable for the follow-up time (average value). Has been. In other words, the special symbol acquired in a more advantageous situation for the player has a preferential follow-up time (average value), and the pursuit possibility (in the probability variation gaming state, the second special symbol 231 becomes “normal jackpot”. There is a high possibility that the first special symbol 221 will stop and be displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231 when winning in the winning lottery of the first special symbol 221 when the variation is in the corresponding variation time. It is made to become.

  The variation time when the special symbol is a small hit (“J” or “j”) in the probability variation state is determined using the variation time determination table in FIG. 45 described above. As shown in the table, not only the last special symbol (probability variation big hit) and the random number for determining the variation time obtained at that time, but also the special symbol for the last small hit and that obtained at that time The pursuit time is also set by the random number for determining the fluctuation time. From such a configuration, by making it possible to change the chase time with a small hit as an opportunity, the game characteristics are diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

The pursuit time is determined as in the pursuit time determination table described with reference to FIG.
The pursuit time may be determined according to the progress stage (number of digestions) of the short-time game.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol control process of a modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This first special symbol control process is a modification of the first special symbol control process of FIG. 19 executed in S15 of FIG.

  In FIG. 47, the numerical values written on the sides of S362 to S372 indicate the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 corresponding to those steps, and function as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control state flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates the game state of the first special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S362 to S372 to be executed. Here, S362 to S368 and S372 are the same as S62 to S69 in the first special symbol control process of FIG. 19, and S369 to S371 relating to the small hit are added to the first special symbol control process of the modified example. This is different from the first special symbol control process of FIG. Here, S362 is the first special symbol memory check process (00), S363 is the first special symbol variation time management process (01), S364 is the first special symbol display time management process (02), and S365 is the special game state start. Interval management process (03), S366 is the first big prize opening open process (04), S367 is the second big prize opening open process (05), S368 is the special game state end interval process (06), S369 is small The winning game state start interval process (07), S370 is a small hit gaming state first big opening opening process (08), S371 is a small hit gaming state end interval process (09), S372 is the first One special symbol game end process (10).

  In the first special symbol control process according to the modified example, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 stored in the main RAM 62 (S361), and then the first special symbol 221 is loaded. In accordance with the numerical value of the control state flag, it is determined whether or not various processes are executed in each step (S362 to S372), and the first special symbol game proceeds by executing one step for the numerical value. Become.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 when the result of the hit determination is lost. By sequentially setting “00”, “01”, “02”, and “10”, the processing of S362, S363, S364, and S372 shown in FIG. 47 is executed at a predetermined timing.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to “00”, “0” when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state and the result of the hit determination is big hit. By sequentially setting 01 ”,“ 02 ”, and“ 03 ”, the processing of S362, S363, S364, and S365 shown in FIG. 47 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state is executed. become. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag in the order of “04” and “05”, thereby performing the processing of S366 and S367 shown in FIG. 47 at a predetermined timing. Will be executed and a jackpot game will be executed. The main CPU 60 also executes the big hit gaming state end interval processing (06 in S368) when the big hit gaming state is ended in the processing of S366 or S367 shown in FIG. 47 after the control to the big hit gaming state is executed. ) And the first special symbol game end process (10) of S372.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to “00” when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state and the result of the hit determination is a small hit. By sequentially setting “01”, “02”, “07”, “08”, “09”, and “10”, S362, S363, S364, S369, S370, S371, and S372 shown in FIG. The process is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the small hit gaming state is executed.

  In the processing from S362 to S372 in FIG. 47, processing related to the small hit will be described later, but the processing from S362 to S372 will be briefly described below.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S362, the main CPU 60 performs the first special symbol variation time management process (S363) indicating that the value of the first special symbol hold count counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 221 is set, and the variation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the first special symbol memory check process, the control state flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the first special symbol of S363 is reached after the lapse of the variation time set as the waiting time timer. The variable time management process (01) is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process (01) of S363, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process, and the first special symbol variation time management process (01). When a predetermined fluctuation time elapses in the fluctuation of the symbol 221 (when the fluctuation of the first special symbol 221 is stopped), the control state flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol display time management process is set. In addition to setting, the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. In the first special symbol variation time management process, the control state flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that after the fixed waiting time set as the waiting time timer elapses, One special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol display time management process (02) of S364, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation. When the time elapses, a process of determining whether or not a special gaming state or a small hit is executed.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the special gaming state start interval management process in the case of a big hit, and sets the time corresponding to the special gaming state start interval in the waiting time timer. To do. Thus, the special game state start interval management process (03) of S365 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the special game state start interval set as the waiting time timer has elapsed.

  On the other hand, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (07) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process when the small hit is made, and sets the time corresponding to the small hit gaming state start interval. Set to the wait timer. Thus, the small hit gaming state start interval management process (07) of S369 is set to be executed after the passage of the time corresponding to the small hit gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer.

  In the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S365, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process, and sets the special gaming state start interval. When the corresponding time has elapsed, a process of opening the first grand prize winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets a value indicating the process during opening of the first big prize opening, the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 and sets the upper opening limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first big prize opening opening time. Set to timer. In the special game state start interval management process, after the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 and the first big prize opening time timer are set, the first big prize opening time timer is set. It is set so that the first big prize opening opening process (04) of S366 is executed.

  In the first grand prize opening opening process (04) of S366, the main CPU 60 determines the first special symbol 221 when the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (04) indicating the first big prize opening opening process. Whether the condition that the big prize winning prize counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or the condition that the upper limit opening time has passed (the first big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied The process which determines whether or not is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines that any one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening release number maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. Execute. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 and determines that it is not the final round. A value (05) indicating the process during opening of the second big prize opening is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 and an opening upper limit (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second big prize opening time timer. Thus, in the first big prize opening opening process, the control flag (05) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the second big prize opening opening process (05) of S367 is executed, and the first When the control state flag (06) of the special symbol 221 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S368 is set to be executed.

  In the second big prize opening opening process (05) of S367, the main CPU 60 determines the second special prize 221 when the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (05) indicating the second big prize opening opening process. Whether the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or more, or the condition that the upper opening limit time has passed (the second big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied The process which determines whether or not is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines that any one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening release number maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. Execute. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, the main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the big hit gaming state end interval process to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221, while when determining that it is not the final round, A value (04) indicating the first big winning opening opening process is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 and an opening upper limit (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first big winning opening release timer. In the second big winning opening opening process, the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the first big winning opening releasing process (04) of S366 is executed again, and the first special symbol is opened. When the control state flag (06) of 221 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S368 is set to be executed.

  In the special gaming state end interval process (06) of S368, the main CPU 60 determines that the first big prize opening opening time when the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval. Clear the time set in the timer or the second grand prize opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the residual ball of the big prize opening that was finally released within that time Process. Then, when the time corresponding to the special game state end interval (residual ball check processing time) has elapsed, a value (10) indicating the end of the first special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thereby, it sets so that the 1st special symbol game end process (10) of S372 may be performed.

  In the small hit gaming state start interval process (07) of S369, the main CPU 60 indicates that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process, and starts the small hit gaming state. When the time corresponding to the interval has elapsed, a process of opening the first grand prize winning opening 16A is executed. Further, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (08) of the first special symbol 221 to open the first big winning opening (processing for opening the small winning gaming state first big winning opening), and also sets the upper opening limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) is set in the first grand prize opening time timer. Thus, after the first big winning opening opening time timer is set, the small hit gaming state first big winning opening releasing process (08) of S370 is set.

  In the small bonus game state first big winning opening opening process (08) of S370, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates the small hit gaming state first big winning opening open process (08). ), The condition that the first grand prize opening prize counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) and the upper limit opening time has elapsed (the first big prize opening time timer is “0”). When it is determined that any one of the above conditions is satisfied, a value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval process is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thus, the small hit gaming state end interval process (09) of S371 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state end interval process (09) of S371, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval, and sets the small hit gaming state end interval. A value (10) indicating the end of the first special symbol game when the corresponding time has elapsed (the remaining ball check processing time in the first big winning opening opened in the small hit gaming state or the second big winning opening). Is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thereby, it sets so that the 1st special symbol game end process (10) of S372 may be performed.

  In the first special symbol game end process (10) of S372, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol game 221 has a value (10) indicating that the first special symbol game has ended, in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. A value (00) indicating storage check processing is set. In the first special symbol game ending process, the first special symbol memory check process of S362 is set to be executed again, and this subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol control process of a modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This second special symbol control process is a modification of the second special symbol control process of FIG. 20 executed in S16 of FIG.

  In FIG. 48, the numerical values written on the sides of S382 to S392 indicate the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 corresponding to those steps, and function as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control state flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates the game state of the second special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S382 to S392 to be executed. Here, S382 to S388 and S392 are the same as S72 to S79 in the second special symbol control process of FIG. 20, and the second special symbol control process of the modified example is added with S389 to S391 related to the small hit. This is different from the second special symbol control process of FIG. Here, S382 is the second special symbol memory check process (00), S383 is the second special symbol variation time management process (01), S384 is the second special symbol display time management process (02), and S385 is the special game state start. Interval management process (03), S386 is the first big prize opening open process (04), S387 is the second big prize opening open process (05), S388 is the special gaming state end interval process (06), S389 is small The winning game state start interval process (07), S390 is the small hit gaming state second big opening opening process (08), S391 is the small hit gaming state end interval process (09), S392 is the first 2 is a special symbol game end process (10).

  In the second special symbol control process of the modified example, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 stored in the main RAM 62 (S381), and then the second special symbol 231. According to the numerical value of the control state flag, it is determined whether or not various processes are executed in each step (S382 to S392), and the second special symbol game proceeds by executing the step corresponding to the numerical value.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 when the result of the hit determination is lost. By sequentially setting “00”, “01”, “02”, and “10”, the processing of S382, S383, S384, and S392 shown in FIG. 48 is executed at a predetermined timing.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to “00” and “00” when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state and the result of the hit determination is big hit. By sequentially setting “01”, “02”, and “03”, the processing of S382, S383, S384, and S385 shown in FIG. 48 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state is executed. become. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the control state flag is set in the order of “04” and “05”, so that the processing of S386 and S387 shown in FIG. 48 is performed at a predetermined timing. It will be executed and a jackpot game will be executed. The main CPU 60 also executes the big hit gaming state end interval processing (06 in S388) when the big hit gaming state is ended in the processing of S386 or S387 shown in FIG. 48 after the control to the big hit gaming state is executed. ) And the second special symbol game end process (10) of S392.

  When the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to "00", "01", "02", "07" ”,“ 08 ”,“ 09 ”, and“ 10 ”in this order, the processing of S382, S383, S384, S389, S390, S391, and S392 shown in FIG. 48 is executed at a predetermined timing. Control to the hit gaming state is executed.

  In the processing from S382 to S392 in FIG. 48, processing related to the small hit will be described later, but the processing from S382 to S392 will be briefly described below.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S382, the main CPU 60 performs the second special symbol variation time management process (S383) indicating that the value of the second special symbol hold count counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 231 is set, and the variation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the second special symbol memory check process, the control state flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the second special symbol of S383 is elapsed after the elapse of the variation time set as the waiting time timer. The variable time management process (01) is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process (01) of S383, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process, and the second When a predetermined variation time has elapsed in the variation of the special symbol 231 (when the second special symbol 231 is suspended), the control state flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the second special symbol display time management is set. In addition to setting, the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. In the second special symbol variation time management process, the control state flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer are set, so that after the fixed waiting time set as the waiting time timer elapses, 2 Special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol display time management process (02) of S384, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation. When the time elapses, a process for determining whether the game state is a special game state or a small hit is executed.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the special gaming state start interval management process in the case of a big hit, and sets the time corresponding to the special gaming state start interval in the waiting time timer. To do. Thus, the special game state start interval management process (03) of S385 is set to be executed after elapse of time corresponding to the special game state start interval set as the waiting time timer.

  On the other hand, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (07) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the small hit game state start interval management process when it is a small hit, and sets the time corresponding to the small hit game state start interval. Set to the wait timer. Thus, the small hit gaming state start interval management process (07) of S389 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the small hit gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer has elapsed.

  In the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S385, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process, and sets the special gaming state start interval. When the corresponding time has elapsed, a process of opening the first grand prize winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets a value indicating the process during opening of the second big prize opening, the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first big prize opening opening time. Set to timer. In the special game state start interval management process, after the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and the first big prize opening time timer are set, the first big prize opening opening process (04) of S386 is executed. To be set.

  In the first big prize opening opening process (04) of S386, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special prize winning is performed when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (04) indicating the big prize opening opening process. Whether or not the condition that the entrance prize counter is a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or more and the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the first big prize opening time timer is “0”) are satisfied. Execute the process of determining. When the main CPU 60 determines that any one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening release number maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. Execute. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process to the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and determines that it is not the final round. A value (05) indicating the process during opening of the second big prize opening is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and an opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second big prize opening time timer. As a result, the second special symbol opening process (05) of S387 is executed by setting the control state flag (05) of the second special symbol in the first large prize opening opening process. When the control state flag (06) of the special symbol 231 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S388 is set to be executed.

  In the second big prize opening opening process (05) of S387, the main CPU 60 determines the second special symbol 231 when the control state flag is a value (05) indicating the second big prize opening opening process. Whether the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or more, or the condition that the upper opening limit time has passed (the second big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied The process which determines whether or not is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines that any one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening release number maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. Execute. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval process to the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and determines that it is not the final round. A value (04) indicating the first big winning opening opening process is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first big winning opening opening time timer. In the second big winning opening opening process, the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 is set, so that the first big winning opening releasing process (04) of S386 is executed again, and the second special symbol is executed. When the control state flag (06) of 231 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S388 is set to be executed.

  In the special gaming state end interval process (06) of S388, the main CPU 60 releases the first big prize opening when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval. Clear the time set in the time timer or the second big prize opening time timer, set the residual ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and the residual ball of the big prize opening last released within that time Perform check processing. Then, when the time corresponding to the special game state end interval (residual ball check processing time) has elapsed, a value (10) indicating the end of the second special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Thus, the second special symbol game end process (10) of S392 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state start interval process (07) of S389, the main CPU 60 indicates that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process, and starts the small hit gaming state. When the time corresponding to the interval has elapsed, a process of opening the second big prize opening 16B is executed. Further, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (08) of the second special symbol 231 to open the second grand prize opening 16B (small hit gaming state second big prize opening opening process), and also sets the upper limit opening time (for example, (About 25 seconds) is set in the first grand prize opening time timer. Thus, after the first big winning opening opening time timer is set, the small hit gaming state second big winning opening opening process (08) of S390 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state second big prize opening opening process (08) of S390, the main CPU 60 has a value (08) in which the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates the small hit gaming state second big prize opening open process. ), The condition that the second big prize opening prize counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) and the opening upper limit time has passed (the first big prize opening time timer is “0”). When it is determined that either of the conditions is satisfied, a value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval process is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Thus, the small hit gaming state end interval process (09) of S391 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state end interval process (09) of S391, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval, and sets the small hit gaming state end interval. A value indicating the end of the second special symbol game when the corresponding time (residual ball check processing of the first big winning opening 16A or the second big winning opening 16B released in the small hit gaming state) has elapsed (10 ) Is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Thus, the second special symbol game end process (10) of S392 is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol game end process (10) of S392, the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol game end when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (10) indicating the end of the second special symbol game. A value (00) indicating storage check processing is set. In the second special symbol game ending process, the first special symbol memory check process of S382 is set to be executed again, and this subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol variation time determination process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the second special symbol variation time determination process of the modified example in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This second special symbol variation time determination process is a modification of the second special symbol variation time determination process executed in S109 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time determination process, first, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state (S401). When determining that the main CPU 60 is in the probability variation gaming state (S401: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game derives a normal big hit or a small hit (S402). . That is, a process of determining whether or not the determined second special symbol 231 corresponds to the special symbol for deriving the normal big hit or the small hit is executed. In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the normal big hit or the small hit is derived (S402: YES), it sets a follow-up notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S403). Here, the follow-up notification flag is used to notify that a normal big hit or small win is won in the probability variation gaming state (it is a special symbol for deriving a normal big hit or small hit), and this follow-up notification flag is set. When this is done, a process of transmitting a follow-up notification start command to start the follow-up notification to the sub-control circuit 7 is executed. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 7 can recognize that the follow-up time has started.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines the variation time of the second special symbol 231 with reference to the pursuit time determination table of FIG. 46, and executes a process of setting the variation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S404). At this time, the main CPU 60 is based on the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the previous special gaming state stored in the main RAM 62 and the random number for determining the variation time of the special symbol in the previous special gaming state. Referring to the pursuit time determination table of FIG. 46, the variation time of the second special symbol 231 in the second special symbol game is determined. Then, the main CPU 60 transmits the pursuit time (variation time) to the sub control circuit 7. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 7 can perform an effect corresponding to the pursuit time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the main CPU 60 is not in the probability variation gaming state (S401: NO), or is in the probability variation gaming state (S401: YES), it is determined that there is no normal big hit or small hit. (S402: NO), the variation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined according to the variation time determination table of FIG. 45, and the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is set (S405). That is, in S405, the variation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined as usual and set.

  The main CPU 60 ends this subroutine when the variation time for the second special symbol 231 is set in S404 or S405.

[First special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation time management process executed in S363 of FIG. This first special symbol variation time management process is a modification of the first special symbol variation time management process executed in S63 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process ( S411). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S411: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S412. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S411: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S412, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the first special symbol 221 is “0”, and determines that the waiting time timer is “0” (S412: YES). , The process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S413, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or a small hit gaming state. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined first special symbol 221 is “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, “H”, “ A process of determining whether or not “I” or “J” (see FIG. 42) is executed. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state (S413: YES), the process proceeds to S414. If it is determined that the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state is not derived (S413: NO), the process proceeds to S416.

  In S414, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the second special symbol 231 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is changing (S414: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S415 and determines that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (S414: NO), the process proceeds to S416.

  In S415, the main CPU 60 executes the forced stop and forced change processing of the second special symbol 231. That is, determining the special symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state in the first special symbol 221 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol 231 means that the first special symbol 221 is determined within the pursuit time. Since it is that the winning lottery is won in the symbol 221, the winning corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is given priority. Therefore, if the derived symbol corresponding to the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state is fluctuating, the second special symbol 231 is changed to a special game of losing and forcibly stopped. 2 When the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state of the special symbol 231 is canceled and the second special symbol 231 is changing in the derived symbol corresponding to the loss, it is compulsory without changing the special symbol To stop. In addition, the process which sets the 2nd special symbol non-change flag performed by S156 of FIG. 26 may be performed following this process.

  In S416, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Run.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting (storing) the determined waiting time as a waiting time timer in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 62 (S417). When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Second special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation time management process executed in S383 of FIG. This second special symbol variation time management process is a modification of the second special symbol variation time management process executed in S73 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process ( S421). When the main CPU 60 determines that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S421: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S422. On the other hand, if the main CPU 60 does not determine that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S421: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S422, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the second special symbol 231 is “0”, and determines that the waiting time timer is “0” (S422: YES). , The process proceeds to S423. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S423, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or a small hit gaming state. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined second special symbol 231 is “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, “h”, “ A process of determining whether or not “i” or “j” (see FIG. 44) is executed. In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state (S423: YES), the process proceeds to S424. If it is determined that the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state is not derived (S423: NO), the process proceeds to S426.

  In S424, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the first special symbol 221 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is changing (S424: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S425 and determines that the first special symbol 221 is not changing. (S424: NO), the process proceeds to S426.

  In S425, the main CPU 60 executes the forced stop and forced change processing of the first special symbol 221. That is, since the special symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state is determined in the second special symbol 231 during the variation of the first special symbol 221, the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or small In order to give priority to the stop display of the second special symbol 231 that is a winning game state, the derived symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 221 varies in the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the derived symbol corresponding to the small hit gaming state In the case of the middle, the game is changed to a special symbol of losing and forcibly stopped, the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state of the first special symbol 221 is canceled, and the first special symbol 221 is If the derived symbol corresponding to the loss is changing, the derived special symbol is forcibly stopped without changing. In addition, the process which sets the 2nd special symbol non-change flag performed by S156 of FIG. 26 may be performed following this process.

  In S426, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting (storing) the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Run.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting (storing) the post-confirmation waiting time as a waiting time timer in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 62 (S427). When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[First special symbol display time management process]
52 and 53 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol display time management process executed in S364 of FIG. This first special symbol display time management process is a modification of the first special symbol display time management process executed in S64 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process. Execute (S431). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management processing (S431: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S432. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S431: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S431, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S431: YES), the first special symbol display is performed. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the post-confirmation waiting time timer corresponding to the management processing is “0” is executed (S432). If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is “0” (S432: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S433 and determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is not “0”. If so (S432: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S433, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not to shift to the special game state based on the first special symbol 221. When the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the special gaming state (S433: YES), it shifts the process to S434, and when it determines not to shift to the special gaming state (S433: NO), it performs the process to S441. Transition.

  In S434, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the special gaming state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S435), then executes processing for setting the second special symbol non-change flag (S436), and processing in S437. To migrate. That is, the main CPU 60 keeps the first special symbol 221 in the stop display state during the special gaming state, but does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol 231.

  In S437, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the follow-up notification flag is set (S437: YES), after executing the process of clearing the follow-up notification flag to forcibly end the follow-up notification (S438). , The process proceeds to S439. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub-control circuit 7. As a result, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the follow-up notification, for example, the countdown at the display decorative member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when determining that the follow-up notification flag is not set (S437: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S439.

  In S439, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 60 can determine whether or not it is in the time saving gaming state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time-count counter is not “0”, the main CPU 60 can determine that it is in the time-short game state, and thus the process proceeds to S440 to clear the time-count counter. In S440, the main CPU 60 performs a process of clearing the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S439: YES), it can be determined that the time reduction counter is not in the short time gaming state, so there is no need to clear the time reduction counter. Exit the subroutine.

  If the main CPU 60 determines in S433 not to shift to the special gaming state (S433: NO), as shown in FIG. 53, whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state based on the first special symbol 221 in S441. The process which determines whether or not is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the small hit gaming state (S441: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S442, and when it determines not to shift to the small hit gaming state (S441: NO), to S447. Migrate processing.

  In S442, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the small hit gaming state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S443), and then executes a process of setting the second special symbol non-variable flag (S444). Migrate processing. That is, the main CPU 60 keeps the first special symbol 221 in the stop display state during the small hit gaming state, but does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol 231.

  In S445, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the follow-up notification flag is set (S445: YES), after executing the process of clearing the follow-up notification flag to forcibly terminate the follow-up notification (S446). This subroutine is finished. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub-control circuit 7. As a result, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the follow-up notification, for example, the countdown at the display decorative member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when determining that the follow-up notification flag is not set (S445: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S447, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting a value (10) indicating the first special symbol game ending process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Second special symbol display time management process]
54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol display time management process executed in S384 of FIG. This second special symbol display time management process is a modification of the second special symbol display time management process executed in S74 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process. Execute (S451). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management processing (S451: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S452. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S451: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  When the main CPU 60 determines in S451 that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S451: YES), the second special symbol display is performed. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the post-confirmation waiting time timer corresponding to the management processing is “0” is executed (S452). When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is “0” (S452: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S453 and determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is not “0”. If so (S452: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S453, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not to shift to the special game state based on the second special symbol 231. When the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the special game state (S453: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S454, and when it determines not to shift to the special game state (S453: NO), the main CPU 60 performs the process to S461. Transition.

  In S454, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the special gaming state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S455), and then executes a process of setting the first special symbol non-change flag (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. To migrate. That is, the main CPU 60 keeps the second special symbol 231 in the stop display state during the special gaming state, but does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol 221.

  In S457, the main CPU 60 executes a process for determining whether or not the follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the follow-up notification flag is set (S457: YES), after executing the process of clearing the follow-up notification flag to forcibly end the follow-up notification (S458). , The process proceeds to S459. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub-control circuit 7. As a result, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the follow-up notification, for example, the countdown at the display decorative member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when determining that the follow-up notification flag is not set (S457: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S459.

  In S459, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 60 can determine whether or not it is in the time saving gaming state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time-count counter is not “0”, the main CPU 60 can determine that it is a time-short game state, and thus the process proceeds to S460 in order to clear the time-count counter. In S460, the main CPU 60 performs processing for clearing the value of the time-count counter in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the hour / times counter is “0” (S459: YES), it can be determined that the hour / times counter is not in the short-time gaming state. Exit the subroutine.

  If the main CPU 60 determines in S453 not to shift to the special gaming state (S453: NO), as shown in FIG. 55, whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state based on the second special symbol 231 in S461. The process which determines whether or not is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the small hit gaming state (S461: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S462, and when it determines not to shift to the small hit gaming state (S461: NO), to S467. Migrate processing.

  In S462, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the small hit gaming state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S463), and then executes a process of setting the first special symbol non-change flag (S464). Migrate processing. That is, the main CPU 60 maintains the stopped display state of the second special symbol 231 during the small hit gaming state, but does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol 221.

  In S465, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the follow-up notification flag is set (S465: YES), after executing the process of clearing the follow-up notification flag to forcibly end the follow-up notification (S466). This subroutine is finished. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub-control circuit 7. As a result, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the follow-up notification, for example, the countdown at the display decorative member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when determining that the follow-up notification flag is not set (S465: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S467, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting a value (10) indicating the second special symbol game ending process in a predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Small hit gaming state start interval management processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit gaming state start interval management process executed in S369 of FIG. 47 and S389 of FIG.

  In this small hit gaming state start interval management process, first, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process. The process which determines whether is performed (S471). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is a value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process (S471: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S472. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process (S471: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S472, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit gaming state start interval management process is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (S472: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of S473 and determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”. (S472: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S473, the main CPU 60 executes a special winning opening opening preparation process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 62. The number of times of opening the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state is set as appropriate, and may be one or more times. However, in the case of a small hit corresponding to the first special symbol 221, the number of times of opening the first big prize opening 16A is defined, while the number of times of opening the second big prize opening 16B is set to “0”. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol 231, the number of times of opening the second big prize opening 16B is defined, while the number of times of opening the first big prize opening 16A is set to “0”. The

  Next, the main CPU 60 assigns a value (08) indicating processing during the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state to a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 62 in the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231. After the processing for setting the control status flag is performed (S474), the processing for setting the large winning opening opening time timer for opening the large winning opening opening upper limit time is executed (S475), and this subroutine is terminated.

[Processing during opening of the first big prize opening in the small hit gaming state]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the small hit gaming state first big winning opening opening process executed in S370 of FIG.

  In the small hit gaming state first big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 60 first sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to a value (08) indicating the small hit gaming state first big winning opening open process. The process which determines whether or not is performed (S481). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (08) indicating the small hit gaming state first big winning opening opening process (S481: YES), the process proceeds to S482. If the process proceeds and it is determined that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (08) indicating the small hit gaming state first big winning opening opening process (S481: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S482, the main CPU 60 executes a first grand prize opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes the process of driving the first shutter 17A by controlling the first big prize winning solenoid 171.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the number of reactions (the number of winning game balls) at the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first big winning opening 16A is 9 or more (S483). In this process, if the main CPU 60 does not determine that the number of reactions at the first count sensor 161 is 9 or more (S483: NO), the process proceeds to S484.

  In S484, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the opening time timer of the first big winning opening 16A is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the opening time timer is “0” (S484: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S483.

  In the processing of S483 and S484, the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions in the first count sensor 161 is 9 or more (S483: YES) or until it determines that the open time timer is “0” (S484: YES), repeatedly executed.

  When the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions at the first count sensor 161 is 9 or more (S483: YES), or when the open time timer is determined to be “0” (S484: YES), A first big prize opening closing process is executed (S485). In this process, the main CPU 60 controls the first big prize opening solenoid 171 to drive the first shutter 17A to close the first big prize opening 16A.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs processing for setting the value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval processing in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 (S486), and then waits for the remaining ball check processing time to wait. Processing for setting the timer is executed (S487), and this subroutine is terminated.

[Processing during opening of second big prize opening in small hit gaming state]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the small hit gaming state second big prize opening opening process executed in S390 of FIG.

  In the small hit gaming state second big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 60 first sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (08) indicating the small hit gaming state second big winning opening open process. The process which determines whether or not is performed (S491). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (08) indicating that the small hit gaming state second big winning opening is being opened (S491: YES), the process proceeds to S492. If the process proceeds and it is determined that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (08) indicating the small hit gaming state second big winning opening opening process (S491: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S492, the main CPU 60 executes a second big prize opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of driving the second shutter 17B by controlling the second big prize winning solenoid 172.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the number of reactions (the number of winning game balls) at the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second big winning opening 16B is 9 or more (S493). In this process, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the number of reactions at the second count sensor 162 is 9 or more (S493: NO), the process proceeds to S494.

  In S494, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the opening time timer of the second big prize opening 16B is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the opening time timer is “0” (S494: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S493.

  In the processes of S493 and S494, the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions at the second count sensor 162 is 9 or more (S493: YES) or until it determines that the open time timer is “0” (S494: YES), repeatedly executed.

  When the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions at the second count sensor 162 is 9 or more (S493: YES), or when the open time timer is determined to be “0” (S494: YES), A second big prize opening closing process is executed (S495). In this process, the main CPU 60 controls the second big prize opening solenoid 172 to drive the second shutter 17B to close the second big prize opening 16B.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs processing for setting the value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval processing in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 (S496), and then waits for the remaining ball check processing time to wait. Processing for setting the timer is executed (S497), and this subroutine is terminated.

[Small hit gaming state end interval processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the small hit gaming state end interval process executed in S371 of FIG. 47 and S391 of FIG.

  In the small hit gaming state end interval process, first, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval process. A determination process is executed (S501). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is a value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval process (S501: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S502 and performs the small hit gaming state end interval process. If it is determined that the value is not (09) (S501: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S502, the main CPU 60 executes the first check until the waiting time set as the remaining ball check time elapses after executing the residual ball check process of the big winning opening in which the small hit gaming state is executed (S503: YES). Residual ball check processing is executed for the big winning opening 16A or the second big winning opening 16B (S502, S503: NO).

  When the remaining ball check process is completed (S503: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the reaction number counter of the count sensor 161 or 162 corresponding to the opened big winning opening 16A or 16B (S504), and the small hit game A process of setting a control state flag having a value (10) indicating an end process of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game displaying the special symbol from which the state is derived is executed (S505), and this subroutine is ended.

[First special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol game end process executed in S372 of FIG. This first special symbol game end process is a modification of the first special symbol game end process executed in S69 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end process. (S601). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S601: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S602, and controls the control state. When it is determined that the flag is not the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end process (S601: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In step S <b> 602, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time-saving counter is “0” (S602: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S604, and determines that the value of the time-saving game is not “0”. (S602: NO), a process of subtracting "1" from the time reduction counter is executed (S603).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol game is a first special symbol game from which a special bonus game state is derived (S604). If the main CPU 60 determines that it is not the first special symbol game from which the special game state of the big jackpot is derived (S604: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S606, and derives the special game state of the normal jackpot. If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S604: YES), the number of time reductions corresponding to the derived special game state (normal jackpot) is added to the time reduction number counter (S605). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is “D” or “I” corresponding to 4R normal jackpot, “50”, “30”, and “20” are set in the time-count counter according to the obtained random number. Set either one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S606.

  In S606, the main CPU 60 executes processing for updating the specific short time counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the specific short time counter used when the special game state derived in the first special symbol game is a probability variation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the main CPU 60 has “A”, “B”, “C”, “F”, “G”, or “H” corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. In this case, a process is performed to set the specific short time counter to infinity (until the next special gaming state is derived), and when the derived special symbol is “D” or “I” corresponding to 4R normal big hit Then, a process of clearing the specific short time counter is performed. In the case of “E” or “J” corresponding to the small hit, the game state returns to the original game state after the end of the small hit game state, and therefore the number of times is not updated.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol non-change flag (see S444 in FIG. 53) is set (S607). If the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol non-change flag is not set (S607: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S609 and determines that the second special symbol non-change flag is set. In this case (S607: YES), after executing the process of clearing the second special symbol non-change flag (S608), the process proceeds to S609.

  In S609, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates the data (first special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of holdings corresponding to the first special symbol 221 so as to decrease by “1”, and stores the data in the first special symbol storage area. Update. In this process, if the first special symbol game is in the special gaming state (probability big hit) or the small hit gaming state, the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the first special game The random number for determining the variation time used in the symbol game is stored and held in the main RAM 62 until a special gaming state (probability variation big hit) or a small hit gaming state is derived next.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (00) indicating the first special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 (S610), and ends this subroutine.

[Second special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol game end process executed in S392 of FIG. This second special symbol game end process is a modification of the first special symbol game end process executed in S79 of FIG.

  In this second special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (10) indicating the second special symbol game end process. (S621). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S621: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S622 and controls the control state. When it is determined that the flag is not the value (10) indicating the second special symbol game end process (S621: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S622, the main CPU 60 executes processing for determining whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time-saving counter is “0” (S622: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S624, and determines that the value of the time-saving game is not “0”. (S622: NO), a process of subtracting “1” from the time-count counter is executed (S623).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game is a second special symbol game in which a special game state of a big jackpot is derived (S624). If the main CPU 60 determines that the game is not the second special symbol game from which the normal big hit special gaming state is derived (S624: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S626 and derives the normal big hit special gaming state. If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S624: YES), the number of time reductions corresponding to the derived special game state (usually big hit) is added to the time reduction number counter (S625). Specifically, when the derived symbol is “d” or “i” corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, any one of “50”, “30”, and “20” is set in the time-count counter according to the obtained random number. Set it. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S626.

  In S626, the main CPU 60 executes processing for updating the specific short time counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the specific short time counter used when the special gaming state derived in the second special symbol game is a probability variation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the main CPU 60 has “a”, “b”, “c”, “f”, “g”, or “h” corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. In this case, the processing is performed to set the specific short time counter to infinity (until the next special game state is derived), and when the derived special symbol is “d” or “i” corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot Then, a process of clearing the specific short time counter is performed. In the case of “e” or “j” corresponding to the small hit, since the game state returns to the original game state after the end of the small hit game state, the number of time reductions is not updated.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol non-change flag (see S464 in FIG. 55) is set (S627). If the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S627: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S629 and determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is set. In this case (S627: YES), after executing the process of clearing the first special symbol non-change flag (S628), the process proceeds to S629.

  In S629, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates data indicating the number of holdings corresponding to the second special symbol 231 (second special symbol start storage information) so as to decrease by “1”, and stores the second special symbol storage area. Update. In this process, if the second special symbol game is in the special gaming state (probability big hit) or the small hit gaming state, the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the second special symbol game and the second special game The random number for determining the variation time used in the symbol game is stored and held in the main RAM 62 until a special gaming state (probability variation big hit) or a small hit gaming state is derived next.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (00) indicating the second special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 (S630), and ends this subroutine.

  As another embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, the processing described below may be executed. Hereinafter, a processing flow and a temporal flow in other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the above-described embodiment are appropriately assigned the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
A processing flow of a program executed by the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing]
First, main processing by the control of the main CPU 60 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, first, the main CPU 60 performs a watchdog timer disable process (S1001). In this process, the watchdog timer value is reset.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs input / output port setting processing (S1002). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not it is in a power interruption detection state (S1003). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HI (high level). When the power interruption detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is set, and when the power interruption detection signal is not HI, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not set.

  When it is determined in the processing of S1003 that the power interruption detection state is present (S1003: YES), the main CPU 60 repeats the processing of S1003. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1003 that the power interruption detection state is not set (S1003: NO), the main CPU 60 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process (S1004). In this process, the main CPU 60 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 7 receives a signal.

  Next, the main CPU 60 permits writing to the RAM (S1005). In this processing, the main CPU 60 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 62. Subsequently, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 80 (see FIG. 4) is on (S1006).

  When it is determined in the processing of S1006 that the backup clear switch 80 is not on (S1006: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag (S1007). When it is determined that there is a power interruption detection flag (S1007: YES), the main CPU 60 calculates a work damage check value (S1008). In this process, the main CPU 60 performs a damage check on the work area and calculates a work damage check value.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value (S1009). When it is determined that the work damage check value is a normal value (S1009: YES), the main CPU 60 sets 7FFEH in the stack pointer (S1010). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs initial setting of the work area at the time of power recovery (S1011).

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a high probability gaming state display notification process at the time of power recovery (S1012). In this process, the main CPU 60 notifies that the game state at the time of power recovery is a probability change gaming state at the time of power recovery when the special symbol game jackpot probability is a high probability game state (probability variable game state). The display to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3. Note that the notification display may be configured to end at the beginning or end of the first fluctuation after power-on (power recovery).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets a command for power recovery (S1013). In this process, the main CPU 60 stores a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption in the main RAM 62. The command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption stored in the main RAM 62 is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs initial setting of CPU peripheral devices (S1014). When this process ends, the program address returns to the address before the power interruption. That is, it returns to the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

  When it is determined in step S1006 that the backup clear switch 80 is on (S1006: YES), in step S1007, it is determined that there is no power failure detection flag (S1007: NO), or in step S1009, a work damage check is performed. When determining that the value is not normal (S1009: NO), the main CPU 60 sets 8000H in the stack pointer (S1015).

  Next, the main CPU 60 acquires initial values of random numbers related to jackpot determination (S1016). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 clears the entire work area (S1017). Then, the main CPU 60 sets initial values of random numbers related to jackpot determination (S1018).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 performs initial setting of the work area at the time of initialization of the RAM (S1019). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets a command for initializing the RAM (S1020). That is, the RAM initialization command is stored in the main RAM 62. The RAM initialization command stored in the main RAM 62 is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs initial setting of CPU peripheral devices (S1021). Then, the system timer interrupt process is prohibited (S1022). The system timer interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 updates the initial value random number (S1023). That is, the initial random number counter value is updated. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 permits the system timer interrupt process (S1024). Next, the main CPU 60 updates the effect random number (S1025). That is, the effect random number counter value is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 60 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 62, and determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more (S1026). When it is determined that the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more (S1026: YES), the main CPU 60 subtracts 3 from the system timer monitoring timer value (S1027).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol control process (S1028), and subsequently performs a second special symbol control process (S1029). In these processes, the main CPU 60 extracts a jackpot determination random number value and a winning symbol determination random number value in accordance with the detection signals from the first start port entrance sensor 141 and the second start port entrance sensor 142. Then, a special symbol lottery is performed with reference to any of a plurality of hit determination tables described later stored in the main ROM 61. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a normal symbol control process (S1030). In this process, the main CPU 60 extracts a random value in accordance with the detection signal from the passing ball sensor 151. Then, referring to the normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 61, the normal symbol lottery is performed. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 62. Note that, when a win is won in the normal symbol lottery, the pair of blade members 143 as the normal electric accessory is in an open state, and it becomes easy for the game ball to win (win) in the second start port 14B.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a symbol display device control process (S1031). In this processing, the main CPU 60 stores a control signal for driving the first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 and the normal symbol display device 20 in the main RAM 62. This control signal is generated based on the results of the first special symbol control process and the second special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 62 in the processes of S1028 to S1030 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 transmits the control signal stored in the main RAM 62 to the first special symbol display device 22, the second special symbol display device 23, and the normal symbol display device 20. The first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 variably displays the special symbol based on the received control signal, and then stops the special symbol. The normal symbol display device 20 variably displays the normal symbol based on the received control signal, and then stops the normal symbol.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs game information data generation processing (S1032). In this process, the main CPU 60 generates data relating to game information signals to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer and stores the data in the main RAM 62.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs symbol reservation number data generation processing (S1033). In this process, the main CPU 60 stores in the main RAM 62 control signals for driving the first special symbol hold display device 24, the second special symbol hold display device 25, and the normal symbol hold display device 21. This control signal is a detection signal from the first start-entrance ball sensor 141, the second start-entrance ball sensor 142, and the passing ball sensor 151, and execution of fluctuation display of the first and second special symbols and the normal symbol. It is generated based on the update result of the pending number data that is updated according to.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs port output processing (S1034). In this process, the main CPU 60 outputs the control signals stored in the main RAM 62 from the respective ports in the processes of S1031, S1032, and S1033 described above. Specifically, power is supplied to an LED power source (common signal) for turning on the LED and a normal electric accessory solenoid 144 that opens and closes the pair of blade members 143 in the second big prize opening 16B.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 performs a winning mouth related command control process (S1035). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a payout process (S1036). In this process, the main CPU 60 checks whether or not a game ball has won the first grand prize opening 16A, the second big prize opening 16B, the first starting opening 14A, the second starting opening 14B, and the general winning opening 18. Do. If there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each win is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 81.

[First special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process performed in S1028 of the main process (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 loads the control state flag stored in the main RAM 62 (S1041). That is, the main CPU 60 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 62.

  In FIG. 64, numerical values shown below S1042 to S1049 represent control state flags corresponding to those steps. This control state flag is stored in a storage area that functions as a control state flag in the main RAM 62. The main CPU 60 advances the first special symbol game by executing each step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  The main CPU 60 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S1042 to S1049 based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the game state of the first special symbol game, and enables one of the processes from step S1042 to step S1049 to be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step of S1042 to S1049. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutines are executed without executing the processing of each step. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  When the process of S1041 ends, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol storage check process (S1042). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “01H” indicating the first special symbol variation time management in the control state flag. Then, a hit determination, determination of the first special symbol, determination of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, determination of the variation time of the first special symbol, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol variation time management process (S1043). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the value “02H” indicating the first special symbol display time management in the control state flag when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol display time management process (S1044). In this process, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “03H” indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag. Further, when the result of the hit determination is not a big win, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the first special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a hit start interval management process (S1045). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening (S1046). In this process, when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag. Thus, in this embodiment, the interval between rounds is applied.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special winning opening release process (S1047). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “05H” indicating the waiting time management before reopening of the big winning opening in the control state flag when the number of opening of the big winning opening has not reached the upper limit. Further, when the number of times the special winning opening is opened reaches the upper limit value, a value “06H” indicating the hit end interval is set in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a hit end interval process (S1048). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the first special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol game end process (S1049). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “00H” indicating the first special symbol storage check in the control state flag.

  As described above, the first special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 22 is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when it is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “07H”. set. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processes of S1042, S1043, S1044, and S1049 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when it is not a big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1042, S1043, S1044, and S1045 at a predetermined timing, and executes control to the big hit or small hit gaming state.

  When executing control to the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag in the order of “04H” and “05H”. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1047 and S1046 at a predetermined timing, and executes the big hit game.

  When the big hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processes of step S1046, step S1048, and step S1049 at a predetermined timing, and ends the big hit game. Thus, the first special symbol control process branches the process according to the status.

[Second special symbol control process]
Next, the second special symbol control process performed in S1029 of the main process (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol control process is also configured by the same steps as the first special symbol control process described above.

  First, the main CPU 60 loads the control state flag stored in the main RAM 62 (S1051). That is, the main CPU 60 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 62.

  In FIG. 65, the numerical values shown below S1052 to S1059 represent the control state flags corresponding to those steps. This control state flag is stored in a storage area that functions as a control state flag in the main RAM 62. The main CPU 60 advances the second special symbol game by executing each step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  The main CPU 60 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S1052 to S1059 based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the game state of the second special symbol game, and enables one of the processes from step S1052 to step S1059 to be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 60 executes the process of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step of S1052 to S1059. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutines are executed without executing the processing of each step. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  When the process of S1051 ends, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol memory check process (S1052). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “01H” indicating the second special symbol variation time management in the control state flag. Then, a hit determination, determination of the second special symbol, determination of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, determination of the variation time of the second special symbol, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol variation time management process (S1053). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the value “02H” indicating the second special symbol display time management in the control state flag when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol display time management process (S1054). In this process, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “03H” indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag. Further, when the result of the hit determination is not a big win, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the second special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a hit start interval management process (S1055). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening (S1056). In this process, when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special winning opening release process (S1057). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “05H” indicating the waiting time management before reopening of the big winning opening in the control state flag when the number of opening of the big winning opening has not reached the upper limit. Further, when the number of times the special winning opening is opened reaches the upper limit value, a value “06H” indicating the hit end interval is set in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a hit end interval process (S1058). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the second special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol game end process (S1059). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “00H” indicating a special symbol storage check in the control state flag.

  As described above, the second special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 23 is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when it is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “07H”. set. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processes of S1052, S1053, S1054, and S1059 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when it is not a big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1052, S1053, S1054, and S1055 at a predetermined timing, and executes control to the big hit or small hit gaming state.

  When executing control to the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag in the order of “04H” and “05H”. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processes of S1057 and S1056 at a predetermined timing, and executes the big hit game.

  When the big hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processes of step S1056, step S1058, and step S1059 at a predetermined timing, and ends the big hit game.

  As described above, also in the second special symbol control process, the process is branched according to the status. In addition, although detailed illustration description is abbreviate | omitted, also in a normal symbol control process (S1030 of FIG. 63), a process is branched according to a status similarly to a 1st special symbol control process and a 2nd special symbol control process. Yes.

  The program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from the small module to the parent module is possible with a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Next, the special symbol memory check process performed in S1042 and S1052 of the first special symbol control process and the second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol memory check process described below will be described as being applied to the first special symbol control process unless otherwise specified. The special symbol memory check process applied to the second special symbol control process is the same as that applied to the first special symbol control process, and the processing contents are all read as "first" as "second". Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “00H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol storage check process (S1061). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “00H” (S1061: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process.

  When it is determined in the process of S1061 that the control state flag is “00H” (S1061: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is a start memory of the first special symbol game (S1062).

  In the process of S1062, the main CPU 60 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4) provided in the main RAM 62. If data is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4), the main CPU 60 determines that there is a start storage of the first special symbol game. On the other hand, if no data is stored in any special symbol start storage area, the main CPU 60 determines that there is no start memory of the first special symbol game.

  In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as the start memory. In the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4), special symbol game data (information) corresponding to the four first special symbols held is stored as start memory.

  The first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) show a specific example of the hold information storage means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In addition, the fact that the data (information) of the first special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (0) is one specific example that the lottery start condition is established in the gaming machine of the present invention. Indicates. The main RAM 62 according to the present embodiment is also provided with second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4) as in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4).

  In the process of S1062, when it is determined that there is no start memory of the first special symbol game (S1062: NO), the main CPU 60 performs a demonstration display process (S1063). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process, and moves the process to a first special symbol control process.

  In the demonstration display process, the main CPU 60 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 62. In other words, the main CPU 60 maintains the state in which the start memory of the first special symbol game (the special symbol start storage area in which the jackpot determination random number is stored) is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Then, a predetermined value is set as the demonstration display permission value.

  Further, the main CPU 60 sets demo display command data in the main RAM 62 when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. When receiving the demonstration display command data, the sub control circuit 7 displays a demonstration screen on the liquid crystal display device 3.

  When it is determined in the process of S1062 that the first special symbol game has been started (S1062: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol invariant flag is set (S1064). Note that the first special symbol non-variable flag in the present embodiment can be set in the special symbol display time management process related to the second special symbol, and shifts to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the second special symbol. Set when In the following description, since the special symbol display time management process related to the second special symbol is omitted, the description related to the process of setting the first special symbol non-change flag is also omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S1064 that the first special symbol non-variation flag is set (S1064: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol memory check process and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process. . On the other hand, when determining that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S1064: NO), the main CPU 60 sets a value “01H” indicating the special symbol change time management to the control state flag (S1065). Next, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol memory transfer processing (S1066).

  In the special symbol memory transfer process, the main CPU 60 corresponds to the first special symbol to be variably displayed, and each of the data of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) is stored in the first special symbol start memory area ( Shift (store) from 0) to (3).

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a big hit determination process (S1067). This jackpot determination process corresponds to the transfer lottery means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables based on the read high probability flag. The plurality of hit determination tables differ in the number of determination values that are jackpots (values of acquired random numbers that are jackpots).

  When the high probability flag has a predetermined value, the main CPU 60 selects a high probability hit determination table with a large number of jackpot determination values, and when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value, the number of jackpot determination values Select the hit determination table with the smaller number. Thereby, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation gaming state), it is a big hit than when it is a low probability state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state) The probability of transitioning to the gaming state increases. As described above, the plurality of hit determination tables in the present embodiment are not particularly illustrated, but are different from the hit determination tables shown in FIGS. 8 and 10 described above and are particularly bound to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the jackpot probability is defined so as to differ depending on the value of the high probability flag.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 refers to the jackpot determination random number value extracted at the time of the first special symbol start winning prize and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the selected hit determination table. . Then, the main CPU 60 determines that it is a big hit when the big hit determination random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol determination processing (S1068). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines a big hit symbol as a derived special symbol of the first special symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not a big win (in the case of a loss), the main CPU 60 determines a lost symbol as a derived special symbol of the first special symbol.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing (S1069). In this process, the main CPU 60 selects the variation time determination table (see FIG. 12) of the above-described embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination determined in the process of step S1067. Then, the main CPU 60 refers to the selected variation time determination table, determines a variation pattern including the variation time based on the gaming state, the derived special symbol, and the acquired random time value for variation time determination, and determines a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. To store.

  Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22. Thereby, the first special symbol display device 22 displays the special symbol in a variable manner with the determined variation pattern, and then stops and displays the derived special symbol as the first special symbol determined in the process of S1068.

  Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a variation pattern command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 determines the contents of the effect display based on the received variation pattern command, and executes the effect display.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol variation time setting processing (S1070). In this processing, the main CPU 60 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first timer, and clears the storage area used for the current variation display. In the first timer according to the present embodiment, in addition to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a variation start waiting time, a hit start interval time, a winning opening opening time, an interval time between rounds, which will be described later, The hit end interval time and the like are set at an appropriate timing.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 62 (S1071). The special symbol effect start command is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 performs control for starting the presentation based on the received special symbol presentation start command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 clears the value of the first special symbol start storage area (0) used for the current variation display (S1072). When the process of S1072 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process for the first special symbol, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process. The special symbol storage check process for the second special symbol is the same.

[Special symbol determination processing]
Next, the special symbol determination process performed in S1068 of the special symbol memory check process (see FIG. 66) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol determination process described below relates to the first special symbol, but the special symbol determination process related to the second special symbol is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination process (S1067 in FIG. 66) is a jackpot (S1091).

  When it is determined in the process of S1091 that the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (S1091: YES), the main CPU 60 determines the big hit in the first special symbol based on the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the symbol determination counter. The symbol is determined (S1092). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets the jackpot symbol data in the determined first special symbol, and sets the jackpot symbol command (S1093).

  In the processing of S1093, the main CPU 60 sets the big hit symbol data in the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 and supplies it to the first special symbol display device 22. The first special symbol display device 22 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the jackpot symbol data of the first special symbol.

  The jackpot symbol command in the first special symbol set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the sub-control circuit 7 causes the liquid crystal display device 3 to derive and display the big hit mode of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of S1093, the main CPU 60 sets hit start interval display time data corresponding to the winning symbol (big winning symbol) in the main RAM 62 (S1094).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets data related to the number of times of winning a prize opening is set in the main RAM 62 (S1095). There are three types of jackpots according to this embodiment: 4R jackpot, 8R jackpot, and 15R jackpot. The main CPU 60 sets “4” as the big prize opening number related data when the big hit type is 4R big hit. Further, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot of 8R, “8” is set as the data related to the number of times of winning a prize opening. Further, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot of 15R, “15” is set as the data related to the number of times of winning a prize opening. When the process of S1095 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol determination process, and moves the process to a special symbol storage check process (see FIG. 66).

  In the process of S1091, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (S1091: NO), the main CPU 60 sets the data of the lost symbol and sets the command of the lost symbol in the main RAM 62 (S1096).

  In the processing of S1096, the main CPU 60 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Then, the lost symbol data is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 in accordance with the fluctuating first special symbol.

  When the lost symbol data is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22, the first special symbol display device 22 variably displays the first special symbol and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the lost symbol data. Stop display.

  Also, a lost symbol command set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the sub-control circuit 7 causes the liquid crystal display device 3 to derive and display the lost pattern of the decorative symbol. When the process of S1096 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol determination process, and moves the process to a special symbol storage check process (see FIG. 66).

[Special symbol change time management processing]
Next, the special symbol variation time management process for the first special symbol performed in S1043 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol variation time management process described below is related to the first special symbol, but the special symbol variation time management process related to the second special symbol is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “01H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol variation time management process (S1111). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “01H” (S1111: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol variation time management process and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1111 that the control state flag is “01H” (S1111: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S1112). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the variation time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  When it is determined in the processing of S1112 that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the variation time set in the first timer has not been digested (S1112: NO), the main CPU 60 changes the special symbol variation. The time management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the variation time set in the first timer has been consumed (S1112: YES), the main CPU 60 determines the value indicating the special symbol display time management. “02H” is set in the control state flag (S1113).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a forced stop and forced change process of the second special symbol (S1114). That is, in this embodiment, when determining the special symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in the first special symbol during the variation of the second special symbol, within the pursuit time (the variation time of the second special symbol) )), The winning corresponding to the first special symbol is given priority since the winning lottery is won in the first special symbol. Therefore, even when the derived symbol corresponding to the special game state (big hit game state) is fluctuating due to the scheduled stoppage, the second special symbol is forcibly changed to the lost special symbol and stopped. The special game state (big hit game state) of the special symbol is canceled. In addition, when the second special symbol is changing with the derived symbol corresponding to the loss scheduled to be stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the forcible stop and forced change processing for the first special symbol are similarly performed in the special symbol variation time management processing for the second special symbol. As a result, even if the first special symbol is changing as the scheduled game to be stopped for the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), it is forced to change to the special symbol for losing and stopped. There is a case where the special game state (big hit game state) of one special symbol is canceled.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the second special symbol non-change flag (S1115). That is, the second special symbol non-variable flag is set when the special game state based on the first special symbol (big hit game state) is entered, and the special game state based on the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is a flag for preventing the second special symbol game from being played. Thus, the main CPU 60 maintains the first special symbol stop display state while in the special gaming state corresponding to the first special symbol, while not performing the variable display of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, although not particularly illustrated, similarly, in the special symbol variation time management process for the second special symbol, a process for setting the first special symbol non-change flag is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a symbol stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1116). The symbol stop command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. When the sub control circuit 7 receives the symbol stop command, it recognizes that the special symbol is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a fluctuation start waiting time (for example, 10 msec) in the first timer (S1117). The variation start waiting time is a waiting time from the end of the variation display of the special symbol to the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Next, the first special symbol display time management process performed in S1044 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol display time management process described below relates to the first special symbol, but the special symbol display time management process related to the second special symbol is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “02H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (S1121). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “02H” (S1121: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1121 that the control state flag is “02H” (S1121: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S1122). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the variation start waiting time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  When it is determined in the process of S1122 that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the variation start waiting time set in the first timer is not consumed (S1122: NO), the main CPU 60 It is determined whether or not one special game is a big hit (S1123). When it is determined that the first special game is not a big hit (S1123: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  In the processing of S1123, when it is determined that the first special game is a big hit (S1123: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the gaming state flag (S1124). In the big hit gaming state, the normal figure probability and the special figure probability are set to a low state. Therefore, the first probability variation game state flag, the second probability variation game state flag, and the short time game state flag are turned off. A jackpot game state flag may be provided to turn on the jackpot game state flag. When the process of S1124 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1122 that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the variation start waiting time set in the first timer has been consumed (S1122: YES), the main CPU 60 determines that the first special It is determined whether or not the game is a big hit (S1125). When it is determined that the first special game is not a big hit (S1125: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S1126).

  In the processing of S1126, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S1126: NO), the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the time reduction counter (S1127). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S1128).

  In the process of S1128, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S1128: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the time reduction number flag (S1129). Then, the main CPU 60 sets a time counter end command in the main RAM 62 (S1130). The time reduction counter end command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub-control circuit 7 that has received the time-counter end command recognizes the shift to the normal gaming state.

  When it is determined in the process of S1125 that the special game is a big hit (S1125: YES), the main CPU 60 sets “03H”, which is a value indicating the hit start interval management process, in the control state flag (S1131).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a hit start interval time (for example, 300 msec) corresponding to the first special symbol in the first timer (S1132). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “FFH” in the main RAM 62 as the value of the special winning opening opening number counter (S1133).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1134). The special symbol effect stop command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. Receiving the special symbol effect stop command, the sub control circuit 7 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets a jackpot start command corresponding to the first special symbol in the main RAM 62 (S1135). The jackpot start command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. Receiving the jackpot start command, the sub-control circuit 7 recognizes the start of the jackpot game. When the process of S1135 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and moves the process to a first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined that the value of the time counter is “0” in the process of S1126 (S1126: YES), and when the value of the time counter is not “0” (NO) in the process of S128, the process of S1130 After the process, the main CPU 60 sets “07H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol game end process, in the control state flag (S1136).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1137). When the process of S1137 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Period start interval management processing]
Next, the hit start interval management process performed in S1045 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “03H” which is a value indicating the hit start interval management process (S1151). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “03H” (S1151: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management process and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1151 that the control state flag is “03H” (S1151: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S1152). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit start interval time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the processing of S1152, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the hit start interval time is not consumed (S1152: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management processing. Then, the process is moved to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1152 that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the hit start interval time has been consumed (S1152: YES), the main CPU 60 determines the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the prize winning opening Is set in the main RAM 62 (S1153).

  The upper limit value in the processing of S1153 is the data related to the number of times of winning a prize opening set in the main RAM 62 in the processing of S1095 of the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 67). That is, in the processing of S1153, the main CPU 60 sets “4”, “8”, or “15” as the special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value. Note that the value of the winning prize opening number counter is synonymous with the number of rounds.

  According to this embodiment, after the symbol stop display (S1116 in FIG. 68), the winning prize opening number counter upper limit value is set (S1153 in FIG. 70). As another example, the setting of the upper limit value for the number of winning a prize opening may be performed in the next process when the lottery result is a big win in the special symbol determination process (S1068 in FIG. 66).

  Next, the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 62 (S1154). As described above, in the process of S1133 of the special symbol display time management process (see FIG. 69), “FFH (ie, −1)” is set as the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. Therefore, when the process of S1153 is performed, the value of the special winning opening opening number counter becomes “0”. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is managed by associating “0” as the value of the winning prize opening number counter with the first round (first round) of the big hit.

  If “0” is set to the value of the winning prize opening number counter from the beginning, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is the final round (N−1) after the first round opening process. Then, when the final number of rounds is not N-1, an interval process between rounds is performed, and 1 is added to the special winning opening opening number counter to perform the opening process for the second and subsequent rounds. Such processing is repeated until the final round number becomes N-1. That is, it is necessary to perform only the first round of opening processing.

  On the other hand, when “FFH (ie, −1)” is set as the value of the big winning opening opening number counter, “FFH (ie, −1) is set as the value of the big winning opening number counter until the hit start interval management process. ) ”Is set. Therefore, the initial value (FFH) is not involved in managing the actual number of rounds. As a result, regardless of the type of jackpot, the release processing from the first round to the Nth round can be consolidated into one processing, and the use area of the main ROM 61 can be reduced.

  After the processing of S1154, the main CPU 60 sets the opening / closing pattern of the first and second big prize winning openings 16A and 16B for each round according to the type of the big hit symbol (S1155). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets the display command data during the big prize opening opening in the main RAM 62 (S1156). The large winning opening opening display command data set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a large winning opening opening display command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the value “04H” indicating the waiting time management before reopening of the big winning opening in the control state flag (S1157). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 clears the big prize opening winning counter of the main RAM 62 (S1158). Then, the main CPU 60 sets the special winning opening opening time (for example, 300000 msec) in the first timer (S1159).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special winning opening operating signal (S1160). The big prize opening operating signal is data indicating that the first big prize opening 16A or the second big prize opening 16B is being opened. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 62 based on the data read from the main ROM 61 in order to open the special winning opening. The variables updated in this way are driven by the port output process (S1034 in FIG. 63) to drive the solenoids related to the big prize opening (the first big prize opening solenoid 171 and the second big prize opening solenoid 172). To the open state. When the process of S1160 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management process and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Waiting time management process before reopening of big prize opening]
Next, the waiting time management process before reopening a big winning opening performed in S1046 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening described below relates to the first special symbol, but the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening relating to the second special symbol is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “05H”, which is a value indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening (S1171). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “05H” (S1171: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening, and the process is a first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). Move to.

  When it is determined in the process of S1171 that the control state flag is “05H” (S1171: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S1172). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the interval time between rounds set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1172, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the interval time between rounds has not been consumed (S1172: NO), the main CPU 60 waits before the big prize opening reopening The management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1172 that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the interval time between rounds has been consumed (S1172: YES), the main CPU 60 determines the number of times that the main RAM 62 has been opened. 1 is added to the value of the counter (S1173).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the display command data during opening of the special winning opening in the main RAM 62 (S1174). In this case, the display command data during opening of the special winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The special winning opening opening display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special winning opening open display command. This special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 71 to add 1 to the round counter.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, which is a value indicating the big prize opening opening process, in the control state flag (S1175). Then, the main CPU 60 clears the big prize opening winning counter of the main RAM 62 (S1176).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special winning opening opening time (for example, 300000 msec) in the first timer (S1177). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets a monitoring target prize opening operating signal (a first prize winning port operating signal or a second prize winning port operating signal) in the main RAM 62 (S1178). In the present embodiment, the grand prize opening for opening in the odd round is the first big prize opening 16A, and the big winning opening for opening in the even number round is the second big prize opening 16B. When the process of S1178 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Large winning opening process]
Next, the special winning opening opening process performed in S1047 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, although the big winning opening releasing process described below relates to the first special symbol, the big winning opening releasing process related to the second special symbol is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “04H”, which is a value indicating the big prize opening process (S1191). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “04H” (S1191: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening release process and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1191 that the control state flag is “04H” (S1191: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the big prize counter is “10” or more (S1192). When it is determined that the big prize counter is not “10” or more (S1192: NO), the main CPU 60 performs a big prize opening / closing process according to the open / close pattern for each set round (S1193).

  In the process of S1193, the main CPU 60 opens and closes the first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B according to the open / close pattern for each round set in S1155 of the hit start interval management process (see FIG. 70). Specifically, according to the open / close pattern for each round, the process of waiting for the interval time between rounds and alternately closing and opening the first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B is repeated. The operation of the first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S1194). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the special winning opening opening time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1194, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the big prize opening time has not been consumed (S1194: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the big prize opening process. Then, the process proceeds to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0” in the process of S1194, that is, it is determined that the big prize opening time has been consumed (S1194: YES), or the big prize counter is “10” or more in the process of S1192. (S1192: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the first timer (S1195). Then, the main CPU 60 sets the big prize opening closing data (S1196).

  In the process of S1196, the main CPU 60 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 62 based on the data read from the main ROM 61 in order to close the open big prize opening. The variables updated in this manner are driven by the port output processing (S1034 in FIG. 63) to drive the solenoids (first big prize port solenoid 171 and second big prize port solenoid 172) related to the open big prize port. , Close the open big prize opening.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper winning opening limit number (S1197). When it is determined that the value of the big winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or larger than the upper winning opening number upper limit (S1197: NO), the main CPU 60 sets the interval time between rounds (for example, 50 msec) in the first timer ( S1198).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets the remaining monitoring time (for example, 1000 msec) for the closed big prize opening in the second timer (S1199). The value of the second timer set in this process is subtracted in a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) described later.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets “05H”, which is a value indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening, in the control state flag (S1200).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets the inter-round display command data in the main RAM 62 (S1201). The inter-round display command data set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 7 as an inter-round display command. When the process of S1201 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening opening process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When the main CPU 60 determines in the process of S1197 that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper winning opening limit upper limit (S1197: YES), the main CPU 60 monitors the remaining monitoring time for the closed special winning opening (for example, 1000 msec). ) Is set in the second timer (S1202). When the value of the big prize opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit of the big opening number, the final round of the big hit game (4 rounds, 8 rounds, or 15 rounds). Therefore, in the process of S1202, the closed big winning opening is the second big winning opening 16B.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a hit end interval time (for example, 800 msec) in the first timer (S1203). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “06H”, which is a value indicating the hit end interval process, in the control state flag (S1204).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets the interval end display command data per special symbol in the main RAM 62 (S1205). The special symbol interval end display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol interval end display command. When the process of S1205 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special prize opening process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Hit end interval processing]
Next, the hit end interval process performed in S1048 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The hit end interval process described below relates to the first special symbol, but the hit end interval process related to the second special symbol is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “06H” which is a value indicating the hit end interval process (S1211). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “06H” (S1211: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval process and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the processing of S1211 that the control state flag is “06H” (S1211: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S1212). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit end interval time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1212, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the hit end interval time is not consumed (S1212: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval process, The process moves to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, in the process of S1212, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the hit end interval time has been consumed (S1212: YES), the main CPU 60 sets a value indicating the special symbol game end process. “07H” is set in the control state flag (S1213).

  After the processing of S1213, the main CPU 60 sets control data corresponding to the winning symbol and the gaming state at the time of winning in the main RAM 62 (S1214). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the first probability variation game state flag or the second probability variation game state flag as control data. At this time, the main CPU 60 sets any one of “20”, “30”, and “50” in the time reduction counter.

  Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot of 15R, the main CPU 60 sets the first probability variable gaming state flag as control data. In addition, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot of 8R or 4R and the game state at the time of winning is one of the first probability variable game state, the second probability variable game state, or the short-time game state, the main CPU 60 The probability variation game state flag is set as control data. When the first probability variation gaming state flag is set as control data, the gaming state is shifted from the big hit gaming state to the first probability variation gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot of 8R or 4R and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the second probability variable gaming state flag as control data. When the second probability variable gaming state flag is set as control data, the gaming state is shifted from the big hit gaming state to the second probability varying gaming state.

  After the process of S1214, the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, the first special symbol game end process performed in S1049 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the special symbol game end process described below relates to the first special symbol, but the special symbol game end process related to the second special symbol is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “07H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (S1221). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “07H” (S1221: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol game end process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1221 that the control state flag is “07H” (S1221: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol non-change flag (see S1115 in FIG. 68) is set. It is determined (S1222). When it is determined that the second special symbol non-change flag is not set (S1222: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of S1224 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol non-change flag is set (S1222: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the second special symbol non-change flag (S1223). Transition to processing.

  In the process of S1224, the main CPU 60 sets “00H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol storage check process, in the control state flag (S1224). After the process of S214, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol game end process, and moves the process to the second special symbol control process (see FIG. 65).

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 60 may interrupt the main process being executed and execute the system timer interrupt process.

  First, the main CPU 60 saves the register (S1231). Next, the main CPU 60 performs timer update processing (S1232). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates various timers such as a first timer and a second timer.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets clear data in the watchdog output data (S1233). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 60 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 63 of the main control circuit 6.

  The initial reset circuit 63 releases the capacitor voltage based on the received control signal. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) elapses, the initial reset circuit 63 transmits a system reset signal to the main CPU 60. When the main CPU 60 receives a system reset signal from the initial reset circuit 63, the main CPU 60 enters a system reset state. The predetermined time is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 63 after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 63 is cleared.

  After the process of S1233, the main CPU 60 performs a random number update process (S1234). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates random numbers such as a big hit determination counter, a symbol determination counter, a hit determination counter, a variation pattern determination counter, and an effect pattern determination counter. Note that the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a fixed timing every 2 msec in order to ensure fairness.

  After the processing of S1234, the main CPU 60 performs switch input processing (S1235). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input to the switch sensor. The main CPU 60 receives detection signals transmitted from various switch sensors such as the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, and the general winning opening entrance ball sensor 181 and the various switch sensors detect the game ball. In this case, it is determined that there is an input to the switch sensor.

  After the process of S1235, the main CPU 60 restores the register (S1236). In this process, the main CPU 60 restores the register to the address before the interrupt process. After the process of S1236, the main CPU 60 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Timer update processing]
Next, the timer update process performed in S1232 of the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer (S1241). The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of executions (startup) of system timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of execution (startup) of the system timer interrupt process reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the first timer (S1242). In this process, when any value is set in the first timer, the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value. Subsequently, the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the second timer (S1243). In this process, when any value is set in the second timer, the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the second timer is “0” (S1244). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the remaining monitoring time has been consumed. In the process of S1244, when it is determined that the value of the second timer is not “0”, that is, the remaining monitoring time is not consumed (S1244: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the timer update process and performs the process. The system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) is started.

  In the processing of S1244, when the value of the second timer is “0”, that is, when it is determined that the residual monitoring time has been consumed (S1244: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the residual sphere monitoring processing, and the monitoring target The signal for operating the special prize opening is turned off (S1245). Here, the second timer may be “0” anywhere from 00H to 07H. Therefore, it is not necessary to make a determination in each process from 00H to 07H by performing batch processing in the timer interrupt process, and the control burden can be reduced. After the process of S1245, the main CPU 60 ends the timer update process and moves the process to a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75).

[Switch input processing]
Next, the switch input process performed in S1235 of the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 performs prize ball-related switch check processing (S1251). In this processing, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input from the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, the general winning opening entrance ball sensor 181, the first starting entrance entrance sensor 141, and the second starting entrance entrance sensor 142. Is determined. In other words, whether or not the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, the general winning opening entrance ball sensor 181, the first starting entrance entrance sensor 141, and the second starting entrance entrance sensor 142 have detected a game ball. Is determined.

  When the main CPU 60 determines that there is an input from the first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162, the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the value of the big prize winning counter. In addition, when it is determined that there is an input from the general winning opening entrance ball sensor 181, 1 is added to the value of the general winning opening counter. Further, when it is determined that there is an input from the first start port entrance sensor 141 or the second start port entrance sensor 142, 1 is added to the value of the first start port counter or the second start port counter.

  After the process of S1251, the main CPU 60 performs a special symbol related switch check process (S1252). This special symbol related switch check process will be described later. Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs normal symbol related switch check processing (S1253).

  In the processing of S1253, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing ball sensor 151, in other words, whether or not the passing ball sensor 151 detects a game ball. When it is determined that there is an input from the passing ball sensor 151 in this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the reserved number is an upper limit (for example, four). End the check process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the number of holdings is not the upper limit, the main CPU 60 extracts a hit determination random number value from the normal symbol game hit determination counter, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination counter. To do. Then, the extracted winning determination random number value and the winning symbol determination random value are stored in the normal symbol storage area of the main RAM 62.

  After the process of S1253, the main CPU 60 performs an abnormality-related switch check process (S1254). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  An example of the abnormality-related switch is a glass door opening / closing switch. When the main CPU 60 detects that the glass door is opened by the glass door opening / closing switch, the main CPU 60 determines that the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  As another example of the abnormality-related switch, a first count sensor 161 and a second count sensor 162 can be cited. The main CPU 60 determines that the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state when there is an input from the first count sensor 161 when the first grand prize opening operating signal is OFF. If the second count sensor 162 is input when the second big prize opening operating signal is OFF, it is determined that the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  When determining that the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state, the main CPU 60 performs a process for notifying the abnormality. On the other hand, when determining that the input result of the abnormality-related switch does not indicate an abnormal state, the main CPU 60 ends the abnormality-related switch check process.

  After the process of S1254, the main CPU 60 ends the switch input process and moves the process to a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75).

[Special design related switch check processing]
Next, the special symbol related switch check process performed in S1252 of the switch input process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not a special symbol start winning for the first start port 14A is detected (S1261). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input from the first start-in entrance ball sensor 141.

  When it is determined in the process of S1261 that a special symbol start winning at the first start opening 44 has been detected, that is, it has been input from the first start opening ball sensor 141 (S1261: YES), the main CPU 60 It is determined whether the starting memory of one special symbol is 4 or more (S1262). When it is determined that the start memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more (S1262: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check process and shifts the process to the switch input process (see FIG. 77).

  When it is determined in the process of S1262 that the start memory of the first special symbol is not 4 or more (S1262: NO), the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the start memory of the first special symbol (S1263). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs various random value acquisition processes (S1264).

  In the processing of S1264, the main CPU 60 extracts the jackpot determination random number value, the winning symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the main side effect selection random number value, and the hold effect selection random number value from the respective counters. Then, the extracted various random value groups are stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 62.

  The first special symbol start storage area of the present embodiment has first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4). The determination result based on the jackpot determining random number value and the winning symbol determining random value stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 22. In addition, various random value groups extracted by detecting a special symbol start winning during the variation of the special symbol by the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 are the first special symbol start storage area (1). To (4) in order.

  After the processing of S1264, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol variation state data in the main RAM 62 (S1265). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a winning effect determination process (S1266). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether to perform a holding effect (prefetching effect) based on a random number lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a start opening prize command in the main RAM 62 (S1267). The start opening winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub-control circuit 7 that has received the start opening winning command recognizes that there has been a starting opening winning and whether or not the big hit lottery result is correct. The process here is to predict whether or not it is a big hit based on the acquired random number, and by this process, it is possible to determine in advance the start of the actual change for the game ball that has won the start. ing. Note that the big hit determination is executed in the process of S1067 described above.

  The start opening winning command includes data indicating the contents of the winning effect (for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed for the effect) when it is determined to perform the winning effect in the processing of S1266. . As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect (holding effect)” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up storage information before the change is executed becomes possible.

  After the process of S1267, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check process and shifts the process to the switch input process (see FIG. 77).

  When it is determined in the processing of S1261 that the special symbol start winning to the first start port 14A has not been detected, that is, the first start port entrance sensor 141 has not been input (S1261: NO), the main CPU 60 It is determined whether or not a special symbol start winning for the second start port 14B is detected (S1268). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input from the second start-up entrance sensor 142.

  In the process of S1268, when it is determined that the special symbol start winning to the second start opening 14B is not detected, that is, there is no input of the second start opening ball sensor 142 (S1268: NO), the main CPU 60 It is determined whether or not the start memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more (S1269). When it is determined that the start memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more (S1269: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check processing and shifts the processing to switch input processing (see FIG. 77).

  When it is determined in the process of S1269 that the start memory of the second special symbol is not 4 or more (S1269: NO), the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the start memory of the second special symbol (S1270). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs various random value acquisition processes (S1271).

  In the process of S1271, the main CPU 60 extracts the jackpot determination random number value, the winning symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the main side effect selection random number value, and the hold effect selection random number value from the respective counters. Then, the extracted various random value groups are stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 62.

  The second special symbol start storage area of the present embodiment is provided from the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4). The determination result based on the jackpot determining random number value and the winning symbol determining random number value stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 23. In addition, various random value groups extracted by detecting a special symbol start winning to the second start port 14B during the change of the special symbol by the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 are the second special value group. The symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored.

  After the processing of S1271, the main CPU 60 sets the second special symbol variation state data in the main RAM 62 (S1272). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a winning effect determination process (S1273). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether to perform a holding effect (prefetching effect) based on a random number lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a start opening prize command in the main RAM 62 (S1274). The start opening winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub-control circuit 7 that has received the start opening winning command recognizes that there has been a starting opening winning and whether or not the big hit lottery result is correct.

  The start opening winning command includes data indicating the contents of the winning effect when the decision to perform the winning effect is made in the processing of S1273 (for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed for the effect). . As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect (holding effect)” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up storage information before the change is executed becomes possible.

  After the process of S1274, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check process and shifts the process to the switch input process (see FIG. 77).

<Operation of the big prize opening>
Next, the operation of the first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a time chart relating to the operation of the first grand prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B.

  When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed by the first special symbol display device 22 or the first special symbol display device 23, as shown in FIG. Becomes open. The winning start interval time and the opening time of the first big prize opening 16A (big prize opening time) are managed by the first timer.

  When the first big prize opening 16A is in the open state, the first big prize opening operating signal is set (turned on). The first big prize opening operating signal is data indicating that the first big prize opening 16A is open, and the number of game balls counted by the first count sensor 161 is ON. It becomes effective when

  Thereafter, when the first grand prize opening 16A is closed, the second big prize opening 16B is opened after the interval time (50 msec) between rounds has elapsed. The interval time between rounds is managed by the first timer.

  Further, even when the first big prize opening 16A is closed, the first big prize opening operating signal is kept on until the remaining ball monitoring time (1000 msec) elapses. This is to enable counting of the game balls by the first count sensor 161 until a predetermined time elapses after the first grand prize winning opening 16A is closed. Thereby, the game balls that are not counted when the first grand prize opening 16A is in the closed state can be counted after the first big prize opening 16A is in the closed state. It is possible to accurately count the game balls won in. The residual sphere monitoring time is managed by the second timer.

  In this embodiment, the interval time between rounds is managed by the first timer, and the remaining sphere monitoring time is managed by the second timer. Therefore, even if the remaining ball monitoring time has not elapsed, the second grand prize winning opening 16B can be opened if the interval time between rounds has elapsed.

  Accordingly, the time until the second grand prize opening 16B is opened after the first big prize opening 16A is closed, and the first big prize opening 16A after the second big prize opening 16B is closed. It is possible to shorten the time until the is opened. That is, the time during which the first big prize opening 16A and the second big prize opening 16B are in the closed state can be set to the interval time between rounds (50 msec).

  The interval time between rounds is an open state in which, even when the game ball immediately above the first big prize opening 16A moves due to free fall when the first big prize opening 16A is in a closed state, it is opened next. It is desirable that the time be positioned above the second big prize opening 16B.

  If the next big hit game is started before the last round of the big hit game is finished and the residual ball monitoring time related to the second big prize opening 16B has elapsed, 16A will be in an open state. As a result, the first big prize opening operating signal is turned ON, and the big hit game is continued. Therefore, the remaining ball monitoring time is such that the next big hit game is started (the first big winning opening 16A is opened) after the big hit game is finished (the second big winning opening 16B is closed). It is desirable to make it shorter than the shortest time until

  By the way, there are cases where ten game balls are counted by the second count sensor 162 of the second big winning opening 16B before the remaining ball monitoring time related to the first big winning opening 16A of the first round elapses. In this case, since the interval time between the rounds is managed by the first timer, the second timer has the second second round before the remaining ball monitoring time related to the first big winning opening 16A of the first round elapses. It becomes necessary to manage the remaining ball monitoring time related to the special winning opening 16B. Therefore, there is a possibility that the output time of the first grand prize opening operating signal related to the first big prize opening 16A of the first round will be shortened, and all the game balls won in the first big prize opening 16A of the first round may not be counted. There is.

  In order to alleviate such a phenomenon, for example, three timers are provided, and a timer (for example, a second timer) for managing the remaining ball monitoring time related to the first big prize opening 16A and a second big prize opening 16B are related. A timer (for example, a third timer) for managing the remaining sphere monitoring time may be provided separately. As a result, even if the other big prize opening is opened and closed before the remaining ball monitoring time related to one big prize opening elapses, the interval time between rounds managed by the first timer elapses and one A signal for operating a special prize opening relating to one special prize opening can be output until immediately before the special prize opening is opened. As a result, it is possible to extend the time for counting the game balls won in one of the big winning openings by the interval time between rounds.

  At this time, the interval time between rounds is managed by the first timer, the residual monitoring time related to the first big prize opening 16A is managed by the second timer, and the residual monitoring time related to the second big prize opening 16B is managed by the third timer. Managed. The special winning opening operating signal is output when both the first big winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are operating.

  In a normal gaming machine, an error is detected when a game ball is detected by a count sensor of a target big winning opening when the big winning opening operating signal is not output. However, in order to avoid such an error, it is desirable not to detect the error for a predetermined time (for example, 3000 msec) after the end of the output of the special winning opening operating signal.

  The phenomenon as described above is not a phenomenon that occurs frequently. For example, a launching device in a normal pachinko gaming machine including this embodiment has a performance of firing about 100 gaming balls per minute, and the time required to launch one gaming ball is It is about 600 msec. In a state where the player keeps firing the game ball, normally about 5 game balls are positioned on the game area while falling due to their own weight. Even if all of the five game balls are awarded to the open big winning opening, it takes about 3000 msec to fire the remaining five game balls that can be won. Therefore, when the residual ball monitoring time is set to 1000 msec, it is considered that the other big prize opening is not opened and closed very much before the residual ball monitoring time concerning one big prize opening elapses.

  Next, another embodiment (hereinafter referred to as a first embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit symbol determination table]
FIG. 80 shows a jackpot determination table and a jackpot symbol determination table in the first embodiment. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), the big hit determination table includes a first start port entrance sensor indicating that a game ball has won one of the first start port 14A and the second start port 14B. 141 and the second start-entry ball sensor 142 are used as a trigger to refer to the jackpot lottery with a special symbol based on the jackpot determination random number. The jackpot determination random numbers used for the special symbol lottery are 300 from 0 to 299. As shown in FIG. 80A, in the normal gaming state, when the big hit determination random number “0” is extracted, the determination result by the big hit lottery becomes the big hit. On the other hand, when the big hit determination random numbers “1” to “299” are extracted, the determination result by the big hit lottery is lost. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the probability variation gaming state, when the big hit determination random numbers “0” to “9” are extracted, the determination result by the big hit lottery becomes the big hit. On the other hand, when the big hit determination random numbers “10” to “299” are extracted, the determination result by the big hit lottery is lost. That is, in the present embodiment, the big win lottery mechanism that results in different winning probabilities for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 is not adopted, and any of the special symbols 221 and 231 is not used. Even for this, the big win lottery is performed with the same winning probability.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (c) and (d), the jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number according to the determination result of the jackpot lottery, and the first jackpot symbol determination random number based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random number. This is referred to when the stop symbols of the special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are determined. The jackpot symbol determination random numbers used for determining the stop symbol are 6 from 0 to 5. As shown in FIG. 80 (c), the stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 is as follows by referring to the jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol). When the determination result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the big hit symbol determination random number “0” is extracted, the determination result of the big hit type is 15R probability variable big hit and the stop symbol becomes “A”, and the big hit symbol determination random number “1” Is extracted, the stop result is “B” when the jackpot type determination result is 8R probability variation big hit, and when the big hit symbol determination random number “2” is extracted, the determination result of the jackpot type is stop symbol with 4R probability variation big hit. Becomes “C”, and the jackpot symbol determination random numbers “3” to “5” are extracted, the determination result of the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot and the stop symbols are “D”, “E”, “F”, respectively. Become. When the determination result of the big hit lottery is lost, regardless of which of the big hit symbol determination random numbers “0” to “5” is extracted, the determination result of the big hit type is lost and the stop symbol becomes “G”. As shown in FIG. 80 (d), the stop symbols of the second special symbol 231 are as follows by referring to the jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol). When the big hit lottery determination result is a big hit, when the big hit symbol determination random numbers “0” and “1” are extracted, the determination result of the big hit type is 15R probability variable big hit and the stop symbols are “H” and “I”, respectively. When the jackpot symbol determining random number “2” is extracted, the determination result of the jackpot type is 4R probability variable big hit, the stop symbol is “J”, and the jackpot symbol determining random numbers “3” to “5” are extracted. The determination result of the big hit type is 4R normal big hit, and the stop symbols are “K”, “L”, and “M”, respectively. When the determination result of the big hit lottery is lost, any of the big hit symbol determination random numbers “0” to “5” is extracted, the determination result of the big hit type is lost and the stop symbol is “N”.

  In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions (number of time reduction games) is continued until the next big hit in probability variation big hit, and is usually 50 times in big hit. Other examples of the present embodiment are not limited to those described above, and may be as follows. For example, the big hit types are not limited to the four types of 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 4R normal big hit, and various other round number big hits may be provided. Moreover, you may make it open a grand prize opening in multiple times during 1 round. The opening time of the big prize opening does not always have to be a uniform time, and may be changed for each round or depending on the type of jackpot. In the description of the present embodiment, there is no particular mention of a small hit, but a small hit occurs when a predetermined big hit determination random number is extracted by providing a small hit that does not change the gaming state before and after the occurrence of the big winning opening. You may make it do. The jackpot determination table may be a plurality of different tables that can be applied separately according to the winning start opening as in the above-described embodiment. The jackpot symbol determination table may be a common table corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of time reductions may be a predetermined number of times set in advance even for a probable big hit. At that time, the number of time reductions may be set to 50 for a certain probability variation big hit, and it may be continued until the next big hit for other probability variation big hits. In addition, a plurality of types of normal big hits with different numbers of rounds may be provided, and the number of time reductions may be different for normal big hits with different numbers of rounds, or the number of time reductions may be different for normal big hits with the same number of rounds. In the following description, the normal game state A and the normal game state B are both non-probability change non-short game states (the game state does not belong to the short-time game state), and are referred to when determining a variation pattern or the like. The description will be made on the assumption that only the difference in the table is different.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
FIG. 81 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state A in the first embodiment. 81A shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221. FIG. 81B shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows the table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the special symbol variation pattern determination table uses the first special symbol 221 based on the variation time determination random number when the determination result of the jackpot type is obtained. These are referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command for the second special symbol 231. The random number for changing time used for the lottery of the changing condition is 100 from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the normal gaming state A, with regard to the first special symbol 221, in the case of a big hit lottery with a 15R probability variable big hit, when the random time for variable time determination “0” to “79” is extracted, When the variation pattern 1, the variation time 60 s, the variation pattern designation command “h0” are determined and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 2, the variation time 100 s, the variation pattern designation command “ h1 "is determined. In the case of the big hit lottery, if the random number for variation time determination “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 3, the variation time 60 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h2” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variable big hit, when the random time for variation time determination “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 4, the variation time 60 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h3” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big hit, when the random time for determining the variation time “0” to “19” is extracted, the variation pattern 5, the variation time 60 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h4” are determined. When the random numbers “20” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 6, the fluctuation time 100 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h5” are determined. In the case of losing in the big hit lottery, when the random numbers for variation time determination “0” to “93” are extracted, the variation pattern 7, the variation time 20 s, the variation pattern designation command “h6” are determined, and the variation time determination random number “ When “94” to “98” are extracted, the variation pattern 8, the variation time 60 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h7” are determined. When the variation time determination random number “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 9 and the variation At time 100 s, the fluctuation pattern designation command “h8” is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the normal gaming state A, with regard to the second special symbol 231, in the case of a big hit lottery with a 15R probability variable big hit, when the variable time determining random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted, When the variation pattern 10, the variation time 4s, the variation pattern designation command “h9” are determined, and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 11, the variation time 6s, the variation pattern designation command “ h10 "is determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R probability variable big hits, when the random numbers for variation time determination “0” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 12, the variation time 6s, and the variation pattern designation command “h11” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big wins, when the random time for determining the variation time “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 13, the variation time 6s, and the variation pattern designation command “h12” are determined. In the case of losing in the big hit lottery, when the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 14, the variation time 6s, and the variation pattern designation command “h13” are determined. Thus, in the normal gaming state A, the variation time of the second special symbol 231 is 6 s at the longest, and is generally shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol 221.

  FIG. 82 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the short-time gaming state in the first embodiment. 82A shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221. FIG. 82B shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows the table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 82A and 82B also use the first special symbol 221 and the second symbol based on the random number for determining the variation time in response to the determination result of the jackpot type. The special symbol 231 is referred to when various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command are determined. The random number for changing time used for the lottery of the changing condition is 100 from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the short-time gaming state, with regard to the first special symbol 221, in the case of 15R probability variable big hit in the big hit lottery, the fluctuation time determining random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. The pattern 15, the fluctuation time 5s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h14” are determined. In the case of the big hit lottery, when the random variation for determining the 8R variation is extracted, the variation pattern 16, the variation time 5s, and the variation pattern designation command “h15” are determined when the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R probability variable big win, when the random time for variation time determination “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 17, the variation time 5 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h16” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 18, the fluctuation time 5s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h17” are determined. In the case of losing the big hit lottery, when the random time for determining the variation time “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 19, the variation time 1s, and the variation pattern designation command “h18” are determined.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the short-time gaming state, with regard to the second special symbol 231, in the case of 15R probability variable big hit in the big hit lottery, the fluctuation time determining random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. The pattern 20, the fluctuation time 1s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h19” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variable big hit, when the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 21, the variation time 1s, and the variation pattern designation command “h20” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big wins, when the random time for determining the variation time “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 22, the variation time 1s, and the variation pattern designation command “h21” are determined. In the case of losing in the big hit lottery, when the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 23, the variation time 1s, and the variation pattern designation command “h22” are determined. As described above, the variation time of the special symbol in the short-time gaming state is generally shorter than the variation time of the special symbol in the other gaming states (the normal gaming state A and the normal gaming state B described later).

  FIG. 83 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B in the first embodiment. FIG. 83A shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 83B shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows the table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 83A and 83B also use the first special symbol 221 and the second symbol based on the variation time determination random numbers when the determination result of the jackpot type is obtained. The special symbol 231 is referred to when various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command are determined. The random number for changing time used for the lottery of the changing condition is 100 from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), in the normal gaming state B, with regard to the first special symbol 221, in the case of a big hit lottery with a 15R probability variable big hit, when the variable time determining random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted, When the variation pattern 24, the variation time 30s, the variation pattern designation command “h23” are determined, and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 25, the variation time 50s, the variation pattern designation command “ h24 "is determined. In the case of the big hit lottery, when the 8R probability change big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 26, the fluctuation time 30 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h25” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variable big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 27, the fluctuation time 30 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h26” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big hit, when the random time for changing time determination “0” to “19” is extracted, the changing pattern 28, the changing time 30 s, and the changing pattern designation command “h27” are determined and used for determining the changing time. When the random numbers “20” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 29, the fluctuation time 50 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h28” are determined. In the case of losing in the big hit lottery, when the random numbers for variation time determination “0” to “93” are extracted, the variation pattern 30, the variation time 10 s, the variation pattern designation command “h29” are determined, and the variation time determination random number “ When “94” to “98” are extracted, the variation pattern 31, the variation time 30s, and the variation pattern designation command “h30” are determined. When the variation time determination random number “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 32, the variation At time 50 s, the fluctuation pattern designation command “h31” is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the normal gaming state B, with regard to the second special symbol 231, in the case of 15R probability variable big hit in the big hit lottery, when the variable time determining random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted, When the variation pattern 33, the variation time 2s, and the variation pattern designation command “h32” are determined and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 34, the variation time 3s, the variation pattern designation command “ h33 "is determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variable big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 35, the fluctuation time 3 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h34” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big wins, when the random time for determining the variation time “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 36, the variation time 3 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h35” are determined. In the case of losing the big hit lottery, when the random time for determining the variation time “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 37, the variation time 3 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h36” are determined. As described above, the variation time of the special symbol in the normal gaming state B is generally a half time shorter than the variation time of the special symbol in the normal gaming state A.

  The data indicating the variation pattern related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 and the variation pattern designation command determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Remembered. Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern when the variation time of the first special symbol 221 is 100 s in the normal gaming state A, or a variation pattern when the variation time of the first special symbol 221 is 50 s in the normal gaming state B. However, this is a variation pattern in which a shutter accessory 40 to be described later may appear. Note that the shutter accessory 40 is not limited to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time 100 s, and may appear in other fluctuation patterns.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol lottery is not won in the normal gaming state A and the normal gaming state B, and the special symbol is changed 15 times as an example after the short-time gaming state is ended. Until this time, the player stays in the normal gaming state B. In the normal gaming state A, it is extremely difficult to win a game ball with respect to the second start port 14B, so there is almost no possibility that the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is used. Therefore, in the normal gaming state A, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table need not be provided. If the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is not provided, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table may be used. The normal gaming state B may be continued less times or more times than 15 times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of big hit rounds is different between the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231, but the same round is used for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The number may be determined.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination tables of FIGS. 81 to 83 are configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the jackpot type by the special symbol corresponding to each gaming state, but only the special symbol The variation pattern may be determined separately, or the variation pattern may be determined only for the gaming state. Further, only one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing the special symbol or the gaming state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation gaming state may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table is referred to regardless of the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. Not limited to this, different special symbol variation pattern determination tables may be referred to according to the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table for which a shorter variation time is easily determined as the number of start memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the number of start memories related to the second special symbol 231, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 is determined. The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated in accordance with the determination result of a specific jackpot type in the special symbol variation pattern determination table. However, as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the jackpot type One variation pattern may be associated with each determination result.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 in the short-time gaming state is based on the variation time determined in the other gaming states (the normal gaming state A and the normal gaming state B). Also tends to be shorter.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state A and a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B are provided, both of which are selected in the non-probability variation gaming state. The special symbol variation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state B is selected when the special effect mode is staying, and the special symbol for the normal gaming state A is selected for other normal gaming states. It is a fluctuation pattern determination table. The special effect mode is a game mode on the effect of staying between the end of the short-time game state and the execution of the special symbol change count 15 times. Note that the period during which the special symbol variation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state B is used is not limited to 15 times after the end of the short-time gaming state, and may be more or less than this, The game state may be used in a game state different from the normal game state B.

[Decoration pattern determination table]
FIG. 84 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state A in the first embodiment. 84 (a) shows a first decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first decorative design 31, and FIG. 84 (b) shows a second decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the second decorative design 32. Shows the table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b) is triggered by the fact that the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 has been received, based on the random number for determination of the first decoration symbol 31. Further, it is referred to when determining the effect conditions such as the effect content (hereinafter also referred to as “effect pattern”) for the second decorative design 32 and the effect data corresponding thereto. The random number for effect determination used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 pieces of 0-99. In the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, the time (variation time) during which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed is also defined. This variation time is also a time during which other effects linked to the variation display of the decorative symbol are executed. The variation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the variation pattern designation command. That is, the variation times of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 coincide with the variation times of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The same applies to the variation times of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the short time gaming state and the normal gaming state B, which will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (a), when “h0” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31 in the normal gaming state A, the variation time is set to 60 s, and the effect determination random number “0” is set. When “99” is extracted, the jackpot variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h1” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 2 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot variation effect 1 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 3 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h2” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, Corresponding effect data 4 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h3” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 4 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h4” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 5 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h5” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 6 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 8 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h6” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 20 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 9 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h7” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h8” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach lose variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 12 is stored in the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach-losing variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 13 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), when “h9” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32 in the normal gaming state A, the variation time is 4 s, and the effect determination random number “0” is set. When “99” is extracted, the big hit variation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h10” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 6 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, Corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h11” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 6 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 9 is determined as the effect content, Corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h12” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 6 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 10 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h13” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 6 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “90” are extracted, the loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determining random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the reach lose variation effect 3 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 19 is also displayed. Set in the work RAM 73.

  As described above, the variation time of the decorative symbol in the normal gaming state A is also 6s at the longest, and is generally shorter than the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the present embodiment, the contents of effects when the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 is 100 s at the longest in the normal gaming state A, that is, the specific jackpot variation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss variation effect 1 are defined as the specific effect patterns. Has been. When the effect data 3, 8, and 13 corresponding to such a specific effect pattern are set, a movable effect by the shutter accessory 40 described later is executed. It should be noted that the movable effect by the shutter accessory may be executed even when the effect corresponding to the other effect data is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, different production data is associated with each production content. However, all of the production data may be the same production data, or some production data may have different production contents. . Although the variation time of the decorative symbol basically matches the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time may be different from each other. In addition, the variation time of the decorative symbols basically matches the execution time of the effect by the shutter accessory or the like, but may be different times.

  FIG. 85 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the short time gaming state in the first embodiment. 85 (a) shows a first decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first decorative design 31, and FIG. 85 (b) shows a second decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the second decorative design 32. Shows the table. Data regarding these tables is also stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 85A and 85B is also triggered by the fact that the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 has been received, based on the effect determination random number. And it is referred when determining the production condition such as the production content and the production data corresponding to the production content about the second decorative symbol 32. The random number for effect determination used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 pieces of 0-99.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when “h14” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31 in the short-time gaming state, the variation time is set to 5 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to When “99” is extracted, the big hit variation effect 11 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 20 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h15” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 5 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 12 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h16” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 5 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 13 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 22 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h17” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 5 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 14 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h18” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 24 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (b), when “h19” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32 in the short-time gaming state, the variation time is set to 1 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to When “99” is extracted, the big hit variation effect 15 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 25 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h20” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 16 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 26 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h21” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 17 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 27 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h22” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 28 is set in the work RAM 73.

  The variation time of the decorative symbol in such a short-time gaming state is also generally shorter than the variation time of the decorative symbol in the other gaming states (the above-described normal gaming state A and normal gaming state B). In addition, in the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table in the short-time gaming state, the effect contents corresponding to the specific effect pattern are not defined. That is, in the short-time gaming state, the effect data 3, 8, 13 and the like corresponding to the specific effect pattern are not set, and the movable effect by the shutter accessory 40 described later is not executed. Even in the short-time gaming state, a movable effect by the shutter accessory may be executed. In that case, it is desirable to change the shutter role up to a position where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not covered.

  FIG. 86 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B in the first embodiment. 86 (a) shows a first decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first decorative design 31, and FIG. 86 (b) shows a second decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the second decorative design 32. Shows the table. Data regarding these tables is also stored in the program ROM 72.

  86 (a) and 86 (b), the decorative design effect pattern determination table is also triggered by the fact that the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 has been received, based on the effect determination random number. And it is referred when determining the production condition such as the production content and the production data corresponding to the production content about the second decorative symbol 32. The random number for effect determination used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 pieces of 0-99.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when “h23” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decoration symbol 31 in the normal gaming state B, the variation time is set to 30 s, and the effect determination random number “0” is set. When “99” is extracted, the big hit variation effect 18 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 29 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h24” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 19 is determined as the effect content. When the corresponding effect data 30 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot variation effect 3 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 31 is also displayed. Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h25” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 20 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 32 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h26” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 21 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 33 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h27” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 22 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 34 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h28” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 23 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 35 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the specific big hit variation effect 4 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 36 is also obtained. Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h29” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 37 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h30” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 7 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 38 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h31” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 39 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach lose variation effect 5 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 40 is stored in the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach-losing variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 41 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (b), when “h32” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32 in the normal gaming state B, the variation time is set to 2 s, and the effect determination random number “0”. When “99” is extracted, the big hit variation effect 24 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 42 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h33” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 3 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 25 is determined as the effect content, Corresponding effect data 43 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h34” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 3 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 26 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 44 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h35” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 3 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 27 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 45 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h36” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 3 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “90” are extracted, the loss variation effect 8 is determined as the effect content. When the corresponding effect data 46 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 6 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 47 is also displayed. Set in the work RAM 73.

  As described above, the variation time of the decorative symbol in the normal gaming state B is also 3 s at the longest, and is generally shorter than the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the present embodiment, the contents of effects when the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 is 50 s at the maximum in the normal gaming state B, that is, the specific jackpot variation effects 3, 4 and the specific reach loss variation effect 2 are defined as the specific effect patterns. Has been. When the effect data 31, 36, 41 corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is set, a movable effect by the shutter accessory 40 described later is executed. In the present embodiment, since the movable effect by the shutter accessory 40 is performed 20 seconds after the first decorative symbol 31 starts to change, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed. Even when the change starts, the shutter accessory 40 does not cover the second decorative pattern 32, which will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect mode is a game mode that shifts after the end of the short-time game state, but at the time of transition to the special effect mode, the start-up memory related to the second special symbol 231 has an upper limit value (maximum hold). There is a possibility that the display of the variation of the second decorative symbol 32 may be started in a state where the number of the four decorative symbols 32 is stored, and depending on the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the shutter function The object 40 will cover the second decorative pattern 32. That is, in order to prevent the shutter accessory 40 from covering the second decorative symbol 32, the number of times the second decorative symbol 32 varies from the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol 31 until the shutter accessory 40 starts to vary. The longest fluctuation time corresponding to the batch is required, but the longest fluctuation time corresponding to five fluctuations of the second decorative pattern 32 is defined to be 15 seconds (3 seconds × 5). The variation time is about 20 seconds including the interval time from the stop of the variation display of the symbol to the start of the variation display. That is, since the longest variation time corresponding to the number of variations of the second decorative symbol 32 is set to be shorter than the time from the start of variation of the first decorative symbol 31 until the shutter accessory 40 begins to vary. The shutter accessory 40 is changed at a timing at which the second decorative design 32 is not covered.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter accessory 40 is operated based on the effect pattern of the first decorative design 31, but the shutter accessory is operated based on the effect pattern of the second decorative design 31. It may be. At this time, it is preferable that the shutter accessory appears at a time when the first decorative symbol is not covered by the shutter accessory. Further, when the shutter accessory appears based on the effect pattern of the first decorative design, it may appear at a time when the shutter accessory covers the second decorative design. In this case, it is preferable that the display result of the second decorative symbol covered with the shutter accessory is a loss mode. The reason is that if the player cannot confirm the display result of the jackpot with the decorative design, the player will not know the type of jackpot to be executed, but such a case will not occur in the case of a loss.

[Operation of decorative pattern and shutter function]
FIG. 87 shows basic operations of the decorative symbol and the shutter accessory in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing variable display or stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing stop display is provided. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start memory display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as “first start memories”) related to the first special symbol 221 in a mark or indicator format. There is provided a second start memory display area 3D for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as “second start memory”) related to the area 3C and the second special symbol 231 in a mark or indicator format. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start memory display area 3C is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and on the left side, and the second start memory display area 3D is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and arranged on the right side. Is done. On the front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a shutter accessory 40 as a movable member is provided so as to move up and down. When the movable effect is not performed, the shutter accessory 40 is stored in a position above the front side of the display screen (hereinafter referred to as an initial position). On the other hand, when the movable effect is performed, the shutter accessory 40 gradually descends to a position that covers substantially the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (hereinafter referred to as a variation limit position). Thereafter, the shutter accessory 40 returns to the initial position by ascending. The shutter accessory 40 moves from the initial position to the variation limit position over a required time of about 0.5 seconds (about 1 second in a reciprocating motion), operates from the initial position, and returns to the initial position again. It takes about 5 seconds to return, but the time is not limited to these, and it may be shorter or longer.

  As shown as an example in FIG. 87, in the state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B, When only one first start memory and two second start memories are displayed in 3C and the second start memory display area 3D, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are the first start memory and the second start memory 32, respectively. Based on the start memory, the variable display is started simultaneously. A part of the first decorative symbol 31 is in a variable display and is in a reach mode, and the second decorative symbol 32 is in a variable display.

  At this time, if the specific effect pattern is determined, the variation starts so that the shutter accessory 40 stored on the upper front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is lowered. As a result, first, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is gradually covered with the shutter accessory 40. When the shutter accessory 40 is lowered to the variation limit position, not only the first decorative symbol 31 but also the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is completely covered. In such a state, when the variation display of the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped, it is difficult for the player to know how the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, measures are taken so that the player is not hindered by such variation of the shutter accessory 40.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuating operation of the shutter accessory 40 is controlled by an actual mode as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89. 88 and 89 show the operation of the shutter accessory 40 in the normal gaming state B (special effect mode).

  As shown in FIG. 88 as an example, first, the first start with the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. When only one first start memory is displayed in the memory display area 3C and four second start memories are displayed in the second start memory display area 3D, which is the maximum number of holdings, the first decorative symbol 31 and The second decorative symbol 32 starts to be displayed in a variable manner simultaneously based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start memory display area 3C and the second start memory display area 3D, the numbers of the first start memory and the second start memory subtracted by one when the decorative symbol variation display is started are displayed. It will be. Further, at this time, it is assumed that the specific effect pattern that becomes the specific big hit variation effects 3, 4 or the specific reach loss variation effect 2 in the normal gaming state B is determined.

  Further, it is assumed that a part of the first decorative symbol 31 is in a variable display and is in a reach mode, and a part of the second decorative symbol 32 is also in a variable display and in a reach mode. Thereafter, the first decorative symbol 31 continues to display the variation while continuing the reach mode, and during that time, the second decorative symbol 32 generally has a short variation time. Thus, although the second start memory is increased by one, it is stopped and displayed in a lost manner (not shown). After that, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped as many times as the number of the second start memory based on the second start memory remaining after being stopped and displayed in a lost manner. The display is stopped in a manner. Then, as shown in the fourth row from the top on the right side of FIG. 88, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner based on the last remaining second start-up memory, and reaches a reach mode.

  Then, the second decorative symbol 32 on which the variable display is performed based on the last remaining second start memory is finally stopped and displayed in a lost mode. At this time, since the number of second start memories is 0, the second decorative symbol 32 has a change time (3 seconds × 5) corresponding to five second start memories as the longest change time from the start of the first change. After continuously displaying the fluctuation for about 17 seconds including the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds × 4), the display is stopped. Since the number of second start memories is 0, the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased together with the second decorative symbol 32 after a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined time elapsed from the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 to the erasure of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is about 2 seconds. In other words, in the present embodiment, in the special effect mode, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a state where the second start memory has a maximum number of holdings of four, the variable display is first displayed. The display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 is erased after about 19 seconds from the start.

  The second decorative symbol display area is not erased for a predetermined period even when the number of the second start memory becomes 0, or is continuously displayed without being erased regardless of the presence or absence of the second start memory. You may make it make it. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display area is deleted, the first decorative symbol display area is enlarged and displayed up to the section where the second decorative symbol display area has been displayed, and the first decorative symbol is also enlarged and displayed. It may be. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display area is not erased even if the first start memory is lost. However, when the first start memory is lost, the first decorative symbol display area is erased. You may make it do. In addition, when the number of one of the first start memory and the second start memory is 0 and the other number is 1 or more, the display area with the number of start memories is expanded to the other display area. You may make it display.

  After the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased in this way, the shutter accessory 40 is moved so as to descend to the variation limit position, and covers the section where the second decorative symbol display area 3B was displayed. It becomes.

  Further thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89, the shutter accessory 40 is moved so as to return to the upper part of the display screen, which is an initial position that the player cannot visually recognize. Thereby, the state where the first decorative design 31 is covered with the shutter accessory 40 is gradually eliminated. When the shutter accessory 40 returns to the top of the display screen as the initial position, the first decorative symbol display area 3A presents a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is in a variable display while continuing the reach mode. Is done. That is, the player can visually recognize the state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is being displayed in a variable manner. In the present embodiment, the shutter accessory 40 is returned to a position where the player cannot completely see, but the shutter accessory may be returned to a position where the player can partially see. In such a case, it is preferable that the shutter accessory returns to a position where it does not overlap with the decorative symbol display area.

  Then, finally, the first decorative pattern 31 is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, for example. At this time, since the shutter accessory 40 has returned to the upper part of the display screen at the initial position, the player can surely check the display result of the first decorative symbol 31. As described above, in the normal gaming state B, the timing at which the shutter accessory 40 starts to appear after the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol 31 by the specific effect pattern is after the longest variation time according to the second decorative symbol 32 has elapsed. Yes, since the display in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased, the second decorative symbol 32 that is stopped and displayed each time based on the second start-up memory is not covered by the shutter accessory 40. . That is, the player is sure about not only the stop mode of the first decorative symbol 31 that is the display result of the first special symbol 221 but also the stop mode of the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the display result of the second special symbol 231. Can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol 32 is not covered at all by the shutter accessory 40, but at least when the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the shutter accessory is displayed as the second decorative symbol. The area may not be covered. Even in this way, the player can confirm the stop mode of the second decorative symbol as the display result corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Further, in this embodiment, the shutter accessory 40 is started to appear after the fluctuation time corresponding to five of the second start memory has elapsed. For example, the change time of six or more times of the second start memory is used. You may make it start appearance of a shutter accessory after progress. The shutter accessory only needs to have a shape that covers the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and may be a decorative member such as the movable members 4A and 4B according to the above-described embodiment. In addition, operation means such as an operation button that can be pressed by the player and a jog dial that can be rotated are provided, and when such an operation means is operated, a movable effect by the shutter accessory is not executed, or You may enable it to forcibly return the shutter role in a movable effect to an initial position. In the present embodiment, the effect display accompanying the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined content of the effect (effect data). That is, based on the effect data related to the first decorative symbol 31, effect display is performed in the area around the first decorative symbol 31, and based on the effect data related to the second decorative symbol 32, the second decorative symbol is displayed. The effect display is performed in the area around 32. In addition, as the effect display accompanying the variation display of the decorative symbol, a corresponding effect display may be performed on the entire display screen based on the effect data related to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. .

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the main CPU 60 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the description of the same or similar steps as those according to the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

  The main CPU 60 performs main processing, first special symbol control processing, second special symbol control processing, special symbol memory check processing, special symbol determination processing, special symbol variation time management processing, special symbol display time management according to the above-described embodiment. Processing, winning start interval management processing, winning prize opening release waiting time management processing, winning prize opening release processing, winning end interval processing, special symbol game end processing, system timer interrupt processing, timer update processing, switch input processing, special symbol The same steps as the related switch check process (see FIGS. 62 to 78) are executed. In the present embodiment, among the processes described above, in particular, the special symbol related switch check process (see FIG. 90), the special symbol memory check process (see FIG. 91), the special symbol variation time management process (see FIG. 93), the special symbol Since the display time management process (see FIG. 94) and the hit end interval process (see FIG. 95) are partially different from or added to those according to the above-described embodiment, these points will be described below. To do.

  The command set by the main CPU 60 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). Commands are sent from the oldest to the newest. The sub CPU 71 reads commands stored in the work RAM 73 in order from the oldest when the command is received, and executes processing according to the read command.

[Special design related switch check processing]
As shown in FIG. 90, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2001 to S2014 that are substantially the same as steps S1261 to S1274 shown in FIG. 78 as the special symbol related switch check process.

  Here, the main CPU 60 specifically performs the following processing as various random number extraction processing in steps S2004 and S2011. That is, every time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) is executed, the main CPU 60 updates the value of the random time counter for determining the variation time in addition to the random number counter for determining the big hit and the random number counter for determining the big hit. In the various random number extraction processes of step S2004 and step S2011, the main CPU 60 determines the big hit determination random number from the big hit determination random number counter, the big hit symbol determination random number from the big hit symbol determination random number counter, and the variation time determination random number. A random number for determining the variation time is extracted from the counter. The extracted various random numbers are stored in the start storage area of the main RAM 62.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
As shown in FIG. 91, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2021 to S2032, which are substantially the same as steps S1061 to S1072 shown in FIG. 66, as the special symbol storage check process. FIG. 91 shows the special symbol storage check process for the first special symbol 221, but the special symbol storage check process for the second special symbol 231 is the same.

  Here, the main CPU 60 refers to the jackpot determination table corresponding to the gaming state (see FIGS. 80A and 80B) as the jackpot determination process in step S2027, and determines the jackpot based on the extracted jackpot determination random number. It is determined whether or not.

  Further, the main CPU 60 refers to the jackpot symbol determination table corresponding to the gaming state (see FIG. 80C) as the special symbol determination processing in step S2028, and derives the special symbol derived based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random number. To decide.

  In step S2029, the main CPU 60 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2041 to S2046 of the special symbol variation pattern determination process. FIG. 92 shows the special symbol variation pattern determination process for the first special symbol 221, but the special symbol variation pattern determination process for the second special symbol 231 is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is set (S2041). The time-short flag is set when shifting to the time-short game state, and is cleared when the time-short game state ends.

  If it is determined in S2041 that the hour / hour flag is set (S2041: YES), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (time / short game state) (see FIG. 82 (a)). The variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the determination result of the big hit type and the extracted random number for determining the variation time (S2042). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 proceeds to a process of step S2046 described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2041 that the time reduction flag is not set (S2041: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2043). The special effect counter counts 15 times, which is the number of games in the normal gaming state B related to the special effect mode, and is set to 15 times at the end of the short time.

  In step S2043, if the value of the special effect counter is not 0 (S2043: NO), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (normal gaming state B) (see FIG. 83 (a)). The variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the determination result of the big hit type and the extracted random number for determining the variation time (S2044). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 proceeds to a process of step S2046 described later.

  In step S2043, when the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2043: YES), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (normal gaming state A) (see FIG. 81 (a)). The variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the determination result of the big hit type and the extracted random number for determining the variation time (S2045).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets data indicating the determined variation pattern and a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (S2046), and ends the special symbol variation pattern determination processing.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2051 to S2060 in which different processes are added in addition to the processes substantially the same as steps S1111 to S1117 shown in FIG. 68 as the special symbol variation time management process. FIG. 93 shows the special symbol variation time management process related to the first special symbol 221, but the special symbol variation time management process related to the second special symbol 231 is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 93, after setting the value “02H” indicating the special symbol display time management in the control state flag (S2053), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery with the first special symbol 221 is a big hit. Is discriminated (S2054). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol 221 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. In the case of a big hit (S2054: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a forced stop and forced change process of the second special symbol 231 (S2055), and proceeds to the next step S2056. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in step S2054 (S2054: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2059 described later. In the present embodiment, the forced stop and forced change processing of the second special symbol 231 is executed only during the variable display of the second special symbol 231 and is not executed during the stop display of the second special symbol 231.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the forced stop / forced change process of the second special symbol 231 has been executed (S2056), and if the forced stop / forced change process has been executed (S2056: YES), A second special symbol forced stop command is set (S2057). In S2056, when the forced stop / forced change process is not executed (S2056: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to a process of step S2059 described later. The second special symbol forced stop command is a command indicating that the second special symbol 231 is actually forcibly stopped, and is also a command for forcibly stopping the corresponding second decorative symbol 32. In the special symbol variation time management process related to the second special symbol 231 (not shown), a first special symbol forced stop command for forcibly stopping the first decorative symbol 31 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting a second special symbol non-change flag (S2058), and then sets a first special symbol stop command (S2059). The first special symbol stop command is a command indicating that the first special symbol 221 has been stopped. By transmitting the first special symbol stop command to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7, the sub CPU 71 recognizes that the first special symbol 221 is stopped. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 executes the process of step S2060 and ends the special symbol variation time management process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
As shown in FIG. 94, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2071 to S2091 in which different processes are added in addition to the processes substantially the same as steps S1121 to S1137 shown in FIG. 69 as the special symbol display time management process. FIG. 94 shows the special symbol display time management process for the first special symbol 221, but the special symbol display time management process for the second special symbol 231 is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in step S2072, when the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, when the main CPU 60 determines that the variation start waiting time set in the first timer has been consumed (S2072: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol 221 is a jackpot (S2073). If the value of the first timer is not “0” in step S2072 (S2072: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  If it is not a big hit in step S2073 (S2073: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2078 described later. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (S2073: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the gaming state flag (S2074), clears the time reduction counter (S2075), and clears the special effect counter (S2076). In the present embodiment, the gaming state flag includes a time reduction flag. In the present embodiment, the time-count counter is for counting the number of games in the time-saving gaming state, and is set to only 50 times as an example at the time-short gaming state transition. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 proceeds to a process of step S2088 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2078), and determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S2078: NO), The value of the number counter is decremented by 1 (S2079). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 determines again whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2080). When it is determined in step S2078 that the value of the hourly / counter counter is “0” (S2078: YES), or in step S2080, when it is determined that the value of the hourly / counter counter is not “0” (S2080: NO) The main CPU 60 moves to the process of step S2084 described later.

  When it is determined in step S2080 that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2080: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the gaming state flag including the time reduction flag (S2081), and sets a time reduction end command (S2081). S2082). The time saving end command is a command indicating the end of the time saving gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a predetermined value in the special effect counter (S2083). In the present embodiment, “15” is set as the predetermined value in the special effect counter, but the predetermined value may be a value less than or greater than 15. In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 83) corresponding to the normal gaming state B is referred to by the main CPU 60 unless the value of the special effect counter becomes zero.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2084). If the value of the special effect counter is not 0 (S2084: NO), the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the special effect counter (S2085), and again determines whether or not the value of the special effect counter is 0 ( S2086). If the value of the special effect counter is 0 in step S2084 (S2084: YES), or if the value of the special effect counter is not 0 in step S2086 (S2086: NO), the main CPU 60 performs the process in step S2091 described later. Move on.

  In step S2086, if the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2086: YES), the main CPU 60 sets a special effect end command (S2087), and proceeds to the process of step S2091 described later. The special effect end command is a command for causing the sub CPU 71 to end the special effect mode.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets “03H”, which is a value indicating the hit start interval management process, in the control state flag (S2088).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a waiting time (for example, 300 msec) as a jackpot start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol 31 in the first timer (S2089).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a jackpot start command corresponding to the first special symbol 31 (S2090). When the process of S2090 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and moves the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  Further, following the process of step S2087, the main CPU 60 sets “07H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol game end process, in the control state flag (S2091), and ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In the present embodiment, by executing such a special symbol display time management process, “15” is set as the predetermined value of the special effect counter after the end of the short-time gaming state, and after the end of the big hit gaming state, the first In a period in which the number of changes in the special symbol 31 and the second special symbol 32 is 51 to 65, the special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 83) corresponding to the normal gaming state B is referred to. A special symbol corresponding to the normal gaming state B is provided only during a period when the value of the counter is 51 to 65, provided that a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided after the normal big hit. The variation pattern determination table may be referred to. In addition, the value set in the special performance counter may be different depending on the big hit symbol when the big hit occurs, and it is set in the special performance output counter depending on the gaming state and the big hit symbol when the big hit occurs. The values may be different. Further, in the normal gaming state B, when the big hit is won, the normal gaming state B may be continued until the next big hit ends after the big hit.

[Hit end interval processing]
As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2101 to S2105 in which different processes are added in addition to substantially the same processes as steps S1211 to S1214 shown in FIG. 73 as the hit end interval process.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “06H” which is a value indicating the hit end interval process (S2101). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “06H” (S2101: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval process and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in step S2101 that the control state flag is “06H” (S2102: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S2102). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit end interval time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In step S2102, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the hit end interval time has not been consumed (S2102: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval process, To the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2102 that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the hit end interval time has been consumed (S2102: YES), the main CPU 60 sets a value indicating the special symbol game end process. “07H” is set in the control state flag (S2103).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the jackpot symbol (s2014). In the present embodiment, as the gaming state flag, a probability change flag and a time reduction flag are set at the end of the probability change big hit, a time reduction flag is set at the end of the normal big hit, and “50” is set as the value of the time reduction counter. .

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a gaming state command (S2105) and ends the hit end interval process. As the gaming state command, a command indicating the start of the probability variation gaming state or a command indicating the start of the short-time gaming state is set according to the gaming state flag. In this embodiment, when changing to the short game state at the time of probability change, the probability change game state command and the short time game state command are set, and when changing to the short game state at the time of non-probability change, the short time game state command is set.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the description of the same or similar steps as those according to the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 to 104, the sub CPU 71 performs a sub control circuit main process, a command reception interrupt process, a timer interrupt process, a decoration symbol stop process, a second display area deletion process, a command analysis process, and an effect pattern determination process. The decorative symbol forced stop process and the shutter accessory movement control process are executed. The command analysis process and the shutter accessory movement control process are executed as subroutines of the sub control circuit main process. The decoration symbol stopping process and the second display area erasing process are executed as a subroutine of a timer interrupt process. The effect pattern determination process and the decorative symbol forced stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
As shown in FIG. 96, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing in response to power-on (S3001). Specifically, as an initialization process, the sub CPU 71 reads a startup program from the program ROM 72 and clears various flags stored in the work RAM 73.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs random number update processing (S3002). Specifically, as the random number update process, the sub CPU 71 updates values of an effect determination random number counter, a stop symbol determination random number counter, a decoration symbol determination random number counter, and the like, which will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a command analysis process shown in FIG. 101 to be described later (S3003). In the command analysis process, various commands received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) are analyzed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing (S3004). Specifically, as the display control process, the sub CPU 71 controls display of images such as the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs sound control processing (S3005). Specifically, as the sound control process, the sub CPU 71 performs output control of sound such as notification sound, sound effect, music, and speech based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a lamp control process (S3006). Specifically, as lamp control processing, the sub CPU 71 controls lighting / extinguishing of various lamps based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a shutter accessory movement control process shown in FIG. 104 described later (S3007). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 returns to the process of step S2002. In the shutter accessory movement control process, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is controlled.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 97, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a register when a command is input from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) (S3011). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the program being executed stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer (S3012). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 stores the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. The stored command is analyzed by command analysis processing shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register (S3013). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S3011 to each register. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the command reception interrupt process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 98, the sub CPU 71 executes a timer interrupt process at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). First, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving each register (S3021). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the program being executed stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs timer update processing (S3022). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 stores various timers stored in the work RAM 73, such as a shutter accessory standby timer, a shutter accessory movable timer described later, a first decorative symbol variation time timer, a second decorative symbol variation time timer, a second Update (subtract) the value set in the decorative symbol stop time timer or the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a decoration symbol stop process shown in FIG. 99 described later (S3023), and then executes a second display area erasing process shown in FIG. 100 described later (S3024). In the decorative symbol stopping process, the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, and in the second display area deleting process, the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is deleted.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs an operation button input process (S3025). In the operation button input process, it is detected whether or not various operation buttons are operated by the sub CPU 71.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register (S3026). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S3021 to each register. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the timer interrupt process.

[Decoration stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 99, as the first step of the decorative symbol stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3031). The first decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed, and is set in step S3084 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S3031, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S3031: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S3035 described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3031: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3032). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the first decorative symbol variation timer, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the rendering data is set in step S3085 of the rendering pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S3032, when the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S3032: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S3035 described later. On the other hand, when the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3032: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol stop data (S3033), and sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to OFF (S3034). ). The first decorative symbol stop data is data for ending other effects executed in accordance with the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 in addition to the process of stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31. Set. By the processing based on such first decorative symbol stop data, the first decorative symbol 31 being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3035). The second decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed, and is set in step S3092 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S3035, when the second decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S3035: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3035: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3036). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32. In the second decorative symbol variation timer, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the rendering data is set in step S3093 of the rendering pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S3036, when the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S3036: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, when the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3036: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop data (S3037) and sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to OFF (S3038). ). The second decorative symbol stop data is data for ending other effects performed in accordance with the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 in addition to the process of stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32. Set. By such processing based on the second decorative symbol stop data, the second decorative symbol 32 being variably displayed is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol 32 that is stopped and displayed (the stopped symbol of the second decorative symbol 32) is a big hit mode (S3039). When the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is in the big hit mode (S3039: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process. On the other hand, when the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is not in the big hit mode (S3039: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag on (S3040). The second decorative symbol stop flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed.

  If the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is in the big hit mode, the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 send a big hit start command transmitted from the main CPU 60 at the start of the big hit gaming state to the sub CPU 71. Is deleted based on the jackpot start command. The first decorative symbol display area 3A and the first decorative symbol 31 are not erased even if the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed, but are erased based on the jackpot start command from the main CPU 60. .

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value in the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S3041), and ends the decorative symbol stop process. The second decorative symbol stop time timer is a subtraction timer for timing the time for which the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 2 s is set as the predetermined value in the second decorative symbol stop time timer. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the timer update process is executed every 2 ms as described above, “1000” is set as a predetermined value in the second decorative symbol stop time timer.

[Second display area erasing process]
As shown in FIG. 100, as the first step of the second display area erasing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (S3051). When the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S3051: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the second display area erasing process. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (S3051: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is 0 (S3052).

  In S3052, when the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is not 0 (S3052: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the second display area erasing process. On the other hand, if the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is 0 (S3052: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a process of deleting the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B (S3053). In this step S3053, the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is also deleted together with the second decorative symbol display area 3B.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display area is displayed unless the next variable decorative symbol 32 starts to be displayed until 2 seconds elapses after the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped. The 3B display is erased. Note that the display of the second decorative symbol display area may not be erased. Further, an effect mode in which the display of the second decorative symbol display area is not erased may be provided, and such an effect mode may be generated according to the gaming state. For example, when the time reduction flag is on, the second decorative symbol stop flag is not turned on and the second decorative symbol stop time timer is not set when the second decorative symbol is stopped. The display of the 2 decorative symbol display area and the second decorative symbol may not be erased. In this case, when the time reduction flag is turned off, the second decorative symbol stop flag may be set on, and the second decorative symbol stop time timer may be set. Then, the second decorative symbol stop flag is set to OFF by newly displaying the second decorative symbol fluctuating, and the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is not cleared without further clearing the second decorative symbol stop time timer. When it becomes 0, the display of the second decorative symbol display area and the second decorative symbol may be erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to OFF (S3054), and ends the second display area erasing process.

[Command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 101, as the first step of command analysis processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a command received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) (S3061). If there is no received command (S3061: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing. On the other hand, if there is a received command (S3061: YES), the sub CPU 71 reads command data stored in the reception buffer (S3062).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S3063). When the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S3063: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S3065 described later. When the variation pattern designation command is received (S3063: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 102 described later (S3064). When the effect pattern determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command (special symbol designation command) has been received based on the read command data (S3065). When the symbol designation command has not been received (S3065: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3067 described later. When the symbol designation command is received (S3065: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a stop symbol determination process (S3066). In the stop symbol determination process, the mode of the stop symbol as the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 to be stopped and displayed is determined based on a special symbol designation command indicating a lost symbol or a jackpot symbol. When the stop symbol determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special symbol forced stop command (first special symbol forced stop command or second special symbol forced stop command) has been received based on the read command data (S3067). When the special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S3067: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S3069 described later. When the special symbol forced stop command is received (S3067: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol forced stop process shown in FIG. 103 described later (S3068). When the decorative symbol forced stop process is finished, the sub CPU 71 finishes the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a short time end command has been received based on the read command data (S3069). When the short time end command has not been received (S3069: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S3071 described later. When the short time end command has been received (S3069: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes special effect mode start processing (S3070). Specifically, in the special effect mode start process, data for displaying the background image in the special effect mode is set. In the special effect mode start process, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and then the normal game state B flag included in the game state flag is set to on. The normal game state B flag is a flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state B. When the special effect mode start process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special effect end command has been received based on the read command data (S3071). When the special effect end command has not been received (S3071: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S3073 described later. When the special effect end command is received (S3071: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special effect mode end process (S3072). Specifically, in the special effect mode end process, data for ending the background image display in the special effect mode is set. That is, in the special effect mode end process, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and then the normal game state A flag included in the game state flag is set to on, thereby corresponding to the normal mode. Data for displaying a background image is set. The normal game state A flag is a flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state A. When the special effect mode end process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received based on the read command data (S3073). When the game state command has not been received (S3073: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S3075 described later. When the gaming state command is received (S3073: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes the effect mode setting process (S3074). Specifically, in the effect mode setting process, when a short-time gaming state command is received as a gaming state command, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the short-time gaming state is set, and the probability changing gaming state command and the short-time gaming state are set. When a command is received, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the probability variation gaming state is set. In the effect mode setting process, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and then the game state flag corresponding to the effect mode is set to on. When only the short-time gaming state command is received, the short-time gaming state flag included in the gaming state flag is set to ON, and when the probability variable gaming state command and the short-time gaming state command are received, the gaming state flag is set. The included probability variation game state flag and short-time game state flag are set on. When the effect mode setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a jackpot start command has been received based on the read command data (S3075). When the big hit start command has not been received (S3075: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S3077 described later. When the jackpot start command has been received (S3075: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the gaming state flag to OFF, while setting the jackpot gaming state flag included in the gaming state flag to ON to enter the jackpot gaming state. The big hit effect start processing is executed by setting data for displaying the corresponding background image (S3076). When the big hit effect start processing is finished, the sub CPU 71 finishes the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 executes processing corresponding to the other received command (S3077). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 102, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts effect determination random numbers from the effect determination random number counter (S3081). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the random number for effect determination becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 refers to the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table corresponding to the gaming state flag, and sets the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command in the work RAM 73 ( S3082). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. For example, when the effect data related to the second decorative symbol 32 is set and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is not displayed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 displays the second decorative symbol display area. 3B and the second decorative design 32 are displayed.

  Note that the decorative symbol change display starts when a command indicating the start of symbol change is received from the main control circuit (main CPU), and stops when a command indicating the symbol stop is received. You may make it make it. Thereby, the sub CPU can control the variation display and the stop display of the decoration symbol without managing the variation time of the decoration symbol. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table is divided into the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, and also divided according to the gaming state, but may be a single table.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083). When the effect data does not correspond to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S3089 described later. In the case of effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S3084).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S3085).

  Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S3086). In the present embodiment, as the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern, effect data 3, 8, and 13 shown in FIG. 84 (a) and effect data 31, 36, and 41 shown in FIG. 86 (a) correspond. .

  In step S3086, if the data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S3086: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if the data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S3086: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory standby flag to on (S3087). The shutter accessory waiting flag is a flag indicating that when the shutter accessory 40 is operated, the shutter accessory 40 is set in a standby state before the operation is started.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value in the shutter accessory standby timer (S3088). The shutter accessory standby timer is a subtraction timer for timing the standby time until the shutter accessory 40 starts to operate. In the present embodiment, the standby time of the shutter accessory 40 is defined as 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol 31, and the shutter accessory standby timer has a value corresponding to such a standby time. However, the value is not limited to the value corresponding to the number of seconds, and other values may be set. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  If NO in step S3083, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (S3089). When the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S3089: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S3092 described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is ON (S3089: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to OFF (S3090) and clears the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S3091). . By the processing in steps S3090 and S3091, the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 is not erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S3092), sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S3093), and then effects. The pattern determination process ends.

[Decorative design forced stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 103, as the first step of the decorative symbol forced stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a forced stop command corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, that is, the first special symbol forced stop command has been received. (S3101). When the first special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S3101: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3105 described later.

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol forced stop command is received in step S3101 (S3101: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol forced stop data (S3102) and sets the first decorative symbol variation flag. It is set to off (S3103), and the first decorative symbol variation timer is cleared (S3104). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S3108 described later. The first decorative symbol forced stop data is data for forcibly stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and forcibly ending other effects performed with the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31. Are set in the work RAM 73. By such processing based on the first decorative symbol forced stop data and the like, even in the first decorative symbol 31 that is in the variable display state in a situation where the variable time remains, it is forcibly stopped and displayed in a lost manner. .

  If NO in step S3101, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol forced stop data (S3105), sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to OFF (S3106), and clears the second decorative symbol variation timer. (S3107). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S3108 described later. The second decorative symbol forced stop data is data for forcibly stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32 and forcibly ending other effects performed in accordance with the variation display of the second decorative symbol 32. Are set in the work RAM 73. By such processing based on the second decorative symbol forced stop data and the like, even in the second decorative symbol 32 that is being displayed in a variable manner in a situation where the variable time remains, it is forcibly stopped and displayed in a lost manner. .

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable flag is on (S3108). The shutter accessory movable flag is a flag indicating that the shutter accessory 40 is in an operating state without being in the initial position. If the shutter accessory movable flag is not on (S3108: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S3112 described later.

  On the other hand, if the shutter accessory movable flag is on in step S3108 (S3108: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a shutter accessory movable control process (S3109). In this shutter accessory movement control process, the shutter accessory 40 is operated so as to return to the initial position.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 clears the shutter accessory movable timer (S3110), and sets the shutter accessory movable flag to OFF (S3111). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process.

  If NO in step S3108, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter accessory standby flag is on (S3112). In the determination process based on the shutter accessory standby flag, it becomes clear whether the movable effect by the shutter accessory 40 has been determined. If the shutter accessory standby flag is not on (S3112: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process.

  On the other hand, if the shutter accessory standby flag is on in step S3112 (S3112: YES), the sub CPU 71 clears the shutter accessory standby timer (S3113) and sets the shutter accessory standby flag to off (S3114). ). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process.

[Shutter actor movement control process]
As shown in FIG. 104, as the first step of the shutter accessory movement control process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory standby flag is on (S3121). When the shutter accessory standby flag is not on (S3121: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S3125 described later.

  If the shutter accessory standby flag is on in step S3121 (S3121: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the shutter accessory standby timer is 0 (S3122). When the value of the shutter accessory standby timer is not 0 (S3122: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter accessory movement control process.

  In step S3122, when the value of the shutter accessory standby timer is 0 (S3122: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value in the shutter accessory movable timer (S3123). The shutter accessory movable timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the time during which the shutter accessory 40 is operated. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 5 s is set as a predetermined value in the shutter accessory movable timer.

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movable flag to ON (S3124), and ends the shutter accessory movable control process.

  If NO in step S3121, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable flag is on (S3125). When the shutter accessory movable flag is not on (S3125: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter accessory movable control process.

  If the shutter accessory movable flag is on in step S3125 (S3125: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the shutter accessory movable timer is 0 (S3126). When the value of the shutter accessory movable timer is not 0 (S3126: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs control according to the remaining time of the shutter accessory movable timer as the shutter accessory operation control process (S3127). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter accessory movement control process. In the present embodiment, the entire operation time from when the shutter accessory 40 is lowered from the initial position to the variation limit position and when the shutter accessory 40 is lifted and retracted to the initial position is 5 seconds as an example. It has become.

  On the other hand, if the value of the shutter accessory movable timer is 0 in step S3126 (S3126: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is in the initial position (S3128). Whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is at the initial position can be determined, for example, by providing a sensor for detecting the shutter accessory 40 near the initial position and according to a signal from the sensor.

  In step S3128, when the shutter accessory 40 is in the initial position (S3128: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S3130 described later. On the other hand, when the shutter accessory 40 is not in the initial position (S3128: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs control for returning the shutter accessory 40 to the initial position as the shutter accessory operation control process (S3129).

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movable flag to OFF (S3130), and ends the shutter accessory movable control process.

[Operation of decorative pattern and shutter function]
FIG. 105 shows a time chart relating to the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter accessory in the first embodiment. FIG. 105 shows an operation in the special effect mode (normal game state B) as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner over a variable time t1 (50 seconds). At this time, it is assumed that the second start-up memory has a maximum number of four holds, and at the same time the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 is started, the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started. Further, the number of the second start memory decreases by 1 with the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32, but when the maximum holding number reaches 4 again according to the winning at the second start port 14B. To do.

  The second decorative symbol 32 is repeatedly displayed in a variable manner and stopped from the first variation start (when the variation starts at the same time as the first decorative symbol 31) until the reserved number of the second start memory is consumed. For the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time t2 is 3 seconds, the interval time t2 ′ from the stop display to the next variable display start is 0.5 seconds, and the display is erased together with the second decorative symbol display area 3B from the last stop display. The time t2 ″ until it is set is 2 seconds.

  The shutter accessory 40 starts to move (lower) from the initial position, appears at the appearance position on the display screen, and has a movable time t3 of 5 seconds until it returns to the initial position through the maximum position. Then, the shutter accessory 40 is approximately 20 seconds longer than the time (19 seconds) from when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are started to be variably displayed until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. A series of operations are started after elapse of time.

  That is, in the special effect mode, while the series of operations of the shutter accessory 40 is completed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31, the series of operations of the shutter accessory 40 hinders the display of the second decorative symbol 32. It is started at a timing that does not occur. As a result, the second decorative pattern 32 is not likely to be covered by the shutter accessory 40 during the variable display and the stopped display.

  In the normal gaming state A in the non-special effect mode, it is difficult to win the second starting port 14B, so the second starting memory hardly reaches the maximum number of holdings (4). Also, if the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are started to be displayed simultaneously, even if there is only one second start memory, for example, in this case, the second decorative symbol 32 will change. The time t2 is 6 seconds at the maximum, and the time until the display of the second decorative pattern 32 is erased is about 14.5 seconds including the interval time t2 ′ and the time t2 ″ until the display is erased. Even when there is only one second start memory in the normal gaming state A, the shutter accessory 40 is about 20 seconds longer than the time (14.5 seconds) until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. Since a series of operations are started after the elapse of time, there is no possibility that the second decorative symbol 32 in the state of variable display and stopped display is covered by the shutter accessory 40. Further, in the short-time game state, the shutter role is not displayed. Thing 40 Since demonstration pattern to be created is not defined, there is no possibility that the second decorative symbol 32 is covered by the shutter won game 40.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 fluctuate simultaneously in any of the normal gaming state A, the normal gaming state B, and the short-time gaming state. Even when the display is started, it is possible to avoid that the shutter accessory 40 covers the second decorative pattern 32, so that the player can change the aspect of the second decorative pattern 32 that is repeatedly stopped and displayed. It can be confirmed reliably.

  Also, when the short-time gaming state ends and the normal gaming state B is entered, the special effect mode is entered, and the first decorative symbol effect pattern is displayed when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 simultaneously start the variable display. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern (specific big hit variation effects 3, 4 and specific reach loss variation effect 2 shown in FIG. 86) is determined and the second start memory reaches the maximum hold number of four. . Even in such a situation, the time is adjusted so that the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is started after the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. Can be avoided.

  Next, a second embodiment as another embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the component etc. which are the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
FIG. 106 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B in the second embodiment. FIG. 106A shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 106B shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows the table.

  In particular, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 106 (b), the variation time corresponding to each variation pattern is uniformly defined as 10 seconds, and corresponds to the variation pattern shown in FIG. 83 (b). It is generally longer than the fluctuation time.

[Decoration pattern determination table]
FIG. 107 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B in the second embodiment. FIG. 107A shows a first decorative design effect pattern determination table, and FIG. 107B shows a second decorative design effect pattern determination table.

  In particular, in the second decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b), the variation time corresponding to each effect content is uniformly defined as 10 seconds, and corresponds to the effect content shown in FIG. 86 (b). It is generally longer than the fluctuation time.

  When such a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table is referred to and any one of the effect data 3, 8, and 13 is set, a movable effect by the shutter accessory 40 is performed. Further, in the specific big hit variation effect 1, the specific big hit variation effect 2, and the specific reach loss variation effect 1 corresponding to the effect data 3, 8, and 13, about 20 seconds have elapsed after the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31. 40 moves. Therefore, when the first decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32 start changing display at the same time, the shutter accessory 40 may cover the second decorative design 32 whose change time is uniformly 10 seconds. In this embodiment, such a situation is avoided by the processing shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 described later. In the present embodiment, a mechanism is provided to prevent one of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 from being covered by the shutter accessory 40. By making one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol correspond to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol and making the normal symbol correspond to the other decorative symbol, the special symbol and the normal symbol It is good also as a mechanism which does not cover a decorative design based on the relationship with a design.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the second embodiment will be described. Note that the same or similar steps as those according to the first embodiment described above are not described unless otherwise specified. In the second embodiment, the effect pattern determination process is partially different from that according to the first embodiment.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 108, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts effect determination random numbers from the effect determination random number counter (S4001).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 refers to the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table corresponding to the gaming state flag, and sets the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command in the work RAM 73 ( S4002). At this time, the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table corresponding to the normal gaming state B shown in FIG. 107 may be referred to.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003). If it is not the effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S4009 described later. In the case of effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S4004).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S4005). At this time, when the first decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 107 (a) is referenced, any of the effect data 3, 4 and 13 is set, and a value corresponding to 50 seconds is set as the variation time. May be set.

  Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S4006). In the present embodiment, effect data 3, 8, and 13 shown in FIG. 107 (a) correspond to the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern.

  In step S4006, when the data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S4006: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if the data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S4006: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory standby flag to on (S4007).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value in the shutter accessory standby timer (S4008). Also in the present embodiment, the standby time of the shutter accessory 40 is defined as 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol 31, and the shutter accessory standby timer corresponds to such a standby time. Value is set. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  If NO in step S4003, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable flag is on (S4009). When the shutter accessory movable flag is not on (S4009: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S4011 described later. On the other hand, when the shutter accessory movable flag is on (S4009: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a movable accessory initial position control process shown in FIG. 109 described later (S4010).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (4011). When the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S4011: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S4015 described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is ON (S4011: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to OFF (S4012) and clears the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S4013). . By such processing in steps S4012, S4013, the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 is not erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S4014). Then, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data or a value indicated by the decorative symbol variation standby timer in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S4015). The decorative symbol variation standby timer is set in the movable accessory initial position control process shown in FIG. 109 described later, and the variation display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started during a series of operations of the shutter accessory 40. At this time, it is a subtraction timer for measuring the remaining time that can be displayed in a variable manner with respect to the specified fluctuation time. When the value of the decorative symbol variation standby timer is not 0, the value of the decorative symbol variation standby timer is preferentially set, and when the value of the decorative symbol variation standby timer is 0, the value corresponding to the variation time of 10 seconds. Is set in the second decorative symbol variation timer. Thereby, even when a series of operations by the shutter accessory 40 is performed, the variation display or stop display of the second decoration symbol 32 within a time period that does not exceed the variation time defined according to the second decoration symbol 32. Will be performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 clears the value of the decorative symbol variation standby timer (S4016), and then determines whether or not the shutter accessory standby flag is set on (S4017). If the shutter accessory standby flag is not set to ON (S4017: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  In step S4017, when the shutter accessory standby flag is set on (S4017: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines the value of the shutter accessory standby timer, that is, the standby time until the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is started. Then, it is determined whether or not it is shorter than the fluctuation time (10 seconds) corresponding to the effect data + predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds until the display is erased) (S4018).

  In step S4018, when the standby time of the shutter accessory 40 is not shorter than the variation time + predetermined time (S4018: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, when the standby time of the shutter accessory 40 is shorter than the fluctuation time + predetermined time (S4018: YES), the sub CPU 71 clears the value of the shutter accessory standby timer (S4019) and turns off the shutter accessory standby flag. (S4020). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. In this case, the variable display of the second decorative design 32 is started, and the shutter accessory 40 does not perform a series of operations, but the mode of the variable display of the second decorative design 32 does not change. . It should be noted that, since the shutter accessory does not operate, the aspect of the decorative symbol variation display that was originally scheduled to be executed and the aspect related to the production accompanying it may be completely different.

[Moving accessory initial position control processing]
As shown in FIG. 109, as the first step of the movable accessory initial position control process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to the set effect data in the decorative symbol variation standby timer (S4031). For example, in the special effect mode, since the variation time related to the second decoration symbol 32 is uniformly defined as 10 seconds in the decoration symbol variation standby timer, a value corresponding to this 10 seconds is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a shutter accessory operation control process (S4032). In this shutter accessory operation control process, when the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is determined, the value of the shutter accessory movable timer is not 0, that is, the shutter accessory 40 is not located at the initial position. In addition, control for forcibly returning the shutter accessory 40 to the initial position is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is in the initial position (S4033). Whether the shutter accessory 40 is in the initial position is determined by, for example, providing a sensor for detecting the shutter accessory 40 near the initial position and detecting the shutter accessory 40 according to a signal from the sensor. It can be determined repeatedly.

  In step S4033, when the shutter accessory 40 is not in the initial position (S4033: NO), the sub CPU 71 returns to the process of step S4032. On the other hand, when the shutter accessory 40 is in the initial position (S4033: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movable flag to OFF and clears the value of the shutter accessory movable timer (S4034). The object initial position control process is terminated.

[Operation of decorative pattern and shutter function]
FIG. 110 shows a time chart according to the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter accessory in the second embodiment. FIG. 110 shows an operation in the special effect mode (normal game state B) as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner over a variable time t1 (50 seconds). At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the effect data (FIG. 107 (a)) corresponding to the specific effect pattern (one of the specific big hit variation effects 3, 4 and the specific reach / losing variation effect 2 shown in FIG. 107 (a)). It is assumed that the display is variably displayed based on any one of the presentation data 3, 8, and 13 shown. In addition, it is assumed that the variation display of the second special symbol 231 is started during the variation display of the first decorative symbol 31, and the variation time T1 is 10 seconds.

  When the movement of the shutter accessory 40 is started during the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31, and when the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started as the variable display of the second special symbol 231 is started, When the shutter accessory 40 performs a series of operations for the movable time t3 (5 seconds), the shutter accessory 40 is forcibly returned to the initial position over the time t3 ′.

  Then, after the shutter accessory 40 is returned to the initial position, the second decorative symbol 32 starts to be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the actual variation time of the second decorative symbol 32 is shortened by T2 ′ from the prescribed variation time T2 (10 seconds). However, the variation display of the second decorative symbol 32 is ensured over the entire period. Done.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, even when the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started during the operation of the shutter accessory 40, the shutter accessory 40 is forced to the initial position. Since the display of the variation of the second decorative symbol 32 is started after the return to, the shutter accessory 40 can be prevented from covering the second decorative symbol 32, and the player can avoid the second decorative symbol 32. The final stop display mode can be confirmed with certainty.

  Next, a third embodiment as another embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the component etc. which are the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the third embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table and decorative symbol effect pattern determination table as those in the first embodiment are used. In the third embodiment, special symbol related switch check processing, command analysis processing, and effect pattern determination processing are partially different from those in the first embodiment.

[Special design related switch check processing]
As shown in FIG. 111, in the special symbol related switch check process, the main CPU 60 sets the first start opening prize command in the main RAM 62 after performing the process of step S5006 (S5007), and performs the special symbol related switch check process. Exit. The first start port winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The first start port winning command is a command indicating that there has been a winning at the first starting port 14A.

  Further, after performing the process of step S5013, the main CPU 60 sets the second start opening winning command in the main RAM 62 (S5014), and ends the special symbol related switch check process. The second start port winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The second start opening prize command is a command indicating that there has been a win at the second start opening 14B.

[Command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 112, in the command analysis process, after performing the process of step S6002, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a second start opening prize command has been received based on the read command data (S6003). ). When the second start opening winning command has not been received (S6003: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S6005. When the second start opening prize command is received (S6003: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect setting process shown in FIG. 113 described later (S6004). When the effect setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  If NO in step S6007, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a variation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S6009). When the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S6009: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S6011. When the variation pattern designation command is received (S6009: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 114 described later (S6010). When the effect pattern determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  In step S6019, the sub CPU 71 executes processing corresponding to the other received command. The command processed at this time includes the first start opening prize command.

[Production setting process]
As shown in FIG. 113, as the first step of the effect setting process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a second start opening winning command has been received (S6021). When the second start opening winning command has not been received (S6021: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S6026 described later. When the second start opening prize command is received (S6021: YES), the sub CPU 71 adds 1 to the number of second start memories (S6022). In this embodiment, in addition to the main RAM 62 of the main control circuit 6, the work RAM 73 of the sub control circuit 7 is provided with a start memory area, and the number of first start memories and second start memories is the work RAM 73. Is stored in the start storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of second start memories stored in the work RAM 73 is three or more (S6023). When the number of second start memories is not 3 or more (S6023: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process.

  In S6023, when the number of second startup memories is 3 or more (S6023: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is set to OFF (S6024). The shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is a flag indicating that a series of operations by the shutter accessory 40 is prohibited, and is set in the next step S6025.

  If the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is not off in S6024 (S6024: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, if the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is off (S6024: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag on (S6025), and ends the effect setting process. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is operated, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is prohibited when the number of second start memories is relatively large, for example, four or three. It has come to be. It should be noted that the number of second startup memories that is a reference when the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is set to ON is not limited to 3 and may be any other number as long as it is within the range of the maximum reserved number.

  If NO in step S6021, the sub CPU 71 subtracts 1 from the number of second start memories stored in the work RAM 73 (S6026). Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of second start memories stored in the work RAM 73 is 3 or more (S6027).

  In S6027, when the number of second start memories is 3 or more (S6027: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, when the number of second start memories is not 3 or more (S6027: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is set to ON (S6028).

  In S6028, when the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is not on (S6028: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, if the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is on (S6028: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag to off (S6029), and ends the effect setting process. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is permitted when the number of second start memories is relatively small, for example, 0 to 2. Note that the number of second start memories used as a reference when the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is set to OFF is the same number (3) as that when the flag is set to ON. If so, the numbers may be different from each other.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 114, in the effect pattern determination process, after performing the process of step S6035, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is set to ON (S6036).

  In S6036, when the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is on (S6036: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is not on (S6036: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S3037. That is, regardless of whether or not it is a specific effect pattern, if the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is on, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is prohibited. Note that a series of operations by the shutter accessory 40 is not performed, but other effects such as the change display and stop display of the decorative symbols, and the effect actions that are executed in accordance with the change are executed based on the set effect data. Is done.

  Further, after performing the process of step S6044, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect setting process shown in FIG. 113 (S6045), and ends the effect pattern determination process. In this effect setting process, when the second start opening winning command corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 has been received, the sub CPU 71 determines the number of second start memories as the second decorative symbol 32 starts to be displayed. Will be subtracted.

  As a modification of the present embodiment, when the shutter accessory movement prohibition flag is on, the shutter accessory standby flag may be set to off and the shutter accessory standby timer may be cleared. While the accessory movable flag is set to OFF, the shutter accessory movable timer may be cleared. In the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter accessory is prohibited based on the number of second start memories. However, every time the number of second start memories is added in the main control circuit, the second start memories are added. The information indicating the variation time corresponding to is transmitted from the main CPU to the sub CPU, and the sub CPU stores the information indicating the variation time in the work RAM, and the total value of the stored variation times is set as a predetermined value. For example, if the specific effect pattern is longer than the required time from the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol to the start of operation of the shutter accessory, the shutter accessory may not be operated.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, whether or not to operate the shutter accessory 40 is determined according to the number of second start memories, and if the number of second start memories is relatively large, the shutter Since the operation of the accessory 40 is prohibited, a state in which the shutter accessory 40 covers the second decorative symbol 32 can be avoided as much as possible, and the final of the second decorative symbol 32 can be avoided for the player. This makes it possible to confirm the mode of stop display.

  Next, a fourth embodiment as another embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. Note that the same or similar temporal elements and the like as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. According to the fourth embodiment, the operation pattern of the shutter accessory 40 is different from that according to the first embodiment.

[Operation of decorative pattern and shutter function]
FIG. 115 shows a time chart according to the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter accessory in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 115 shows an operation in the special effect mode (normal game state B) as an example.

  As an example, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed six times as a variable display and a stop display by adding the number of holdings of the second start memory from the start of the first variation (when the variation starts simultaneously with the first decorative symbol 31). It shall be repeated.

  The shutter accessory 40 is defined to have a movable time t3 of 5 seconds as a time for performing the entire operation. Then, it is assumed that the shutter accessory 40 comes to the operation start time after the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are started to be variably displayed until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the operation start time of the shutter accessory 40 is reached at the time of the sixth stop display of the second decorative symbol 32.

  In this case, the shutter accessory 40 is in a standby state without performing any operation until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased from the time when the operation starts. Further, the waiting time T3 during that time is stored in the work RAM 73.

  Then, when the display of the second decorative pattern 32 is erased, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is performed. At this time, the shutter accessory 40 starts to descend from the initial position, appears at the appearance position on the display screen, and returns to the initial position again after passing through the maximum position, from the specified movable time t3 to the standby time T3. Is performed during the time t3 ″ after subtracting.

  Thereafter, the shutter accessory 40 performs a series of operations again in a state in which the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is not performed and the display is erased. At this time, the shutter accessory 40 starts to descend from the initial position, appears at the appearance position on the display screen, returns to the initial position again through the maximum position, and waits time T3 stored in the work RAM 73. It will be performed in the time equivalent to.

  The shutter accessory may perform a series of operations at a specified time immediately after the display of the second decorative symbol is erased, and may not perform the series of operations in two steps. The shutter accessory may perform a series of operations in three or more times.

  According to the fourth embodiment, the state where the shutter accessory 40 covers the second decorative symbol 32 can be avoided as much as possible, and the final of the second decorative symbol 32 can be avoided for the player. The mode of the stop display can be confirmed.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, modifications of the shutter accessory and the display device will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

[Operation of liquid crystal display device and shutter function]
FIG. 116 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device and the shutter accessory. As shown in FIG. 116, in this embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is arranged with the upper position above the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and is configured to be able to operate from this initial position to a position in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. A first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. The movable member is composed of two shutter accessories 40A and 40B. One shutter accessory 40A can cover the upper half of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, that is, the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The other shutter accessory 40B can cover the area of the lower half of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, that is, the second decorative symbol display area 3B.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a variable display, and if the specific effect pattern is determined at this time, the upper front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed. Then, the shutters 40A and 30B housed below are started to fluctuate so as to protrude from both the upper and lower sides. As described above, in this embodiment, although the second decorative design 32 is variably displayed, the operations of the shutter accessories 40A and 30B are started. However, as in the above-described embodiment, the second decorative design is started. The shutter accessory can be operated at a timing when the symbol is not displayed.

  Then, almost the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is covered with the shutter accessories 40A and 30B together with the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, it is not possible to confirm the fluctuation display of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but instead, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ does not display the fluctuation display. A first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed.

  Note that a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed when the shutter object starts to operate. Also good. Further, at the time when the variable display based on the specific effect pattern that causes the shutter character to operate is performed, the decorative design may be displayed on both the main liquid crystal display device and the sub liquid crystal display device, at least The decorative design may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device at a timing at which the decorative design can be visually recognized.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ displays the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and displays the first and second decorative symbols 32 up to a position in front of the shutter accessories 40A and 40B in a state of covering the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Moving. As a result, the player can display the first liquid crystal display device 3 ′ displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 3 from the same viewpoint as when viewing the first decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32. The decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32 can be visually recognized.

  At this time, the second decorative symbol 32 is quickly stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ so that the mode of the second decorative symbol 32 can be clearly seen. It has become.

  As the subsequent operation, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'returns to the initial position, and the shutter accessories 40A and 40B return to the initial position as in the first embodiment. At this time, it is preferable to continue displaying the decorative design on the sub liquid crystal display device until the shutter accessory completely returns to the initial position.

  According to the application of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ and the shutter accessories 40 </ b> A and 30 </ b> B, the first decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32 are provided in the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ instead of the liquid crystal display device 3. Since it is displayed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 cannot be visually recognized.

  In the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In the case of displaying only one of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbol on which the variable display is not performed, for example, the second stop-displayed first, based on the specific effect pattern in which the shutter character appears. It is preferable to erase the display of the decorative design. Thereby, the player can confirm the display result of the 1st and 2nd decoration symbol reliably. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device may be arranged with the lower side of the main liquid crystal display device as an initial position, or may be arranged on the right side or the left side of the main liquid crystal display device.

[Operation of liquid crystal display device and shutter function]
FIG. 117 shows another modification of the liquid crystal display device and the shutter accessory. As shown in FIG. 117, in this embodiment, two sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′ are provided with the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device 3 as initial positions. Each of the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′ is configured to be able to operate from an initial position to a position covering substantially the left and right half of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. A first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screens of the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′, respectively. One shutter role 40A as a movable member can operate so as to cover an area on the left half of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 with the left outer side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position. Yes. The other shutter accessory 40 </ b> B is operable so as to cover an area on the almost right half of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, with the right outer side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a variable display, and if a specific effect pattern is determined at this time, the upper front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed. Then, the shutters 40A and 30B housed below are started to change so as to protrude from both the left and right sides. Even in the present embodiment, although the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed, the operation of the shutter actors 40A and 30B is started, but the second decorative symbol is displayed as in the above-described embodiment. The shutter accessory can be operated at a timing that is not performed.

  Then, almost the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is covered with the shutter accessories 40A and 30B together with the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, it is not possible to confirm the fluctuation display of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but instead, the display screens of the left and right sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 that are displayed in a variable manner are displayed.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′ have left and right shutters 40A and 40B in a state in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is covered while the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. Move to the forward position. As a result, the player can display the first liquid crystal display device 3 ′ displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 3 from the viewpoint close to that when viewing the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. The decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32 can be visually recognized. Also in this case, the second decorative design 32 is quickly stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ so that the mode of the second decorative design 32 can be clearly seen. It has become.

  Subsequent operations are such that the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' return to the initial position, and the shutter accessories 40A and 40B return to the initial position as described above. At this time, it is preferable to continue displaying the decorative design on the sub liquid crystal display device until the shutter accessory completely returns to the initial position.

  Even when the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′ and the shutter accessories 40A and 30B are applied, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 cannot be visually recognized. .

  In the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In the case of displaying only one of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbol on which the variable display is not performed, for example, the second stop-displayed first, based on the specific effect pattern in which the shutter character appears. It is preferable to erase the display of the decorative design. Thereby, the player can confirm the display result of the 1st and 2nd decoration symbol reliably.

  Further, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed when the shutter object starts to operate. Also good. Further, in the state where the shutter accessory is in the initial position, each of the sub liquid crystal display devices may display a normal symbol, a normal symbol holding number, a special symbol holding number, and the like. As a result, it is possible to secure a larger space for displaying other effect images of the decorative design on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices and shutters is not limited to two, but may be three or more. The initial positions of the sub liquid crystal display device and the shutter accessory may be oblique with respect to the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship combining the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The sub liquid crystal display device and the shutter accessory are configured to be individually movable controlled, but the sub liquid crystal display device is fixedly provided in front of the shutter accessory and interlocks with the operation of the shutter accessory. Then, the sub liquid crystal display device may be moved. The shutter accessory is not limited to a flat one, and may belong to another shape with a three-dimensional decoration, for example.

[Operation of shutter accessory]
118 and 119 show other modified examples of the shutter accessory. 118 and 119, a shutter accessory 40 provided with a portion that does not cover the first decorative symbol display area 3A is provided. The shutter accessory 40 is configured such that the upper part and the lower part of the first decorative symbol display area 3A can be operated integrally. According to such a shutter accessory 40, since at least the first decorative symbol 31 is not covered even when a series of operations are performed, the player reliably confirms the display result of the first decorative symbol. be able to.

  Further, when only the shutter accessory 40 is operated from the initial position, the first decorative symbol display area 3A is not covered by the shutter accessory 40, so that the player can change or stop the first decorative symbol 31. Although the display can be visually recognized, as shown in FIG. 119, the first decorative symbol 31 is not completely stopped and displayed in a state where the shutter accessory 40 is returning to the initial position. That is, in this state, since the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 has not elapsed, the first decorative symbol 31 can be oscillated and varied in a manner that oscillates in small increments.

  Then, the shutter accessory 40 is operated so as to return to the initial position until the variation time elapses while the first decorative pattern 31 is oscillating and varying. Eventually, the shutter accessory 40 is completely returned to the initial position. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a completely stopped display state. Thereby, the player can confirm the display result of the 1st decoration symbol 31 reliably.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various design changes can be made.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the entire first decorative symbol display area 3A is covered with the shutter accessory 40, but the shutter accessory moves from the lower side to the upper side of the display screen and further moves to the lower side of the display screen. It is good also as what is provided so that it may be accommodated and covers only a 2nd decoration symbol display area.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are provided in the same screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but the first decorative symbol is displayed on each screen of a different liquid crystal display device. A symbol display area and a second decorative symbol display area may be provided. In the case where the sub liquid crystal display device is provided, a decorative design may always be displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device so that the decorative design is not covered with the shutter accessory. According to this, it is not necessary to limit the timing for operating the shutter accessory, and the operation of the shutter accessory can be freely changed regardless of the decorative design.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter referred to as a fifth embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit symbol determination table]
In the fifth embodiment, the same tables as the jackpot determination table and the jackpot symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 are used, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. In the big hit determination table, it is detected by the first start opening entrance sensor 141 and the second start opening entrance sensor 142 that a game ball has won one of the first start opening 14A and the second start opening 14B. With this as a trigger, it is referred to when a big hit lottery with a special symbol is performed based on a big hit determination random number. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and determines a stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number. It is what is referred to when doing.

[Decoration design table]
120 to 122 show a decorative symbol determination table used in the fifth embodiment, which is referred to in order to determine the decorative symbol stop display mode. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but a different decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. May be.

  FIG. 120 (a) shows a decorative symbol determination table that is referred to in order to determine the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of a big hit lottery with 15R probability variable big hit. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative design determining random number can take any value among 900 from 0 to 899. In the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are each composed of three symbols: a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol representing numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), when the decoration symbol determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted when the first decoration symbol 31 or the second decoration symbol 32 is determined, the corresponding decoration symbol (reach fluctuation) is extracted. When “000” is determined as the decorative symbol for time) and the random numbers for determining decorative symbols “50” to “99” are extracted, “111” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol and the random number for determining decorative symbol “100” ”To“ 149 ”are extracted,“ 222 ”is determined as the corresponding decorative design, and when the decorative design determination random numbers“ 150 ”to“ 349 ”are extracted,“ 333 ”is extracted as the corresponding decorative design. When the decorative design determining random numbers “350” to “399” are extracted, “444” is determined as the corresponding decorative design, and the decorative design determining random numbers “400” to “449” are extracted. , With the corresponding decorative pattern When “555” is determined and the decorative design determining random numbers “450” to “499” are extracted, “666” is determined as the corresponding decorative design determining random number “500” to “799”. Is extracted as “corresponding decorative symbol”, and “888” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol when random numbers for determining decorative symbols “800” to “849” are extracted. When the random numbers for determination “850” to “899” are extracted, “999” is determined as the corresponding decorative design. Here, the decorative design is represented by three numbers such as “123”, but the left number (in this case “1”) is the left design and the center number (in this case “2”) is the middle. The symbol and the number on the right (in this case, “3”) correspond to the right symbol, and the same applies to the decorative symbol determination table described below.

  Thus, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, the probability that “777” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and next, the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high. Here, if a decorative symbol other than “777” is determined in the case of 15R probable big hit, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.) A notification that the 15R probability variation is a big hit is made.

  FIG. 120 (b) shows a decorative symbol determination table that is referred to in order to determine the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of a big hit lottery with an 8R probability variable big hit. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative design determining random number can take any value among 900 from 0 to 899.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), when the decoration symbol determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted at the time of determining the first decoration symbol 31 or the second decoration symbol 32, the corresponding decoration symbol (reach fluctuation) is extracted. When “000” is determined as the decorative symbol for time) and the random numbers for determining decorative symbols “50” to “99” are extracted, “111” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol and the random number for determining decorative symbol “100” ”To“ 149 ”are extracted as the corresponding decorative design,“ 222 ”is determined. When the decorative design determination random numbers“ 150 ”to“ 649 ”are extracted,“ 333 ”is output as the corresponding decorative design. When the decorative design determining random numbers “650” to “699” are extracted, “444” is determined as the corresponding decorative design, and the decorative design determining random numbers “700” to “749” are extracted. , With the corresponding decorative pattern When “555” is determined and the decorative design determining random numbers “750” to “799” are extracted, “666” is determined as the corresponding decorative design, and the decorative design determining random numbers “800” to “849” are determined. When “” is extracted, “888” is determined as the corresponding decorative design, and when the decorative design determining random numbers “850” to “899” are extracted, “999” is determined as the corresponding decorative design.

  As described above, in the case of 8R probability variation big hit, the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and the decorative symbol “777” is set not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, if a decorative symbol other than “333” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.) A notification that the 8R probability variation big hit is made is made.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a decorative symbol determination table that is referred to in order to determine the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of the big hit lottery in the case of 4R probability variation big hit. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative design determining random number can take any value among 900 from 0 to 899.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), when the decoration symbol determination random numbers “0” to “59” are extracted when determining the first decoration symbol 31 or the second decoration symbol 32, the corresponding decoration symbol (reach fluctuation) is extracted. When “000” is determined as the decorative symbol for time) and the random numbers for determining decorative symbols “60” to “259” are extracted, “111” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol and the random number for determining decorative symbol “260”. ”To“ 319 ”are extracted as the corresponding decorative design,“ 222 ”is determined, and when the decorative design determining random numbers“ 320 ”to“ 379 ”are extracted,“ 444 ”is output as the corresponding decorative design. When the decorative design determining random numbers “380” to “579” are extracted, “555” is determined as the corresponding decorative design, and the decorative design determining random numbers “580” to “639” are extracted. The corresponding decorative pattern When “666” is determined and the decorative design determining random numbers “640” to “699” are extracted, “888” is determined as the corresponding decorative design and the decorative design determining random numbers “700” to “899” are determined. "999" is extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol.

  In this way, in the case of 4R probability variation big hit, the probability that a symbol composed of odd numbers (“111”, “555”, “999”) is determined as a decorative symbol is set high (however, The decorative symbols “333” and “777” are set not to be selected). Here, after the display of the determined decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), a notification that the 4R probability variation big hit is given.

  FIG. 121B shows a decorative symbol determination table that is referred to in order to determine the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big hit. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative design determining random number can take any value among 900 from 0 to 899.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (b), when the decoration design determining random numbers “0” to “149” are extracted at the time of determining the first decorative design 31 or the second decorative design 32, the corresponding decorative design (reach fluctuation) is obtained. When “000” is determined as the decorative symbol for time) and random numbers for determining decorative symbols “150” to “199” are extracted, “111” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the random number for determining decorative symbol “200” ”To“ 349 ”are extracted as the corresponding decorative design,“ 222 ”is determined, and when the decorative design determining random numbers“ 350 ”to“ 499 ”are extracted,“ 444 ”is output as the corresponding decorative design. When the decorative design determining random numbers “500” to “549” are extracted, “555” is determined as the corresponding decorative design, and the decorative design determining random numbers “550” to “699” are extracted. The corresponding decoration When “666” is determined as the design and the decorative design determining random numbers “700” to “849” are extracted, “888” is determined as the corresponding decorative design, and the decorative design determining random numbers “850” to “899”. "999" is extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol.

  Thus, in the case of 4R normal big hit, there is a high probability that a symbol composed of an even number (“222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) is determined as a decorative symbol, “333” ”And“ 777 ”are set so as not to be selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers “0” to “9” are determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and the decorative symbol is configured by these three symbols. 120 and 121, when “777” in which each symbol is “7” is a decorative symbol depending on the contents of the decorative symbol determination table as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, the 15R probability variable big hit is confirmed, and each symbol is “ When “333” aligned with “3” is a decorative symbol, 8R probability variation big hit or more is confirmed, and when a decorative symbol with three numbers other than the above is confirmed, 4R normal big hit or larger is confirmed. Here, the reason why the 8R probability variation big hit or more is determined is that there is a possibility of promotion to a probability variation big hit having a larger number of rounds than 8R (that is, a 15R probability variation big hit). Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal big hit or more is determined is that there is a possibility of being promoted to a 15R positive change big hit, an 8R positive change big hit, or a 4R positive change big hit.

  FIG. 122 shows a decorative symbol determination table used in the case of a loss in the big hit lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative design determining random number can take any value among 900 from 0 to 899.

  In the decorative symbol determination table used in the case of a loss, a decorative symbol for decorative display (decorative symbol for changing fluctuation) displayed without going through the reach mode corresponding to each value of the random number for decorative symbol determination, A lost decorative pattern (decorative pattern for reach variation) displayed through the reach mode is defined, and these two decorative symbols are determined based on the random number for determining the decorative pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 122, when the decoration design determining random number “0” is extracted at the time of determining the first decorative design 31 or the second decorative design 32, “001” is determined as the decorative design for loss variation. At the same time, when “010” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation and the random number “1” for determining the decorative symbol is extracted, “002” is determined as the decorative symbol for loss variation and the decorative symbol for reach variation. When “010” is determined as the random number “2” for decoration design determination, “003” is determined as the decorative design for loss variation, and “010” is determined as the decoration design for reach variation. When the decorative design determining random number “3” is extracted, “004” is determined as the decorative pattern for loss variation and “010” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation. When the design determining random number “4” is extracted, “005” is determined as the decorative pattern for loss variation, “010” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation, and the decorative design determining random number “5” is determined. Is extracted as “006” as the decorative pattern for loss variation, “010” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation, and the random number “6” for decorative design determination is extracted. When “007” is determined as the decorative pattern for change, “010” is determined as the decorative pattern for reach change, and the random number “7” for determining the decorative pattern is extracted, the decorative pattern for loss change is “ When “008” is determined, “010” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation, and the random number “8” for decorative symbol determination is extracted, “009” is displayed as the decorative symbol for loss variation. When “010” is determined as the decoration symbol for reach variation and the decoration design random number “9” is extracted, “011” is determined as the decorative symbol for loss variation and the reach variation time is determined. “010” is determined as the decorative pattern for use. Thereafter, similarly, the decorative design determining random number is associated with the decorative pattern for losing change and the decorative design for reaching change based on the decorative design determining table, and the decorative design determining random number “899” is extracted. Then, “998” is determined as the decorative pattern for loss variation and “989” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation. In FIG. 122, the description of the decorative pattern for loss variation and the decorative pattern for reach variation in the case where the random number for determining the decorative symbol is “90” to “898” is omitted.

  In this way, the decorative design determining random numbers from “0” to “899” are associated with the decorative patterns for loss variation from “001” to “998”, respectively. As shown in FIG. “010”, “020”, “030”,..., “989”, the left and right decorative designs are removed from the lost variation decorative design and used as the reach variation decorative design. Is done. As described above, the decorative pattern for reach variation uses the same decorative symbol for the left symbol and the right symbol, and as shown in FIG. 122, one decorative symbol for reach variation is used for determining 10 decorative symbols. Corresponds to a random number.

  In the fifth embodiment, for example, the left symbol stops after 3 seconds from the start of the decorative symbol variation, the right symbol stops after 3 seconds, and all symbols stop during the symbol stop processing. Configured as follows. Therefore, like the above-described decorative pattern for variation in reach, a decorative pattern having the same left symbol and right symbol constitutes a reach mode. On the other hand, since the left design and the right design are not the same for the decorative pattern for loss change, the left design stops after the decorative design starts to change, and then the right design stops, then a different design is stopped and displayed. Will not constitute a reach aspect.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
FIG. 123 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123A shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 123B shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows the table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the special symbol variation pattern determination table uses the first special symbol 221 on the basis of the variation time determination random number when the determination result of the jackpot type is obtained. These are referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command for the second special symbol 231. The random number for changing time used for the lottery of the changing condition is 100 from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (a), with regard to the first special symbol 221, in the case of a big hit lottery with a 15R probability variable big hit, when the fluctuation time determining random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 1, the fluctuation time When the variation pattern designation command “h0” is determined for 60 s and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 2, the variation time 100 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h1” are determined. . In the case of the big hit lottery, if the random number for variation time determination “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 3, the variation time 60 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h2” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variable big hit, when the random time for variation time determination “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 4, the variation time 60 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h3” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big hit, when the random time for determining the variation time “0” to “19” is extracted, the variation pattern 5, the variation time 60 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h4” are determined. When the random numbers “20” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 6, the fluctuation time 100 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h5” are determined. In the case of losing in the big hit lottery, when the random numbers for variation time determination “0” to “93” are extracted, the variation pattern 7, the variation time 20 s, the variation pattern designation command “h6” are determined, and the variation time determination random number “ When “94” to “98” are extracted, the variation pattern 8, the variation time 60 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h7” are determined. When the variation time determination random number “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 9 and the variation At time 100 s, the fluctuation pattern designation command “h8” is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), with regard to the second special symbol 231, in the case of a big hit lottery with a 15R probability variable big hit, when the random numbers for variable time determination “0” to “79” are extracted, the variable pattern 10 and the variable time When the variation pattern designation command “h9” is determined for 50 s and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 11, the variation time 90 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h10” are determined. . In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variable big hit, when the random number for variation time determination “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 12, the variation time 50 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h11” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery with 4R normal big wins, when the random time for determining the variation time “0” to “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 13, the variation time 50 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h12” are determined. In the case of losing in the big hit lottery, when the random numbers for variation time determination “0” to “96” are extracted, the variation pattern 14, the variation time 10 s, the variation pattern designation command “h13” are determined, and the variation time determination random number “ When “97” to “98” are extracted, the variation pattern 15, the variation time 50s, and the variation pattern designation command “h14” are determined. When the variation time determination random number “99” is extracted, the variation pattern 16, the variation At time 90 s, the fluctuation pattern designation command “h15” is determined. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the gaming state is different. However, a different table may be used for each gaming state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 and the variation pattern designation command determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Remembered. Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 123 is configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the big hit type by the special symbol, but the big hit type by the special symbol corresponding to each gaming state The variation pattern may be determined based on the determination result. Further, only one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing the special symbol or the gaming state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation gaming state may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table is referred to regardless of the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. Not limited to this, different special symbol variation pattern determination tables may be referred to according to the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table for which a shorter variation time is easily determined as the number of start memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the number of start memories related to the second special symbol 231, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 is determined. The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated in accordance with the determination result of a specific jackpot type in the special symbol variation pattern determination table. However, as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the jackpot type One variation pattern may be associated with each determination result.

[Decoration pattern determination table]
FIG. 124 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124A shows a first decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first decorative design 31, and FIG. 124B shows a second decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the second decorative design 32. Shows the table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b) is triggered by the fact that the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 has been received, based on the effect determination random number. This is referred to when determining the effect conditions such as the effect content (hereinafter also referred to as “effect pattern”) for the symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and the effect data corresponding thereto. The random number for effect determination used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 pieces of 0-99. In the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b), the time (variation time) during which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed is also defined. However, this variation time is also a time during which other effects linked to the variation display of the decorative symbol are executed. The variation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the variation pattern designation command. That is, the variation times of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 coincide with the variation times of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (a), when “h0” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 60 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted. Then, the big hit variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73, while the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted. The specific big hit variation effect 1 is determined, and the corresponding effect data 2 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h1” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “97” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 3 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “98” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 4 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h2” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, Corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h3” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 4 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h4” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 5 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h5” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 6 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 8 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determining random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the big hit variation effect 7 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 9 is Set in the work RAM 73. When “h6” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 20 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h7” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h8” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 12 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach lose variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 13 is stored in the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach-losing variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (b), when “h9” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 50 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. Then, the big hit variation effect 8 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h10” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 90 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 9 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h11” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 10 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h12” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 11 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h13” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content. When the corresponding effect data 19 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 20 is Set in the work RAM 73. When “h14” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “94” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect contents. When the corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “95” to “99” are extracted, the specific reach lose variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 22 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h15” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 90 s, and when the random numbers “0” to “90” for determining the effect are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the specific reach loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect contents and the corresponding effect data 24 Is set in the work RAM 73.

  In the present embodiment, the specific jackpot variation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss variation effect 1 are defined as the specific effect patterns for the first decorative symbol 31, and the specific reach loss variation effects 2 and 3 are identified for the second decorative symbol 32. Although defined as an effect pattern, when a specific effect pattern is executed between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, there is no relationship between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. A certain production (combining production) is performed. In this example, although the specific big hit variation effect is not provided in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 124 (b), like the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 124 (a). One or more can be provided. In addition, although this embodiment provides the mechanism which performs a union effect when both the two decoration symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined to be a specific effect pattern, for example, By making one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol correspond to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and making the normal symbol correspond to the other decorative symbol, It is good also as a mechanism which performs a unification effect based on the relationship with a normal symbol.

[Control of decorative movement of decorative pattern]
In the present embodiment, the fluctuating operation (that is, the combined effect) of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled by an actual aspect as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126.

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first decorative symbol display area 3 </ b> A and a second decorative symbol 32 for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing variable display and stop display is provided. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start memory display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as “first start memories”) related to the first special symbol 221 in a mark or indicator format. There is provided a second start memory display area 3D for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as “second start memory”) related to the area 3C and the second special symbol 231 in a mark or indicator format. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start memory display area 3C is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and on the left side, and the second start memory display area 3D is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and arranged on the right side. Is done.

  The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first special symbol variation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped. The second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the two decorative symbols 32 is variably displayed or stopped is provided. For example, in these regions, variably displayed When the mark is displayed, the corresponding mark is turned on. When the stop mark is displayed, the mark is turned off. In this example, for the sake of convenience in the drawings, the mark lighting display is represented by a black square mark, and the mark off display is represented by a white square mark. The first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the first special symbol variation state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and the second special symbol 231 are variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. The second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changing is provided. You can also.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a) as an example, first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. One first start memory is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C, and one second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. Here, in FIG. 125 (b) As shown, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are started to be displayed in a variable manner based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start memory display area 3C and the second start memory display area 3D, the numbers of the first start memory and the second start memory subtracted by one when the decorative symbol variation display is started are displayed. In this example, both the first start memory and the second start memory are not displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 corresponds to the specific jackpot variation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns with reference to the first decorative effect effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (a). The effect data 2 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 is referred to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124B, and the specific reach loss variation effect 2 which is one of the specific effect patterns. It is assumed that the corresponding effect data 22 has been determined.

  Further, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change, a square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and a second special symbol variation state display area 3F are displayed. Each square mark changes from white to black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect data, as shown in FIG. 125 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The variable display is continued in such a manner that 32 is united into one. The decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3G, where variable display or stop display is performed. In this example, the third decorative symbol display area 3G is configured as one area that covers the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area are displayed. Both areas 3B are not displayed. In the present embodiment, when both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed according to the specific effect pattern as described above, there is a relationship between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. A characteristic effect (that is, in this example, a combined effect in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined and displayed) is performed. Note that when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are subjected to variable display in a combination other than the above-described effect pattern, a combined display effect may be performed. Further, the combined display effect may be performed based on the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed instead of such a combination of effect patterns.

  Even in a situation where the variable display is performed in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined into one, the square mark and the second special symbol displayed in the first special symbol variable state display area 3E are displayed. The square mark displayed in the symbol variation state display area 3F is displayed in black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), in the third decorative symbol 33 in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are merged into one part, a part of the third decorative symbol 33 is being displayed in a variable manner and becomes a reach mode. However, this reflects the individual variation display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. For example, in the first decorative symbol 31, when the middle symbol is variably displayed and reaches the reach mode, and in the second decorative symbol 32, the middle symbol is variably displayed and reaches the reach mode, the third ornament is displayed. The left symbol of the pattern 33 is a number obtained by adding the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the left symbol of the second decorative symbol 32. Similarly, the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 is the first decorative symbol. It is a number obtained by adding the right symbol of 31 and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 (if the digit overflows, the last digit is selected). As can be seen from the contents of the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 to be described later, at this time, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 are “7”, respectively. Since it is known that the left symbol and the right symbol of 32 are “2”, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 are “9”, respectively. The determination of each decorative symbol in the third decorative symbol 33 is not limited to the above-described method. For example, one decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is used. May be determined based only on the other, or based only on the other decorative design.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), the display of the third decorative symbol 33 is ended, the combined state is ended, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed again. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a reach manner, and “7” is displayed in both the left symbol and the right symbol. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol “232”, and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F is also displayed in black because the second special symbol 231 is also stopped and displayed. It turns white. In the present embodiment, the display of the third decorative symbol 33 is terminated when the coalescence execution timer, which will be described later, becomes zero, but the third decorative symbol 33 is not limited to this and is displayed at various timings. Can be terminated. For example, the display of the third decorative symbol 33 may be terminated after one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (f), the display of the reach mode in the first decorative pattern 31 is terminated, and the display is stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern “777” (that is, in the big hit mode). At this time, since the first special symbol 221 is also stopped and displayed, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from black to white. In this example, the first decorative design 31 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode after the combined state is finished. However, the first decorative design 31 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode before the combined state is finished, and then the third decorative design is displayed. You may comprise so that the display of the symbol 33 may be complete | finished and it may return to the original state. Further, the variable display may be ended without ending the coalesced state. In this case, it is preferable that the third decorative design 33 is configured to stop and display the decorative design corresponding to either the first decorative design 31 or the second decorative design 32 in the combined state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when “777” in which each symbol is aligned with “7” is a decorative symbol, 15R probability variation big hit is confirmed, and “333” in which each symbol is aligned with “3” is determined. In the case of a decorative symbol, the 8R probability change big hit is confirmed, and in the case of a decorative symbol with three numbers other than the above, the 4R normal big hit is confirmed, but depending on the stop display of such a decorative symbol, the big hit You may make it define a jackpot aspect by another method, without defining an aspect.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol after 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, and further stop the right symbol after 3 seconds, and the middle symbol It is stopped at a time corresponding to the variation time defined by the production data of the production pattern determined for the decorative design. In this example, the production pattern of the first decorative design 31 is production data 2 and the variation time is 60 seconds, and the production pattern of the second decoration design 32 is production data 22 in this example, and the variation time. Is 50 seconds. Therefore, in the first decorative symbol 31, the left symbol “7” stops 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol “7” stops 6 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and the middle symbol “7” changes. Stop 60 seconds after starting. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol “2” stops 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol “2” stops 6 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and the middle symbol “3” changes. It stops 50 seconds after the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, when the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. Therefore, an impression that there is some relationship between these decorative symbols can be given to the player. In addition, since the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in a variable manner and then not displayed, and then the third decorative symbol is displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined. It is possible to make the player think as if the third decorative design was born. In the combined state in which the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed, and the respective symbols of the third decorative symbol 33 are respectively displayed in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33. Since the numbers are obtained by adding the symbols of the decorative symbols 32, the player can roughly predict the first decorative symbols 31 and the second decorative symbols 32 based on the third decorative symbols 33. As a result, a change is brought about in the game, which leads to an improvement in the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 126 shows another modification in which the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled. As shown in FIG. 126 (a) as an example, first, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. The state is shown. At this time, one first start memory is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C, but no second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. In addition, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E is displayed in white, and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F is displayed in black. This shows that the special symbol 221 is stopped and the second special symbol 231 is changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the first decorative symbol 31 starts to be displayed in a variable manner based on the first startup memory. As a result, the first start memory display area 3C displays the number of first start memories subtracted by one when the decorative symbol variation display starts, and in this example, is the same as the second start memory. In addition, the first start memory is not displayed. Also, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from white to black, indicating the start of variation display of the first decorative symbol 31. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 corresponds to the specific jackpot variation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns with reference to the first decorative effect effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (a). The effect data 2 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 is referred to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124B, and the specific reach loss variation effect 2 which is one of the specific effect patterns. It is assumed that the corresponding effect data 22 has been determined.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), in the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol “6” is stopped and displayed while the variable display is continued. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed with the left symbol “3” stopped while the variable display is continued, and the second decorative symbol 32 is maintained with the variable display. The right symbol “4” is stopped and displayed. In such a variable display state, as shown in FIG. 126 (d), a third decorative symbol 33 in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3G. As described above, in this modified example, when both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed and some symbols are stopped and displayed, the combined display is performed. As in FIG. 125, the third decorative symbol display area 3G is configured as one area that covers the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Both display areas 3B are not displayed. As for the 3rd decoration design 33, the variable display is continued and as shown in Drawing 126 (d), "9" of the left design is stopped and displayed. The left symbol “9” is obtained by adding the left symbol “3” of the first decorative symbol 31 and the left symbol “6” of the second decorative symbol 32.

  Next, in the third decorative symbol 33, as shown in FIG. 126 (e), the right symbol “7” is stopped and displayed while the variable display is continued. At this time, the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is not displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but the symbol that is stopped and displayed is “3”. The right symbol “3” of the first decorative symbol 31 and the right symbol “4” of the second decorative symbol 32 are added. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (f), when the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F is displayed in white and the second special symbol 231 is stopped and displayed, At the timing, the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol of the “987” losing manner. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is still displayed in a variable manner, but the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are added to the third decorative symbol 33, respectively. Numbers are set to the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively, and stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (g), the display of the third decorative symbol 33 is ended, the combined state is ended, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed again. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a reach manner, and “3” is displayed for both the left symbol and the right symbol. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol “654”. In this modified example, when the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed, and then the combined state is released. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (h), the variation display of the first decorative symbol 31 is finished, and is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode of the decorative symbol “333” (displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E). The square mark is changed from black to white because the first special symbol 221 is also stopped and displayed). In addition, the timing which complete | finishes a unification state is good also immediately after the 1st decoration symbol 31 is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 in the combined state is the addition of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. Since the numbers are represented, even after one of the decorative symbols continues to change after the combined state is released, the player can display the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 displayed immediately before and the other From the stop display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to predict the decorative symbol during the variable display, which brings about a change in the game and leads to an improvement in the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the description of the same or similar steps as those according to the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified. Note that the processing flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 of the fifth embodiment is the same as that described with respect to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. First, the processing flow relating to the control of the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG. 125 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 to 135, the sub CPU 71 performs sub control circuit main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, decoration symbol stop processing, effect pattern change processing, command analysis processing, stop symbol determination processing, decoration It is comprised so that a symbol forced stop process and an effect pattern determination process may be performed. The command analysis process is executed as a sub-control circuit main process subroutine. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern change process are executed as a subroutine of a timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative symbol forced stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. The command reception interrupt process is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
As shown in FIG. 127, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing in response to power-on (S7001). Specifically, as an initialization process, the sub CPU 71 reads a startup program from the program ROM 72 and clears various flags stored in the work RAM 73.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a random number update process (S7002). Specifically, as the random number update process, the sub CPU 71 updates values of an effect determination random number counter, a stop symbol determination random number counter, a decoration symbol determination random number counter, and the like, which will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a command analysis process shown in FIGS. 131 and 132 described later (S7003). In the command analysis process, various commands received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) are analyzed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing (S7004). Specifically, as the display control process, the sub CPU 71 performs display control of images of the first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, the third decorative symbol 33, and the like based on the set effect data and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process (S7005). Specifically, as the sound control process, the sub CPU 71 performs output control of sound such as notification sound, sound effect, music, and speech based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a lamp control process (S7006). Specifically, as lamp control processing, the sub CPU 71 controls lighting / extinguishing of various lamps based on the set effect data.

[Timer interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 71 executes a timer interrupt process at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). First, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving each register (S7021). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the program being executed stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs timer update processing (S7022). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 updates (subtracts) values set in various timers stored in the work RAM 73, for example, a coalescing timer, a coalescence standby timer, and a coalescence execution timer described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a decoration symbol stop process shown in FIG. 129 described later (S7023), and then executes an effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 130 described later (S7024). In the effect pattern change process, control for displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 together is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs an operation button input process (S7025). In the operation button input process, it is detected whether or not various operation buttons are operated by the sub CPU 71.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register (S7026). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S7021 to each register. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the timer interrupt process.

[Decoration stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 129, as the first step of the decorative symbol stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7031). The first decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed, and is set in step S7114 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S7031, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S7031: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S7035 described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7031: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7032). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the first decorative symbol variation timer, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the rendering data is set in step S7115 of the rendering pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S7032, when the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S7032: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7035 described later. On the other hand, when the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7032: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a first decorative symbol stop process (S7033) and sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to off (S7034). . By such a first decorative symbol stop process, the first decorative symbol 31 being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7035). The second decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed, and is set in step S7118 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  If the second decorative symbol variation flag is not on in S7035 (S7035: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7035: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7036). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32. In the second decorative symbol variation timer, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the rendering data is set in step S7119 of the rendering pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S7036, when the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S7036: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, when the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7036: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a second decorative symbol stop process (S7037) and sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to OFF (S7038). . By such a second decorative symbol stop process, the second decorative symbol 32 being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 130, as the first step of the effect pattern changing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the coalesced flag is on (S7041). If the coalesced flag is off (S7041: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S7044 described later. On the other hand, if the coalesced flag is on (S7041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the coalesced timer is 0 (S7042). When the unitable timer is not 0 (S7042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the mergeable timer is 0 (S7042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the mergeable flag (S7043), and then ends the effect pattern change process.

  If NO in step S7041, it is determined whether or not the merge standby flag is on (S7044). When the merge standby flag is off (S7044: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S7052 described later. On the other hand, when the merge standby flag is on (S7044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the merge standby timer is 0 (S7045). When the uniting standby timer is not 0 (S7045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern changing process. When the coalescence standby timer is 0 (S7045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the coalescence standby flag (S7046), turns on the coalescence execution flag (S7047), and sets the coalescence execution timer to specify the period for maintaining the coalescence state. A predetermined value is set (S7048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the coalescence execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 10 s is set in the coalescing timer that defines a grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined to be the specific effect pattern, and 2 s corresponds to the coalescence waiting timer that waits for the execution of the coalescence. A value corresponding to 30 s is set in the merge execution timer. Then, since the shortest variation time in the specific effect pattern is 50 s of the specific reach-losing variation effect 2 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the mergeable timer, the merge standby timer, and the merge execution timer is the variation time 50s. Is not exceeded.

  After step S7048, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop decoration symbol calculation process (S7049), sets the calculated stop combination decoration symbol data (S7050), sets the decoration symbol combination data (S7051), and then changes the effect pattern. The process ends. Specifically, the stop decorative symbol calculation process adds the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 to obtain the third decorative symbol 33 after the combination. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is the decorative symbol “333” and the second decorative symbol 32 is the decorative symbol “545”, the combined symbol is “8” for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In this example, the middle symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 is not stopped and displayed by the setting of the coalescing possible timer, the coalescence standby timer, and the coalescence execution timer. Therefore, at the time of coalescence, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. It is not necessary to add up the middle symbols. Further, even if the decorative symbol when combined is a jackpot symbol, as described above, the decorative symbol after the addition is not stopped and displayed, so no problem occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the combined decorative symbols (third decorative symbols 33) are obtained by adding the symbols at the corresponding positions of the first decorative symbols 31 and the second decorative symbols 32. It can be obtained by various calculations including multiplication and division. When the value obtained by summation exceeds 9, the last one digit after summation can be adopted. By setting the stop united decorative symbol data calculated in this way, the decorative symbol combined based on this data is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as the third decorative symbol 33 as shown in FIG. Is stopped. The decorative symbol combination data is data for performing effects from the combination of the decorative symbols to just before the end of the decorative symbol combination.

  If NO in step S7044, it is determined whether the coalescence execution flag is on (S7052). When the merge execution flag is off (S7052: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, when the merge execution flag is on (S7052: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the merge execution timer is 0 (S7053). If the merge execution timer is not 0 (S7053: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the merge execution timer is 0 (S7053: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets decoration symbol merge end data (S7054), turns off the merge execution flag (S7055), and ends the effect pattern change process. The decoration symbol combination end data is data for performing an effect until the end of the decoration symbol combination, and when this data is set, when the display in the combined state is ended, the decoration based on the original effect data is performed. The display returns to the symbol variation display and the effect display.

  In this way, in the effect pattern change process, the contents of the first decoration symbol 31 and the second decoration are determined by determining the contents of the unitable flag, the unitable timer, the united standby flag, the united standby timer, the united execution flag, and the united execution timer. Controls the combined effect of the pattern 32. The coalesced flag is set to ON when a specific effect pattern is determined for either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol by an effect pattern determining process shown in FIG. 135, which will be described later. When the specific effect pattern is determined with respect to the other decorative design at the time of ON (that is, when the specific effect pattern is determined with respect to both of the decorative symbols), the coalescing flag is turned off and the coalescence waiting flag is set. Is turned on. However, in this example, when the determination timing of the specific effect pattern regarding both decorative symbols is 10 seconds or more away, the uniting standby flag is controlled so that the uniting standby flag is not turned on (the uniting possible flag is reset to off). )

  Next, in the effect pattern change process, when the coalescence standby flag is set to ON, during that time, the coalescence standby timer (in this example, 2 seconds) is monitored to wait for execution of the coalescence effect. . In the effect pattern change process, when the merge standby timer becomes 0, the merge execution flag is set to ON, and the merge effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started. The uniting effect time is managed by a uniting execution timer (30 seconds in this example).

[Command analysis processing]
The command analysis process is described over FIGS. 131 and 132. First, as shown in FIG. 131, as the first step of the command analysis process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a command received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) (S7061). If there is no received command (S7061: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing. On the other hand, when there is a received command (S7061: YES), the sub CPU 71 reads out command data stored in the reception buffer (S7062).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command (special symbol designation command) has been received based on the read command data (S7063). If the symbol designation command has not been received (S7063: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S7065 described later. When the symbol designating command is received (S7063: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a stop symbol determining process shown in FIG. 133 described later (S7064). When the stop symbol determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S7065). When the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S7065: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S7067 described later. When the variation pattern designation command is received (S7065: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later (S7066). When the effect pattern determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special symbol forced stop command (first special symbol forced stop command or second special symbol forced stop command) has been received based on the read command data (S7067). When the special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S7067: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7070 described later. When the special symbol forced stop command has been received (S7067: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol forced stop process shown in FIG. 134 described later (S7068). When the decorative symbol forced stop process is finished, the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation state display setting process (S7069). The special symbol variation state display setting process is a first special symbol variation state display area 3E that is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and that indicates whether or not the first special symbol is varying. Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not the two special symbols are being varied. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command is received, data for turning off the mark representing the first special symbol variation state is set, and when the second special symbol forced stop command is received, the second special symbol forced stop command is received. Data for turning off the mark indicating the symbol variation state is set. When the special symbol variation state display setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special symbol stop command (first special symbol stop command or second special symbol stop command) has been received based on the read command data (S7070). When the special symbol stop command has not been received (S7070: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7072 described later shown in FIG. When the special symbol stop command is received (S7070: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation state display setting process (S7071). The special symbol variation state display setting process is a first special symbol variation state display area 3E that is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and that indicates whether or not the first special symbol is varying. Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not the two special symbols are being varied. That is, when the first special symbol stop command is received, data for turning off the mark indicating the first special symbol variation state is set, and when the second special symbol stop command is received, the second special symbol variation is received. Data for turning off the mark indicating the state is set. When the special symbol variation state display setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a short time end command has been received based on the read command data (S7072). If the short time end command has not been received (S7072: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S7074 described later. When the short time end command has been received (S7072: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes special effect mode start processing (S7073). Specifically, in the special effect mode start process, data for displaying the background image in the special effect mode is set. In the special effect mode start process, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and then the normal game state B flag included in the game state flag is set to on. The normal game state B flag is a flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state B. When the special effect mode start process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Also, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special effect end command has been received based on the read command data (S7074). If the special effect end command has not been received (S7074: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S7076 described later. When the special effect end command is received (S7074: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special effect mode end process (S7075). Specifically, in the special effect mode end process, data for ending the background image display in the special effect mode is set. That is, in the special effect mode end process, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and then the normal game state A flag included in the game state flag is set to on, thereby corresponding to the normal mode. Data for displaying a background image is set. The normal game state A flag is a flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state A. When the special effect mode end process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received based on the read command data (S7076). When the gaming state command has not been received (S7076: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S7078 described later. When the gaming state command has been received (S7076: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect mode setting process (S7077). Specifically, in the effect mode setting process, when a short-time gaming state command is received as a gaming state command, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the short-time gaming state is set, and the probability changing gaming state command and the short-time gaming state are set. When a command is received, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the probability variation gaming state is set. In the effect mode setting process, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and then the game state flag corresponding to the effect mode is set to on. When only the short-time gaming state command is received, the short-time gaming state flag included in the gaming state flag is set to ON, and when the probability variable gaming state command and the short-time gaming state command are received, the gaming state flag is set. The included probability variation game state flag and short-time game state flag are set on. When the effect mode setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special symbol variation start command (first special symbol variation start command or second special symbol variation start command) has been received based on the read command data (S7078). When the special symbol variation start command has not been received (S7078: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S7080 described later. When the special symbol variation start command is received (S7078: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation state display setting process (S7079). The special symbol variation state display setting process is a first special symbol variation state display area 3E that is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and that indicates whether or not the first special symbol is varying. Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not the two special symbols are being varied. That is, when the first special symbol variation start command is received, data for turning on the mark indicating the first special symbol variation state is set, and when the second special symbol variation start command is received, the second special symbol variation start command is received. Data for lighting a mark representing the symbol variation state is set. When the special symbol variation state display setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 executes processing corresponding to the other received command (S7080). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

[Stop symbol determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 133, as the first step of the stop symbol determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts a decorative symbol determination random number from the decorative symbol determination random number counter (S7091). The value of the decoration design determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the random number for decoration design determination becomes a value extracted at random. Next, the sub CPU 71 selects one of the decorative symbol determination tables shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 based on the received symbol designation command (special symbol designation command) (S7092). The special symbol designation command indicates a lost symbol or jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and based on this, the result of the big hit lottery is It is determined which of 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 4R normal big hit, and loss is made, and a decorative symbol determination table corresponding to this is selected.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected decoration design determination table, determines a stop decoration design based on the extracted decoration design determination random number (S7093), and sets the determined stop decoration design data in the work RAM 73. In step S7094, the stop symbol determination process is terminated. For example, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery result is a 15R probability variable jackpot based on the special symbol designation command, the decorative symbol determination table shown in FIG. Then, the decorative pattern for reach change according to 0 to 899) is determined as stop decorative data and set in the work RAM 73. In addition, when it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the decorative symbol determination table shown in FIG. 122 is selected. A decorative pattern for time is set. This is because in the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination process is performed after the stop symbol determination process, and it is not determined whether or not it is a reach effect at the time of setting the stop decoration symbol data. If the effect pattern is determined first, either the decorative pattern for loss change or the decorative pattern for reach change can be selectively set depending on whether or not the effect pattern is a reach effect.

[Decorative design forced stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 134, as the first step of the decorative symbol forced stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a forced stop command corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, that is, the first special symbol forced stop command has been received. (S7101). When the first special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S7101: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S7105 described later.

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol forced stop command is received in step S7101 (S7101: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a first decorative symbol forced stop process (S7102) and turns off the first decorative symbol variation flag. (S7103), and the first decorative symbol variation timer is cleared (S7104). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process. The first decorative symbol forced stop process is a process for forcibly stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31.

  If NO in step S7101, the sub CPU 71 performs a second decorative symbol forced stop process (S7105), sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to off (S7106), and clears the second decorative symbol variation timer. (S7107). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process. The second decorative symbol forced stop process is a process for forcibly stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 135, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts effect determination random numbers from the effect determination random number counter (S7111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the random number for effect determination becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S7112). The variation pattern designation command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table as shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62, and then the sub-control circuit 7. (Sub CPU 71). When the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S7112: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S7117 described later. When the received variation pattern designation commands are h0 to h8 (S7112: YES), the sub CPU 71 refers to the first decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data determined based on the change pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S7113). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding to them are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern is in the reach mode. ing. That is, if the production pattern shows a loss and reach, the decorative pattern for reach variation set in the stop symbol determination process is used. If the production pattern shows a loss, the decoration pattern is set in the stop symbol determination process. The decorative pattern for changing the lost pattern will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S7114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S7115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any one of the effect data 2, the effect data 4 and the effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7116). In this example, as the condition for the combined state, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined so that the effect by the specific effect pattern is executed. It is determined whether or not the production pattern is a specific production pattern. When it is not the production data corresponding to the specific production pattern (S7116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the production pattern determination process. If it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7116: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7121 described later.

  In step S <b> 7117, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 (b) and works the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command. Set in RAM 73. Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding to them are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h13 to h15) in the case where the determination result is “losing”, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern is in the reach mode. ing. That is, if the production pattern shows a loss and reach, the decorative pattern for reach variation set in the stop symbol determination process is used. If the production pattern shows a loss, the decoration pattern is set in the stop symbol determination process. The decorative pattern for changing the lost pattern will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S7118). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S7119).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of the effect data 22 and the effect data 24 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7120). In this example, as the condition for the combined state, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined so that the effect by the specific effect pattern is executed. It is determined whether or not the production pattern is a specific production pattern. When it is not the production data corresponding to the specific production pattern (S7120: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the production pattern determination process. If it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7120: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7121 described later.

  If YES in step S7116 or YES in step S7120, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the coalesced flag is on (S7121). If the coalesced flag is on (S7121: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S7124 described later. On the other hand, if the coalesced flag is off (S7121: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the coalesced flag on (S7122), sets a predetermined value in the coalesced timer (S7123), and then effects pattern determination processing Exit. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this way, when the effect pattern of the other decorative design is determined to be the specific effect pattern within 10 s after setting the unitable timer, the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed to display the combined display. Will do. In this example, the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  In the case of YES in step S7121, the sub CPU 71 sets the coalescence possible flag to OFF (S7124), clears the coalescence possible timer (S7125), sets the coalescence standby flag to ON (S7126), and sets the coalescence standby timer to a predetermined value. A value is set (S7127), and then the effect pattern determination process is terminated. Here, by setting the coalescence standby flag to ON and setting a predetermined value in the coalescence standby timer, the coalescence display is in a standby state for the time set in the coalescence standby timer. Whether or not the coalescence standby flag is on is determined in step S7044 of the effect pattern changing process shown in FIG. 130 described above, where it is determined that the coalescence standby flag is on, and in step S7045 the coalescence standby timer is set. When it is determined as 0, the combined display is started. In this example, the predetermined value set in the coalescence standby timer is a value corresponding to 2 s, but is not limited to this.

  Next, referring to FIG. 136 and FIG. 137, the processing flow of the program executed by the sub CPU 71 for another modification example related to the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG. Will be described. Note that the description of the same or similar steps as those according to the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 136, as the first step of the effect pattern changing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the coalesced flag is on (S7131). If the coalesced flag is off (S7131: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S7134 described later. On the other hand, if the coalesced flag is on (S7131: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the coalesced timer is 0 (S7132). When the unitable timer is not 0 (S7132: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the mergeable timer is 0 (S7132: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the mergeable flag (S7133), and then ends the effect pattern change process.

  In the case of NO in step S7131, it is determined whether or not the merge standby flag is on (S7134). When the merge standby flag is off (S7134: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, when the merge standby flag is on (S7134: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the merge standby timer is 0 (S7135). If the combined standby timer is not 0 (S7135: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the uniting standby timer is 0 (S7135: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the uniting standby flag (S7136), turns on the uniting execution flag (S7137), and performs stop decoration symbol calculation processing (S7138).

  Sub-CPU71 discriminate | determines whether the calculated symbol is a big hit mode after step S7138 (S7139). When it is not a big hit mode (S7139: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S7141 described later. If it is a big hit mode (S7139: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a stop decorative symbol correction process (S7140). The stop decorative symbol correction process is performed to prevent the decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) from being in a big hit state in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined. This correction process is, for example, correction in which 1 is subtracted from the calculated middle symbol. This is to prevent the combined decorative pattern (third decorative pattern 33) from becoming a big hit mode when the lost symbol and the lost symbol are added together. For example, the first decorative design 31 is “525”, the production pattern is determined to be the specific reach loss variation production 1 (production data 14), the second decorative design 32 is “252”, and the production pattern is the specific reach loss. When the variation effect 3 (effect data 24) is determined, the combined decoration symbol (third decoration symbol 33) is “777”, which may be misunderstood as a decoration symbol corresponding to the 15R probability variation big hit. is there. Here, by subtracting 1 from the middle symbol and setting the decorative symbol to “767”, such a misunderstanding can be avoided.

  In the case of NO in step S7139, or after step S7140, the calculated stop combined decorative pattern data is set (S7141), decorative combined pattern data is set (S7142), and then the effect pattern changing process is terminated. As described above, the calculated stop coalescing decorative design data is data that has been corrected so as to avoid the big hit mode when the combined state is in the big hit mode. The decorative symbol combination data is data for performing effects from the combination of the decorative symbols to just before the end of the decorative symbol combination.

[Decoration stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 137, as the first step of the decorative symbol stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7151). The first decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed.

  In S7151, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S7151: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S7157 described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7151: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7152). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31.

  In S7152, if the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S7152: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7157 described later. On the other hand, when the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7152: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the merge execution flag is on (S7153). The combined execution flag is a flag indicating that a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined is displayed.

  In S7153, when the merge execution flag is not on (S7153: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S7157 described later. On the other hand, if the merge execution flag is ON (S7153: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the combined decoration symbol stop data (S7154) and sets the decorative symbol combination end display data (S7155). Here, the combined decorative symbol stop data is data for stopping and displaying the combined decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol combined end display data is data for displaying the decorative symbol combined end display. After step S7155, the merge execution flag is turned off (S7156).

  In the case of NO in step S7151, in the case of NO in step S7152, in the case of NO in step S7153, or after step S7156, the sub CPU 71 performs a first decorative symbol stop process (S7157) and sets the first decorative symbol variation flag. It is set to off (S7158). By such processing, when the first decorative symbol 31 being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, a stop display of the decorative symbol (the third decorative symbol 33) that combines the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32; The end display will be displayed. In this modification, the stop display and the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 are performed without using the merge execution timer. On the other hand, in the effect pattern changing process shown in FIG. 130, when the merge execution timer becomes 0, the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 is controlled.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7159). The second decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed.

  If the second decorative symbol variation flag is not on in S7159 (S7159: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7159: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7160). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32.

  In S7160, when the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S7160: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, when the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7160: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the merge execution flag is on (S7161). The combined execution flag is a flag indicating that a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined is displayed.

  In S7161, if the merge execution flag is not on (S7161: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7165 described later. On the other hand, if the merge execution flag is ON (S7161: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the combined decoration symbol stop data (S7162), and sets the decorative symbol combination end display data (S7163). Here, the combined decorative symbol stop data is data for stopping and displaying the combined decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol combined end display data is data for displaying the decorative symbol combined end display. After step S7163, the merge execution flag is turned off (S7164).

  If NO in step S7161, or after step S7164, the sub CPU 71 performs a second decorative symbol stop process (S7165), and sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to OFF (S7166). By such a process, when the second decorative symbol 32 being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, a stop display of the decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) that combines the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and The end display will be displayed. In this modification, the stop display and the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 are performed without using the merge execution timer. Further, in this decorative symbol stop process, the stop display and end display of the third decorative symbol 33 are performed for each of the case where the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 and the case where the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0. As a result, when one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 finishes the variable display, the display of the third decorative symbol 33, which is the combined decorative symbol, ends. .

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modified example of the liquid crystal display device and a modified example of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

[Liquid Crystal Display]
FIG. 138 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 138, in this embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is arranged with the upper position above the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from the initial position until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3. It is configured. On the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, a first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed under a predetermined condition. In addition to the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the liquid crystal display device 3 displays a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined. .

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a variable display on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. When the specific effect pattern is determined for both of the two decorative symbols 32, a third decorative symbol 33 that combines the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed. Since the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed so as to cover the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are hidden as a result. In addition, when the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed in this way, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be controlled not to be displayed.

  Thereby, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, although the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changing, the changing display cannot be confirmed. On the display screen of the display device 3 ', the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 that are being displayed in a variable manner are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is in a state in which the third decorative pattern 33 is variably displayed, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is variably displayed. A first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), when the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. Accordingly, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 are stopped on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this modified example, the third decorative symbol 33 displays a decorative symbol different from the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed. The same decorative symbol as the third decorative symbol 33 may be displayed as the third decorative symbol 33, or the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 plus the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol respectively. You may display as 33 left symbols, middle symbols, and right symbols.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (d), the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the decorative symbol “666” which is a jackpot display is displayed. In addition, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and a decorative symbol “777” which is a jackpot display is displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, and the decorative symbol “677” is displayed. However, in this state, the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed in white, and the variation state of the second special symbol The square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E still maintains the black display state, and the first decoration that is stopped is displayed. The decorative pattern “777” of the pattern 31 indicates that the display is actually still in a non-deterministic display state. In this modification, the stop display timing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not necessarily match the stop display timing of the third decorative symbol 33. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is not completely stopped and displayed in small increments until the first special symbol variation display is completed. The display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the timing of the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 may be made to coincide with each other. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (e), the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ has the third decorative symbol 33 displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is It moves until it reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3. Therefore, when the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3, the display of the third decorative pattern 33 displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (f). At the same time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 that have been displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. The first decorative symbols 31 and the second decorative symbols 32 that have been erased are erased, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'moves to the original position. In this way, by moving the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ and displaying the display contents of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the player can display the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. It can be seen as if the content of is transferred to the liquid crystal display device 3.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is positioned below the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device is placed in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. You may control to arrange | position at least one part of 3 '. In addition, after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ displays the liquid crystal display only after the player operates the operation buttons. When the player moves in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation button or the like, the decorative design is transferred from the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ to the liquid crystal display device 3 as described above. You may make it not produce.

  Even after the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the non-deterministic display state is maintained for the first special symbol for a predetermined time (the first special symbol variation state). While the square mark displayed in the display area 3E is maintained in a black display state), the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the state of fluctuation fluctuation display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (g), the first special symbol is also stopped (the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from black to white), and the liquid crystal display device 3 The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen.

  As described above, according to the above modification of the present embodiment, the third decorative symbol 33 that combines the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. However, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ can prevent the variation process of each decorative symbol from being lost.

  In the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and a normal symbol, a normal symbol hold number, a special symbol hold number, or the like may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to secure a larger space for displaying other effect images of the decorative design on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. The initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be oblique with respect to the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship that combines the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

  FIG. 139 shows a modified example of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and either one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed). When the decorative design 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (in this example, “123”) that is not the big hit mode, the first decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32 as shown in FIG. 139 (b). And the third decorative pattern 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined to be the specific effect pattern, and the combined effect is performed regardless of this.

  FIG. 140 shows another modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 140A, the liquid crystal display device is displayed while the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. 3 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 3 (for example, a text message such as “button push!”), And when the player operates the operation button, the message shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displayed. The combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 as shown in FIG. 6 is performed, and the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  FIG. 141 shows another modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed (for example, Message 34 indicating a command to the player (for example, a text message such as “Stop with the same symbol !!”) on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed. As a result of the player operating the operation button (s) so that the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 that is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with its decorative symbol (for example, “113”), as shown in FIG. 34 (for example, a text message such as “achievement!”) Is displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. The third decorative pattern 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the variable display is started again there. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 is matched with the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing and the operation order of the player's operation buttons, etc. Regardless, it may be determined according to other conditions. In the case of determining according to the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether or not the player has operated the operation button, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the operation button itself, and the like.

  FIG. 142 shows another modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped (for example, Message 34 indicating the command to the player (for example, “pull the lever to display the A symbol in a stopped state!”) On the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed). As a result of the player operating the lever (the lever that can be operated by the player in the front-rear or left-right direction) so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”, the first decorative symbol 31 is When the display is stopped with the symbol “A”, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), a message 34 (for example, “achievement!”) Indicating that the command has been achieved is displayed on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed). Here, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed. The third decorative pattern 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the variable display is started again there. Here, whether or not to stop the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 with the symbol “A” may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and is related to such an operation. It may be determined according to other conditions. In the case of determining according to the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether or not the player has operated the lever, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the lever itself, and the like.

  In the modification shown in FIGS. 139 to 142 described above, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined and displayed, the period of the combined display can be defined by various methods. For example, it may straddle a plurality of special symbols, until one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are finished, or until a big hit game is executed. The predetermined operation means may be operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various design changes can be made.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the start of variation of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first start memory and the start of variation of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second start memory are within a predetermined period. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in combination when triggered by the fact that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying this condition are determined as the specific effect patterns. However, various other conditions can be adopted as an opportunity for such a combined display. For example, when a predetermined lottery (random lottery, etc.) is performed and this lottery is won, the effect pattern of one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed to the big hit variation effect (or a specific loss) (Variation effect), when the jackpot information is included in the start-up memory related to the special symbol (decoration symbol) for which the variation display is not started, or one of the first ornament symbol 31 and the second ornament symbol 32, or Various triggers are conceivable, for example, in the case of shifting to a predetermined winning (surprise or small hit) after the end of both variable displays. In addition, there are various timings for the decorative symbols to merge, such as when the decorative symbols are variably displayed at the same time, when one of the decorative symbols is variably displayed, and when both decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The right timing can be considered.

  Also, based on the fact that one of the above-mentioned combined display triggers has been established, combining and separation (erasing the third decorative symbol 33 and displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 again) are performed. It can also be controlled so as to be repeated several times. Also, a decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol may be provided, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol may be combined. Further, in the state where the combined display is being performed, when the stop display is made in the big hit mode, it may be possible not to return to the original (not to separate) and not display the lost symbol. Still further, a first special symbol variation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped is displayed, and a second corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. The second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether the special symbol 231 is variably displayed or stopped is displayed as a variation display state relating to the decorative symbol, and these special symbol variation state displays. It is possible not to provide the regions (3E, 3F).

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter referred to as a sixth embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit symbol determination table]
In the sixth embodiment, the same tables as the jackpot determination table and the jackpot symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 are used, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. In the big hit determination table, it is detected by the first start opening entrance sensor 141 and the second start opening entrance sensor 142 that a game ball has won one of the first start opening 14A and the second start opening 14B. With this as a trigger, it is referred to when a big hit lottery with a special symbol is performed based on a big hit determination random number. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and determines a stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number. It is what is referred to when doing.

[Decoration design table]
In the sixth embodiment, a table similar to the decorative symbol determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is used, and thus detailed description regarding these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72. Different tables are used for the decorative symbol determination table depending on the determination result of the jackpot type. For example, when the determination result of the big hit type is 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 4R normal big hit, or loss, a decorative symbol determination table corresponding to each determination result is used. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but a different decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. May be.

  In the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the corresponding decorative design is based on the decorative design determining random number extracted from the decorative design determining random number counter updated by the random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing. With reference to the determination table, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined. Further, in this example, the decorative design determining random number can take any value among 900 from 0 to 899. In the sixth embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 include three symbols, i.e., a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, each representing a number.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, the probability that “777” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and then, the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high. ing. Here, if a decorative symbol other than “777” is determined in the case of 15R probable big hit, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.) A notification that the 15R probability variation is a big hit is made. In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and the decorative symbol “777” is set not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, if a decorative symbol other than “333” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.) A notification that the 8R probability variation big hit is made is made. In the case of 4R probability variation big hit, the probability that a symbol composed of odd numbers (“111”, “555”, “999”) is determined as a decorative symbol is set high (however, “333”, The decorative pattern “777” is set not to be selected). Here, after the display of the determined decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), a notification that the 4R probability variation big hit is given. In the case of 4R normal big hit, there is a high probability that symbols (“222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) composed of even numbers are determined as decorative symbols, “333” and “777”. The decoration symbol "" is set not to be selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers “0” to “9” are determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and the decorative symbol is configured by these three symbols. 120 and 121, when “777” in which each symbol is “7” is a decorative symbol depending on the contents of the decorative symbol determination table as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, the 15R probability variable big hit is confirmed, and each symbol is “ When “333” aligned with “3” is a decorative symbol, 8R probability variation big hit or more is confirmed, and when a decorative symbol with three numbers other than the above is confirmed, 4R normal big hit or larger is confirmed. Here, the reason why the 8R probability variation big hit or more is determined is that there is a possibility of promotion to a probability variation big hit having a larger number of rounds than 8R (that is, a 15R probability variation big hit). Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal big hit or more is determined is that there is a possibility of being promoted to a 15R positive change big hit, an 8R positive change big hit, or a 4R positive change big hit.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
In the sixth embodiment, the same table as the special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 123 is used, and thus detailed description about these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. The special symbol variation pattern determination table is triggered by the fact that the determination result of the jackpot type is obtained, based on the variation time determination random numbers, the variation pattern, variation time, and the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231, These are referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The random number for changing time used for the lottery of the changing condition is 100 from 0 to 99. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the gaming state is different. However, a different table may be used for each gaming state.

  Further, the data indicating the variation pattern related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 and the variation pattern designation command determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table are stored in a predetermined manner in the main RAM 62. Stored in the area. Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 123 is configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the big hit type by the special symbol, but the big hit type by the special symbol corresponding to each gaming state The variation pattern may be determined based on the determination result. Further, only one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing the special symbol or the gaming state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation gaming state may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table is referred to regardless of the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. Not limited to this, different special symbol variation pattern determination tables may be referred to according to the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table for which a shorter variation time is easily determined as the number of start memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the number of start memories related to the second special symbol 231, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 is determined. The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated in accordance with the determination result of a specific jackpot type in the special symbol variation pattern determination table. However, as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the jackpot type One variation pattern may be associated with each determination result.

[Decoration pattern determination table]
In the sixth embodiment, a table similar to the decorative design effect pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 124 is used, and thus detailed description regarding these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72. The decoration design effect pattern determination table is the contents of the effects on the first decoration symbol 31 and the second decoration symbol 32 based on the effect determination random number when the change pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 is received. Hereinafter, it is also referred to when determining production conditions such as “production pattern”) and production data corresponding thereto. The random number for effect determination used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 pieces of 0-99. In the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table, the time (variation time) during which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed is also defined. This variation time is linked to the variation display of the decorative symbol. It is also the time when other effects are performed. The variation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the variation pattern designation command. That is, the variation times of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 coincide with the variation times of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  In the present embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the specific big hit variation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss variation effect 1 are defined as the specific effect patterns with respect to the first decorative symbol 31 and are specified with respect to the second decorative symbol 32. The reach loss variation effects 2 and 3 are defined as the specific effect patterns. When the specific effect patterns are executed on the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol are displayed. A production (shuffle production) that is related to the program 32 is performed. In this example, although the specific big hit variation effect is not provided in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 124 (b), like the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 124 (a). One or more can be provided. In addition, although this embodiment provides the mechanism which performs a shuffle effect when both of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined as the specific effect pattern, for example, By making one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol correspond to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and making the normal symbol correspond to the other decorative symbol, It is good also as a mechanism which performs a shuffle production based on the relationship with a normal symbol.

[Decoration position change table]
FIG. 143 shows a decorative symbol change position determination table which is referred to in order to determine the decorative symbol change position. The decoration design change position is determined by referring to the decoration design change position determination table based on the position determination random number extracted from the position determination random number counter updated by the random number update process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. The More specifically, based on the position determination random number, the position of any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 from the decorative symbol change position determining table. The position change data that is used to control the decorative symbol variation display, which will be described later, is determined, including a change position that indicates whether or not is changed and data indicating the change position. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are composed of three symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively, each representing a number. It is determined which one of the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is to be exchanged between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this example, in the decorative symbol change position determination table, the change positions are provided for the symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and “1” indicates a change of the symbol position. “0” indicates that the symbol position is not changed. “0” is set when the position of the corresponding symbol is not changed. Here, the random number for position determination can take any one of 19 values from 0 to 18. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 143, when the position determination random number “0” is extracted when determining the change position of the decorative symbol, the change position is “0” for any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The position change data 1 is determined as the position change data. In this case, since the change position is “0” for all symbols, no symbol is changed between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. When the position determination random numbers “1” to “3” are extracted, the change position is determined as “1” for the left symbol, “0” for the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the position is changed as position change data. Data 2 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the left symbol is “1”, the left symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. When the position determination random numbers “4” to “6” are extracted, the change position is determined to be “1” for the left symbol and the middle symbol, “0” for the right symbol, and the position is changed as position change data. Data 3 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the left symbol and the middle symbol is “1”, the left symbols and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are exchanged and displayed at a predetermined timing. . When the position determination random numbers “7” to “9” are extracted, the change position is determined as “1” for the left symbol and the right symbol, “0” for the middle symbol, and the position change is performed as position change data. Data 4 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the left symbol and the right symbol is “1”, the left symbols and the right symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. . When the random numbers for position determination “10” to “12” are extracted, the change position is determined as “1” for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, and the position change data 5 is determined as the position change data. The In this case, since the change position of all the symbols is “1”, all the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. When the position determination random numbers “13” to “15” are extracted, the change position is determined as “1” for the middle symbol, “0” for the left symbol and the right symbol, and the position change is performed as position change data. Data 6 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the middle symbol is “1”, the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are exchanged and displayed at a predetermined timing. When the position determination random numbers “16” to “18” are extracted, the change position is determined to be “1” for the middle symbol and the right symbol, “0” for the left symbol, and the position change is performed as position change data. Data 7 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the right symbol of the middle symbol is “1”, the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and the right symbols are interchanged and displayed at a predetermined timing. .

  In this example, 19 position determination random numbers from 0 to 18 are used, and the change position of the decorative design is determined by the above allocation of the position determination random numbers, but this is only an example. Different positions of random numbers for position determination can be assigned in different manners to determine the decoration pattern change position.

[Control of decorative movement of decorative pattern]
In the present embodiment, the fluctuating operation (that is, shuffle effect) of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled by an actual aspect as shown in FIGS. 144 to 146.

  As shown in FIGS. 144 to 146, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes the first decorative symbol display area 3 </ b> A for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and the second decorative symbol 32. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing variable display and stop display is provided. However, in this example, under a predetermined condition, at least a part of the second decorative symbol 32 may be displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the first decorative symbol display area 3B has the first symbol. At least a part of the decorative symbols 31 may be displayed. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start memory display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as “first start memories”) related to the first special symbol 221 in a mark or indicator format. There is provided a second start memory display area 3D for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as “second start memory”) related to the area 3C and the second special symbol 231 in a mark or indicator format. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start memory display area 3C is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and on the left side, and the second start memory display area 3D is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and arranged on the right side. Is done.

  Moreover, in the example of a series of fluctuation | variation operation | movement shown in FIG.144 and FIG.145, whether the special symbol corresponding to the decoration symbol displayed on 3 A of 1st decoration symbol display areas is variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. The first special symbol variation state display area 3I indicating whether the symbol is stopped and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display region 3B are variably displayed or stopped. 2 Special symbol variation state display area 3J is provided. For example, when a corresponding special symbol is variably displayed in each of these regions, a corresponding mark is lit and displayed. Displayed off. In this example, for the sake of convenience in the drawings, the mark lighting display is represented by a black square mark, and the mark off display is represented by a white square mark. The first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is provided with special symbol variation state display areas (3I, 3J) indicating whether or not the corresponding special symbol is variably displayed. It is also possible to provide display areas each indicating whether or not the symbol is changing.

  Further, as described above, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I indicates whether or not the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is changing. A number indicating whether the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is displayed. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, “1” is displayed in the square mark, while the second decorative symbol is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. When 32 is displayed, “2” is displayed in the square mark. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the first special symbol 221) is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol variation state The square mark displayed in the display area 3I is displayed in white, and the number “1” is displayed in black so that the numeral “1” is visible in the square mark, for example. . Further, for example, when the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the second special symbol 231) is variably displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. The square mark displayed in the change state display area 3I is displayed in black, and the number “2” is displayed in white so that the numeral “2” is visible in the square mark, for example. Is done.

  Similarly, the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J indicates whether the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is changing as described above. A number indicating whether the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is displayed. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, “1” is displayed in the square mark, while the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. When 32 is displayed, “2” is displayed in the square mark. For example, when the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the second special symbol 231) is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol fluctuation state The square mark displayed in the display area 3J is displayed in white, and the numeral “2” is displayed in black so that the numeral “2” is visible in the square mark, for example. . For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the first special symbol 221) is variably displayed, the second special symbol is displayed. The square mark displayed in the fluctuation state display area 3J is displayed in black, and the number “1” is displayed in white so that the numeral “1” is visible in the square mark, for example. Is done.

  The first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the second special symbol variation state display area 3J may not be provided. In this example, the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. It may be arranged at other positions, or another display device may be provided and arranged at a predetermined position of the device.

  In the example shown in FIG. 146, at least a part of the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and at least a part of the second decorative symbol 32 is the first decorative symbol. A shuffle effect is performed so as to be displayed in the display area 3A. Moreover, while showing that such a shuffle effect is performed, the shuffle state display 3L which shows the possibility that the position of the decorative symbol is changed is displayed, the shuffle effect is performed, and the position of the decorative symbol is changed. If there is a possibility that this has been done, the characters “shuffle execution” are displayed in this area. The shuffle state display 3L is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the shuffle state display 3L is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but it may be arranged at another position on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 or another display. A device may be provided and arranged at a predetermined position of the device.

  First, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, respectively. One first start memory is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C, and one second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. Here, in FIG. 144 (b) As shown in the drawing, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are started to be displayed based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start memory display area 3C and the second start memory display area 3D, the numbers of the first start memory and the second start memory subtracted by one when the decorative symbol variation display is started are displayed. In this example, both the first start memory and the second start memory are zero, and as a result, they are not displayed. At this time, with respect to the first decorative symbol 31, the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. The effect data 2 corresponding to one specific big hit variation effect 1 is determined, and for the second decorative symbol 32, the second decorative symbol similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. It is assumed that the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific reach-losing variation effect 2 that is one of the specific effect patterns is determined with reference to the effect pattern determination table.

  In the present embodiment, when both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed according to the specific effect pattern as described above, there is a relationship between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. A characteristic effect (that is, in this example, the display position of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed (the display area is switched), and a shuffle effect) is performed. Note that the shuffle effect may be performed when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are subjected to variable display in a combination other than the effect pattern as described above. Moreover, you may make it perform a shuffle effect not based on the combination of such an effect pattern but based on the decoration symbol to stop-display.

  When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change, a square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and a second special symbol variation state display area 3J are displayed. Each square mark changes from white to black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing. Further, in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I, “1” indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed is displayed, and in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J. In the displayed square mark, “2” indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed is displayed.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined production data, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The effect information 35 composed of characters “shuffled” indicating that the shuffle 32 is being performed is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the effect information display area 3K is configured as one area that covers the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Are both hidden. Further, when the production information 35 “shuffle” is displayed in the production information display area 3K, the square mark and the second special design fluctuation state display area 3J displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I. Each of the square marks displayed on the screen is kept black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are still changing, but the shuffle of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 is Since it is being performed, the display of “1” and “2” is stopped and simply displayed as a black mark.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is erased, and the shuffled decorative symbols are displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B. Is done. At this time, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, which is a non-reachable variation display, “6” is displayed on the left symbol, and “8” is displayed on the right symbol. It is displayed. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, which is a reach-variation display, and “7” is displayed for both the left symbol and the right symbol. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and Although the second special symbol 231 is changing, “2” is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I, and the second special symbol fluctuation state display area In the square mark displayed on 3J, “1” is displayed. As described above, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31 are displayed. This indicates that the display area of the decorative symbol 32 has been changed (that is, the display position of the decorative symbol has been changed) and the state after the shuffle is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect information display area 3K in which the effect information 35 “shuffled” is displayed is arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, so that the first decorative symbol 31 and the first 2 The display position of the decorative symbol 32 is changed and the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B are concealed, but the shutter accessory 40 described in relation to the first embodiment is used. It may be configured such that the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are hidden by appearing on the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 by performing a movable effect or the like. Also, whether or not the display position of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 has been changed by performing a shuffle effect without hiding the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. It is possible to make it visible. Even when the shuffle effect is performed, the display positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be prevented from being changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (e), the non-reach mode variable display of the second decorative pattern 32 in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is terminated and stopped at the decorative symbol “678” (that is, in a lost mode). Is displayed. On the other hand, the reach display of the reach pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is terminated, and the display is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol “777” (that is, in the big hit mode). At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and It is shown that the second special symbol 231 is still changing. Further, “2” is continuously displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I, and “1” in the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J. Is continuously displayed. This indicates that the state after the same shuffle execution is still maintained. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative symbol is not in a fixed display state, the decorative symbol is not displayed as a complete stop, but slightly. It is also possible to configure so as to display such as shaking (swing fluctuation display).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (f), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 including the characters “shuffled” is arranged again, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area are arranged. Both 3Bs are hidden. Here, the shuffle effect is finished, and the change of the display position in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is restored, but the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are shuffled. Even when the display position is not changed, the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 may be arranged at this timing. It is also possible to control so as not to undo the change of the display position in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32.

  At this time, the effect information display area 3K is previously arranged for the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J. In the same manner as in the case of the above, in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J, respectively, "1" "And" 2 "are stopped, indicating that shuffling is in progress.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is deleted, and the decorative symbols are displayed again in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B. At this time, the first decorative symbol display area 3A is stopped and displayed as the symbol “777” of the first decorative symbol 31 (that is, in a big hit mode), and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is displayed as the symbol of the second decorative symbol 32. The display is stopped at “678” (that is, in a lost manner). Such a stop mode of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B immediately before. In comparison, the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B are just switched. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing, but “1” is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I, and the second special symbol variation state is displayed. In the square mark displayed in the display area 3J, “2” is displayed. This is because the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Here, the replacement by the shuffle effect is restored. It is shown that.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J changes from black to white, indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol 231 has ended. . Since “2” is displayed in this mark, it can be seen that the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and it is confirmed by the display of this loss mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I changes from black to white, indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol 221 has ended. Since “1” is displayed in this mark, it can be seen that the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and is confirmed by the display of the big hit mode. In the present embodiment, the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 continues until the corresponding special symbol is stopped.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when “777” in which each symbol is aligned with “7” is a decorative symbol, 15R probability variation big hit is confirmed, and “333” in which each symbol is aligned with “3” is determined. In the case of a decorative symbol, the 8R probability change big hit is confirmed, and in the case of a decorative symbol with three numbers other than the above, the 4R normal big hit is confirmed, but depending on the stop display of such a decorative symbol, the big hit You may make it define a jackpot aspect by another method, without defining an aspect. In the present embodiment, since the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33 are in the same form, even if the position is changed, it is not known whether or not the position has been changed only by confirming the decorative symbol. However, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33 may be configured differently so that it can be determined whether or not the position has been changed simply by confirming the decorative symbol.

  Here, when the decorative symbol “777” is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the 15R probability change big hit is confirmed and the decorative symbol “777” is stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In this case, if it is set to give different values even if the decorative design is the same depending on the display area that is stopped and displayed, as in the case of 4R normal jackpot confirmation, the player can have an interest in gaming. Further improvement. For example, when the decorative symbol “777” is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the 8R probability variation big hit is confirmed and the decorative symbol is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. When “777” is stopped and displayed, it can be set so that the 15R probability variation jackpot is confirmed, and various other settings are made so that the same decorative design is associated with different values depending on the display area to be stopped and displayed. Is possible.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol after 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, and further stop the right symbol after 3 seconds, and the middle symbol It is stopped at a time corresponding to the variation time defined by the production data of the production pattern determined for the decorative design. In this example, the production pattern of the first decorative design 31 is production data 2 and the variation time is 60 seconds, and the production pattern of the second decoration design 32 is production data 22 in this example, and the variation time. Is 50 seconds. Therefore, in the first decorative symbol 31, the left symbol “7” stops 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol “7” stops 6 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and the middle symbol “7” changes. Stop 60 seconds after starting. On the other hand, in the second decorative pattern 32, the left symbol “6” stops 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol “8” stops 6 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and the middle symbol “7” changes. It stops 50 seconds after the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the display area in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed under the predetermined condition is the second decorative symbol display region 3B and the second decorative symbol is displayed. By changing the display area for variably displaying the symbols 32 to the first decorative symbol display region 3A, the display position of the decorative symbols to be displayed on the display region is changed. Therefore, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed. It can be related. Further, as to whether or not the display position of the decorative symbol has been changed, the effect information display area 3K in which the effect information 35 of “shuffled” is displayed is arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, thereby Because the player is difficult or impossible to see, the player can expect a big hit to occur until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and this will change the game, and the player will be able to It leads to improvement of interest. Further, as to whether or not the display positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 have been changed, since the player is difficult or impossible to visually recognize, the first special symbol 221 is stopped and displayed. Nevertheless, it is possible to provide the player with a novel pattern variation mode in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the interest can be improved.

  FIG. 146 shows another modification in which the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled. First, as shown in FIG. 146 (a), in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, respectively. One first start memory is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C, and one second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. Here, in FIG. 146 (b) As shown in the drawing, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are started to be displayed based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start memory display area 3C and the second start memory display area 3D, the numbers of the first start memory and the second start memory subtracted by one when the decorative symbol variation display is started are displayed. In this example, both the first start memory and the second start memory become zero, and as a result, they are not displayed. As in the example shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the first special symbol variation state display region 3I and the second special symbol variation state display region 3J are provided at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 or the like. It may be. At this time, with respect to the first decorative symbol 31, the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. The effect data 2 corresponding to one specific big hit variation effect 1 is determined, and for the second decorative symbol 32, the second decorative symbol similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. It is assumed that the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific reach-losing variation effect 2 that is one of the specific effect patterns is determined with reference to the effect pattern determination table.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined production data, as shown in FIG. 146 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The effect information 35 composed of characters “shuffled” indicating that 32 shuffles are performed is arranged in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the effect information display area 3K is configured as one area that covers the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Are both hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (d), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is erased, and the shuffled decorative symbols are displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B. Is done. The shuffle effect in this modification is different from the example shown in FIGS. 144 and 145 in which the decorative symbols are individually repositioned. The decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is a decorative symbol 36 that has been shuffled. In the non-reach mode, “6” is displayed on the left symbol and “7” is displayed on the right symbol. It is displayed. On the other hand, the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is a decorative symbol 37 that has been shuffled. In the non-reach mode, “7” is displayed on the left symbol and “4” is displayed on the right symbol. Is done. Here, the shuffle state display 3L in which the characters “shuffle execution” are displayed is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. This is because at least some of the symbols in the decorative symbols (36, 37) displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B that are currently displayed are replaced (that is, the decorative symbols are displayed). The display position is changed), indicating that the shuffle effect is being performed. In other words, the decorative design 36 and the decorative design 37 are composed of a part of the first decorative design 31 and a part of the second decorative design 32, respectively.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (e), the variable display in the non-reach mode of the decorative symbol 36 in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is terminated, and the display is stopped with the decorative symbol “657” (that is, in a lost manner). Is done. On the other hand, the variable display in the non-reach mode of the decorative symbol 37 in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is terminated, and the decorative symbol “774” is stopped and displayed in a stopped state (that is, in a lost mode). At this time, the characters “shuffle execution” are continuously displayed in the shuffle state display 3L, indicating that the shuffle effect is still continued. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative symbol is not in a fixed display state, the display is not completely stopped but slightly shaken. It can also be configured to display (swing fluctuation display).

  At this time, although not displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative design 31 is a big hit mode of “777”, the second decorative design 32 is a lost mode of “654”, and the above-mentioned Due to the shuffle effect, the left symbol and the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are respectively replaced, and “657” of the decorative symbol 36 and “774” of the decorative symbol 37 are displayed. It shall be.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (f), the first decorative symbol display is performed with the decorative symbols (36, 37) of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B both stopped and displayed. The left symbol “6” of the decorative symbol 36 displayed in the area 3A and the left symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 37 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B are replaced. In addition, as shown in FIG. 146 (f), this symbol is exchanged between the left symbol “6” of the decorative symbol 36 and the left symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 37 (the interchange is performed). It is also possible to display a two-way arrow 3M indicating that this is done. At this time, the characters “shuffle execution” are continuously displayed in the shuffle state display 3L, indicating that the shuffle effect is still continued. As described above, when the decorative symbols (36, 37) of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B are first stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. The left symbols and the middle symbols were displayed in a swapped state, but this replacement changed to a shuffle effect in which only the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 were replaced. Yes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (g), the first decorative symbol display region 3A is displayed in a state where the decorative symbols (36, 37) of the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B are stopped. The middle symbol “5” of the decorative symbol 36 displayed on the screen is replaced with the middle symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 37 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In addition, as shown in FIG. 146 (g), this symbol is exchanged between the middle symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 36 and the middle symbol “5” of the decorative symbol 37 (the interchange is performed). It is also possible to display a two-way arrow 3N indicating that this is done. As shown in FIG. 146 (h), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in the original stop display state (that is, the first decorative symbol 31 has a big hit of “777” as shown in FIG. 146 (h). The second decorative symbol 32 is returned to the “654” loss mode), the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display region. 3B and the shuffle effect ends. Then, in response to the end of the shuffle effect, the display of the shuffle state display 3L in which the characters “shuffle execution” are displayed is ended. In this state, the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are also stopped. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, when the shuffle effect ends, the effect information display area 3 </ b> K representing the effect information 35 including the characters “in shuffle” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3. It is controlled not to appear on the display screen.

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, in the shuffle effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the position is changed with respect to the individual decorative symbols. After the corresponding display is performed, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are returned to the original state, an effect that the game is actually a big hit is performed, which causes a change in the game, and the player This will lead to an increase in the interest in games.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The description of the same or similar steps as those according to the fifth embodiment is omitted unless otherwise specified. Note that the processing flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 in the sixth embodiment is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. First, the processing flow relating to the control of the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIGS. 144 and 145 will be described.

  The sub CPU 71 is a sub control circuit main process, command reception interrupt process, timer interrupt process, decoration symbol stop process, effect pattern change process, command analysis process, stop symbol determination process, decoration symbol forced stop process, effect pattern determination process Is configured to run. The command analysis process is executed as a sub-control circuit main process subroutine. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern change process are executed as a subroutine of a timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative symbol forced stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. The command reception interrupt process is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
The sub control circuit main process of the present embodiment is the same as the sub control circuit main process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 updates values of a random number counter for effect determination, a random number counter for stop symbol determination, a random number counter for decoration symbol determination, and the like, which will be described later, and also updates the value of the random number counter for position determination.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt process of this embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt process in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. In the timer update process (S7022), the sub CPU 71 updates (subtracts) values set in various timers stored in the work RAM 73, such as a position changeable timer, a position change standby timer, and a position change execution timer described later. )

  Further, the sub CPU 71 performs control for performing a shuffle effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the effect pattern changing process (S7024). The effect pattern change process will be described later in detail.

[Decoration stop processing]
The decorative symbol stop process of this embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol stop process in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 147, as the first step of the effect pattern changing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable flag is on (S8041). When the position changeable flag is off (S8041: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S8044 described later. On the other hand, if the position changeable flag is on (S8041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable timer is 0 (S8042). If the position changeable timer is not 0 (S8042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position changeable timer is 0 (S8042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position changeable flag (S8043), and then ends the effect pattern change process.

  If NO in step S8041, it is determined whether the position change standby flag is on (S8044). When the position change standby flag is off (S8044: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to a process of step S8050 described later. On the other hand, if the position change standby flag is on (S8044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change standby timer is 0 (S8045). When the position change standby timer is not 0 (S8045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the position change standby timer is 0 (S8045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position change standby flag (S8046), turns on the position change execution flag (S8047), and designates the period for maintaining the position change state. A predetermined value is set in the position change execution timer (S8048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the position change execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 10 s is set in the position changeable timer that defines a grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined as the specific effect pattern, and the position change standby timer that waits for execution of the position change is set. A value corresponding to 2 s is set, and here, a value corresponding to 30 s is set in the position change execution timer. Then, since the shortest fluctuation time in the specific effect pattern is 50 s of the specific reach-losing fluctuation effect 2 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the position changeable timer, the position change standby timer, and the position change execution timer is The fluctuation time does not exceed 50 s.

  Sub-CPU71 sets decoration design position change data after step S8048 (S8049), and complete | finishes an effect pattern change process after that. The decorative symbol position change data is data for performing an effect from the start of the position change to immediately before the end of the position change. With this data, the display (shuffle effect) in the position change state of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed, and the shuffle of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. An effect information display area 3K displaying effect information 35 consisting of the characters “shuffled” is displayed, and a shuffle state display 3L in which characters “shuffle execution” is displayed is the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed.

  If NO in step S8044, it is determined whether the position change execution flag is ON (S8050). When the position change execution flag is off (S8050: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, when the position change execution flag is ON (S8050: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change execution timer is 0 (S8051). If the position change execution timer is not 0 (S8051: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position change execution timer is 0 (S8051: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets decoration symbol position change end data (S8052), turns off the position change execution flag (S8053), and ends the effect pattern change process. The decoration symbol position change end data is data for performing effects until the end of the position change. With this data, the display in the position change state of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 ends (end of the shuffle effect), and returns to the decorative symbol variation display and the effect display based on the original effect data. Become.

  As described above, in the effect pattern change process, the contents of the first decoration are determined by determining the contents of the position changeable flag, the position changeable timer, the position change standby flag, the position change standby timer, the position change execution flag, and the position change execution timer. The shuffle effect of the symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled. The position changeable flag is set to ON when the specific effect pattern is determined for either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol by the effect pattern determining process shown in FIG. When the specific effect pattern is determined for the other decorative design when the flag is on (that is, when the specific effect pattern is determined for both decorative designs), the position changeable flag is turned off, The position change waiting flag is turned on. However, in this example, the position changeable timer is controlled so that the position change standby flag does not turn on when the timing for determining the specific effect pattern for both decorative symbols is more than 10 seconds away (the position changeable flag is off). To reset).

  Next, in the effect pattern change processing, when the position change standby flag is set to ON, during that time, the position change standby timer (in this example, 2 seconds) is monitored to become 0, and the shuffle effect is executed. stand by. In the effect pattern change process, when the position change standby timer becomes 0, the position change execution flag is set to ON, and shuffle effects of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are started. The time for the shuffle effect is managed by a position change execution timer (30 seconds in this example).

[Command analysis processing]
The command analysis processing of this embodiment is the same as the command analysis processing in the fifth embodiment shown over FIGS. 131 and 132. Here, in the special symbol variation state display setting process (S7069, S7071, S7079), the sub CPU 71 displays the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the second region displayed on the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. The display of the special symbol variation state display area 3J is controlled. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command or the first special symbol stop command is received, the special symbol variation state display area corresponding to the display area where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. In (3I, 3J), when the data for turning off the mark indicating the special symbol fluctuation state is set and the second special symbol forced stop command or the second special symbol stop command is received, the second special symbol is supported. In the special symbol variation state display area (3I, 3J) corresponding to the display region where the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed, data for turning off the mark representing the special symbol variation state is set.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol variation start command is received, in the special symbol variation state display region (3I, 3J) corresponding to the display region where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, When data for turning on the mark representing the special symbol variation state is set and the second special symbol variation start command is received, the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the display area. In the corresponding special symbol variation state display area (3I, 3J), data for lighting a mark representing the special symbol variation state is set.

[Stop symbol determination processing]
The stop symbol determination process of this embodiment is the same as the stop symbol determination process in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Decorative design forced stop processing]
The decorative symbol forced stop processing of this embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol forced stop processing in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 148, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts effect determination random numbers from the effect determination random number counter (S8111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the random number for effect determination becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S8112). The variation pattern designation command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Then, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). When the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S8112: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S8117 described later. When the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S8112: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines the first decorative symbol effect pattern similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. With reference to the table, the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S8113). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding to them are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern is in the reach mode. ing. That is, if the production pattern shows a loss and reach, the decorative pattern for reach variation set in the stop symbol determination process is used. If the production pattern shows a loss, the decoration pattern is set in the stop symbol determination process. The decorative pattern for changing the lost pattern will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S8114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S8115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of the effect data 2, the effect data 4 and the effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8116). In this example, as a condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (shuffling effect is performed), both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to be rendered with the specific effect pattern. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the first decorative design is the specific effect pattern. When it is not the production data corresponding to the specific production pattern (S8116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the production pattern determination process. If it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8116: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S8121 described later.

  In step S8117, the sub CPU 71 refers to a second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data determined based on the above is set in the work RAM 73. Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding to them are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h13 to h15) in the case where the determination result is “losing”, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern is in the reach mode. ing. That is, if the production pattern shows a loss and reach, the decorative pattern for reach variation set in the stop symbol determination process is used. If the production pattern shows a loss, the decoration pattern is set in the stop symbol determination process. The decorative pattern for changing the lost pattern will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S8118). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S8119).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of the effect data 22 and the effect data 24 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8120). In this example, as a condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (shuffling effect), both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to execute the specific effect pattern. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative design is the specific effect pattern. When the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S8120: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8120: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8121 described later.

  If YES in step S8116 or YES in step S8120, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable flag is on (S8121). If the position change enable flag is on (S8121: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S8124 described later. On the other hand, when the position changeable flag is off (S8121: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag to on (S8122), sets a predetermined value in the position changeable timer (S8123), and then produces an effect. The pattern determination process ends. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this way, the position change display is performed when the effect pattern of the other decorative design is determined to be the specific effect pattern within 10 s after setting the position changeable timer. In this example, the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  If YES in step S8121, the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag to OFF (S8124), clears the position changeable timer (S8125), sets the position change standby flag to ON (S8126), and changes the position. A predetermined value is set in the standby timer (S8127), and then the effect pattern determination process is terminated. Here, by setting the position change standby flag to ON and setting a predetermined value in the position change standby timer, the position change display is in a standby state for the time set in the position change standby timer. Whether or not the position change standby flag is on is determined in step S8044 of the effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 147, where it is determined that the position change standby flag is on, and the position change is performed in step S8045. When the standby timer is determined to be 0, the position change display is started. In this example, the predetermined value set in the position change standby timer is set to a value corresponding to 2 s, but is not limited to this. In this example, when it is determined that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are executed with the specific effect pattern, the position of the decorative symbol is changed (that is, the shuffle effect is performed). However, even if the above condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the position of the decorative symbol not to be changed according to another predetermined condition.

  Next, referring to FIG. 143, FIG. 149 and FIG. 150, a program executed by the sub CPU 71 for another modified example related to the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG. The processing flow will be described. Note that the description of the same or similar steps as those according to the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
The sub control circuit main process of the present embodiment is the same as the sub control circuit main process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. In the random number update process (S7002), the sub CPU 71 updates the values of the effect determination random number counter, the stop symbol determination random number counter, the decoration symbol determination random number counter, and the like, as well as the position determination random number counter and the position change lottery random number. Update the counter value.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 149, as the first step of the effect pattern changing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable flag is on (S811). When the position changeable flag is off (S811: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S8134 described later. On the other hand, when the position changeable flag is on (S811: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable timer is 0 (S8132). If the position changeable timer is not 0 (S8132: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the position changeable timer is 0 (S8132: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position changeable flag (S8133), and thereafter ends the effect pattern change process.

  If NO in step S811, it is determined whether the position change standby flag is on (S8134). When the position change standby flag is off (S8134: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S8143 described later. On the other hand, when the position change standby flag is on (S8134: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change standby timer is 0 (S8135). If the position change standby timer is not 0 (S8135: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the position change standby timer is 0 (S8135: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position change standby flag (S8136), turns on the position change execution flag (S8137), and designates the period for maintaining the position change state. A predetermined value is set in the position change execution timer (S8138). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the position change execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 10 s is set in the position changeable timer that defines a grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined as the specific effect pattern, and the position change standby timer that waits for execution of the position change is set. A value corresponding to 2 s is set, and here, a value corresponding to 30 s is set in the position change execution timer. Then, since the shortest fluctuation time in the specific effect pattern is 50 s of the specific reach-losing fluctuation effect 2 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the position changeable timer, the position change standby timer, and the position change execution timer is The fluctuation time does not exceed 50 s.

  After step S8138, the sub CPU 71 performs a decoration symbol change position determination process (S8139), and determines whether the decoration pattern stop mode after the change is a big hit as a result of the decoration symbol change position determination process (S8140). ). If the stop mode is a big hit (S8140: YES), the process returns to step S8139, and the decorative symbol change position determination process is performed again. In the decorative symbol change position determination process, the position determination random number is extracted from the position determination random number counter. The value of the random number counter for position determination is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub control circuit main process is executed. Next, the decorative symbol change position determination process refers to the decorative symbol change position determination table shown in FIG. 143 and based on the extracted random number for position determination, the corresponding change position (the symbol for changing the position) And position change data for performing the position change is determined. Also, if the decorative pattern stop mode after the change is a big hit, if such a decorative design is displayed as it is, the player will misunderstand that it is a big hit even though it is not a big hit, resulting in confusion. The decorative symbol change position determination process is repeated until the decorative symbol stop mode is determined to be a mode that is not big hit.

  If the decorative pattern stop mode after the change is not a big hit (S8140: NO), position change data of the determined decorative design change position determination table is set (S8141). For example, in the decorative symbol change position determination table of this example, when it is determined that only the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is to be repositioned (replaced), the position change data 2 is When it is determined that only the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are to be repositioned (replaced), the position change data 6 is set. After step S8141, the sub CPU 71 sets decorative symbol position change data (S8142), and then ends the effect pattern change process. The decorative symbol position change data is data for performing an effect from the start of the position change to immediately before the end of the position change. With this data, for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the symbol position change (shuffle effect) is performed based on the position change data of the determined decorative symbol change position determination table. The effect information display area 3K displaying the effect information 35 including the characters “shuffled” indicating that the shuffle 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 are performed is arranged, and the characters “shuffle execution” are displayed. The shuffle status display 3L is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  If NO in step S8134, it is determined whether the position change execution flag is on (S8143). When the position change execution flag is off (S8143: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, when the position change execution flag is on (S8143: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change execution timer is 0 (S8144). When the position change execution timer is not 0 (S8144: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the position change execution timer is 0 (S8144: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets decoration symbol position change end data (S8145), turns off the position change execution flag (S8146), and ends the effect pattern change process. The decoration symbol position change end data is data for performing effects until the end of the position change. With this data, the display in the position change state of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 ends (end of the shuffle effect), and returns to the decorative symbol variation display and the effect display based on the original effect data. Become.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 150, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts effect determination random numbers from the effect determination random number counter (S8151). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the random number for effect determination becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S8152). The variation pattern designation command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Then, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). When the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S8152: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S8157 described later. When the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S8152: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines the first decorative symbol effect pattern similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. With reference to the table, the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S8153). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding to them are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern is in the reach mode. ing. That is, if the production pattern shows a loss and reach, the decorative pattern for reach variation set in the stop symbol determination process is used. If the production pattern shows a loss, the decoration pattern is set in the stop symbol determination process. The decorative pattern for changing the lost pattern will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S8154). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S8155).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of the effect data 2, the effect data 4 and the effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8156). In this example, as a condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (shuffling effect is performed), both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to be rendered with the specific effect pattern. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the first decorative design is the specific effect pattern. When the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S8156: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8156: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8161 described later.

  In step S8157, the sub CPU 71 refers to a second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data determined based on the above is set in the work RAM 73 (S8157). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding to them are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h13 to h15) in the case where the determination result is “losing”, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern is in the reach mode. ing. That is, if the production pattern shows a loss and reach, the decorative pattern for reach variation set in the stop symbol determination process is used. If the production pattern shows a loss, the decoration pattern is set in the stop symbol determination process. The decorative pattern for changing the lost pattern will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S8158). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S8159).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of the effect data 22 and the effect data 24 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8160). In this example, as a condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (shuffling effect), both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to execute the specific effect pattern. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative design is the specific effect pattern. When the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S8160: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8160: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8161 described later.

  If YES in step S8156 or YES in step S8160, it is determined whether the position changeable flag is on (S8161). When the position changeable flag is on (S8161: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S8166 described later. On the other hand, when the position change enable flag is off (S8161: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs a position change lottery process (S8162). In the position change lottery process, a position change lottery random number is extracted from a position change lottery random number counter. The value of the random number counter for position change lottery is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. Next, the position change lottery process determines whether or not the extracted random number for position change lottery is a predetermined value. In this example, the winning probability (probability of a predetermined value) is set to ½. Further, the position change lottery process may be performed based on a random number for position change lottery with reference to a predetermined lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a winning is made in the position change lottery process (S8163). When not winning (S8163: NO), sub CPU71 complete | finishes an effect pattern determination process. When it is elected (S8163: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag to ON (S8164), sets a predetermined value to the position changeable timer (S8165), and then ends the effect pattern determination process. To do. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this way, the position change display is performed when the effect pattern of the other decorative design is determined to be the specific effect pattern within 10 s after setting the position changeable timer. In this example, the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  If YES in step S8161, the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag to OFF (S8166), clears the position changeable timer (S8167), sets the position change standby flag to ON (S8168), and changes the position. A predetermined value is set in the standby timer (S8169), and then the effect pattern determination process is terminated. Here, by setting the position change standby flag to ON and setting a predetermined value in the position change standby timer, the position change display is in a standby state for the time set in the position change standby timer. Whether or not the position change standby flag is ON is determined in step S8134 of the effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 149, and it is determined that the position change standby flag is ON, and the position change is determined in step S8135. When the standby timer is determined to be 0, the position change display is started. In this example, the predetermined value set in the position change standby timer is set to a value corresponding to 2 s, but is not limited to this. In this example, when it is determined that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are executed with the specific effect pattern, the position of the decorative symbol is changed (that is, the shuffle effect is performed). However, even if the above condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the position of the decorative symbol not to be changed according to another predetermined condition.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modified example of the liquid crystal display device and a modified example of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. . Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

[Liquid Crystal Display]
FIG. 151 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 151, in this embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is arranged with the upper position above the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from the initial position until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3. It is configured. On the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, a first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed under a predetermined condition. Further, the liquid crystal display device 3 displays the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, and the effect information 35 made up of characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. When the specific effect pattern is determined for both of the two decorative symbols 32, as shown in FIG. 151 (b), an effect information display area 3K displaying effect information 35 made up of characters “shuffled” is arranged. The effect information display area 3K is arranged so as to cover the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and as a result, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. Become. In addition, when the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed in this way, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be controlled not to be displayed.

  Thereby, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, although the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changing, the changing display cannot be confirmed. On the display screen of the display device 3 ', the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 that are being displayed in a variable manner are displayed. Thus, during the shuffle effect, the first decorative symbols 31 and the second decorative symbols 32 whose positions have not been changed are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '.

  On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is provided with the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display in the state where the effect information display area 3K is arranged. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (c), when the effect information display area 3K is erased, the decorative symbols whose positions are changed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 are the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3A. While being variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 3B, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. That is, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the left symbol “7” and the right symbol “7” are stopped and displayed. Is displayed. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the left symbol “6” and the right symbol “7” are stopped and displayed in a non-reach mode. Further, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed on the upper side, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed on the lower side.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the decorative symbols whose positions are changed as described above are the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B. The decorative pattern “657” of the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the decorative symbol “777” of the first decorative symbol 31 that is a jackpot display is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is displayed. At this time, the two special symbols are variably displayed. Further, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, a first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ are displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is finished. The timing of the stop display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the timing of the stop display are made to coincide with each other by displaying with small fluctuations (swing fluctuation display) instead of the completely stopped display state. It may be.

  Here, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ moves until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 151 (e). Therefore, when the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, as shown in FIG. The displayed first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 previously displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the second decorative symbol display area 3B. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ are erased, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ moves to the original position. In this way, by moving the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ and displaying the display contents of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the player can display the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. Can be displayed as if the position change display is finished.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is positioned below the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device is placed in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. You may control to arrange | position at least one part of 3 '. In addition, after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ displays the liquid crystal display only after the player operates the operation buttons. When the player moves in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation button or the like, the decorative design is transferred from the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ to the liquid crystal display device 3 as described above. You may make it not produce.

  Even after the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, until the corresponding first special symbol 221 and second special symbol 231 are stopped and displayed, The fixed display state is maintained, and during that time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed, for example, in a state of fluctuation fluctuation display. Thereafter, when the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  Thus, according to the modified example of the present embodiment, even if the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 whose positions have been changed are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, By the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, the player can grasp the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 before the position is changed. In addition, the shuffle effect including the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ eliminates the monotony of the game, and as a result, improves the fun of the game.

  Here, as in the example shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the first special symbol variation state display region 3 </ b> I and the second special symbol variation state display region 3 </ b> J are displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. May be provided.

  In the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and a normal symbol, a normal symbol hold number, a special symbol hold number, or the like may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to secure a larger space for displaying other effect images of the decorative design on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. The initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be oblique with respect to the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship that combines the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

  152 shows a modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. FIG. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and either one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed). When the decorative symbol 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (in this example, “123”) that is not a big hit mode, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 as shown in FIG. 152 (b) are displayed. Position change display (shuffle effect) is performed, and effect information 35 consisting of the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined as the specific effect pattern, and the shuffle effect is performed regardless of this.

  FIG. 153 shows another modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the liquid crystal display device is displayed while the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. 3 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 3 (for example, a text message such as “It is a button push!”), And when the player operates the operation button here, FIG. 153 (b) The position change display (shuffle effect) of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 as shown in FIG. 6 is performed, and the effect information 35 consisting of the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. .

  FIG. 154 shows another modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed (for example, Message 34 indicating a command to the player (for example, a text message such as “Stop with the same symbol !!”) on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed. As a result of the player operating the operation button (s) so that the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 that is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with its decorative symbol (for example, “113”), as shown in FIG. 154 (b), a message to the effect that the command is achieved is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. 34 (for example, a text message such as “achievement!”) Is displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the position of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed. Display (shuffle effect) is performed, and effect information 35 composed of characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 is matched with the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing and the operation order of the player's operation buttons, etc. Regardless, it may be determined according to other conditions. In the case of determining according to the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether or not the player has operated the operation button, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the operation button itself, and the like.

  FIG. 155 shows another modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed (for example, Message 34 indicating the command to the player (for example, “pull the lever to display the A symbol in a stopped state!”) On the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed). When the player operates the lever so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed at the symbol “A”. As shown in b), a message 34 indicating that the command has been achieved (for example, a text message such as “achievement!”) is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 155 (c), the positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed. Display (shuffle effect) is performed, and effect information 35 composed of characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. Here, whether or not to stop the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 with the symbol “A” may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and is related to such an operation. It may be determined according to other conditions. In the case of determining according to the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether or not the player has operated the lever, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the lever itself, and the like.

  In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 described above, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in position change, the position change display period can be defined by various methods. . For example, it may straddle a plurality of special symbols, until one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are finished, or until a big hit game is executed. The predetermined operation means may be operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various design changes can be made.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the fluctuation start of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first startup memory and the fluctuation start of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second startup memory are within a predetermined period. When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying this condition have been determined as specific effect patterns, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in a position-changed manner. (Shuffle effect), other various conditions can be employed as an opportunity for such position change display. For example, when a predetermined lottery (random lottery, etc.) is performed and this lottery is won, the effect pattern of one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed to the big hit variation effect (or a specific loss) (Variation effect), when the jackpot information is included in the start-up memory related to the special symbol (decoration symbol) for which the variation display is not started, or one of the first ornament symbol 31 and the second ornament symbol 32, or Various triggers are conceivable, for example, in the case of shifting to a predetermined winning (surprise or small hit) after the end of both variable displays. In addition, as a timing of the position change of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol is variably displayed at the same time, when one decorative symbol is variably displayed, when both decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, etc. Various timings are possible.

  Further, based on the fact that one of the above-described position change display triggers has been established, it is possible to perform control so that the execution of the shuffle effect is repeated a plurality of times. Further, a decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol may be provided, and the position of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol may be changed. In addition, in the state where the position change display is being performed, when the stop display is made in a big hit manner, it may be possible not to return to the original state (so as not to end the shuffle effect). Still further, a first special symbol variation state display area 3I indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped and the second special symbol 32 corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed. The second special symbol variation state display area 3J indicating whether the special symbol 231 is variably displayed or stopped is displayed as a variation display state relating to the decorative symbol, and these special symbol variation state displays. The region (3I, 3J) may be omitted.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter referred to as a seventh embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit symbol determination table]
In the seventh embodiment, the same tables as the jackpot determination table and the jackpot symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 are used, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. In the big hit determination table, it is detected by the first start opening entrance sensor 141 and the second start opening entrance sensor 142 that a game ball has won one of the first start opening 14A and the second start opening 14B. With this as a trigger, it is referred to when a big hit lottery with a special symbol is performed based on a big hit determination random number. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and determines a stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number. It is what is referred to when doing.

[Decoration design table]
In the seventh embodiment, the same table as the decorative symbol determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is used, and thus detailed description about these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72. Different tables are used for the decorative symbol determination table depending on the determination result of the jackpot type. For example, when the determination result of the big hit type is 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 4R normal big hit, or loss, a decorative symbol determination table corresponding to each determination result is used. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but a different decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. May be.

  In the seventh embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the corresponding decorative design is based on the decorative design determining random number extracted from the decorative design determining random number counter updated by the random number update processing of the sub-control circuit main processing. With reference to the determination table, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined. Further, in this example, the decorative design determining random number can take any value among 900 from 0 to 899. In the seventh embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 include three symbols, i.e., a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, each representing a number.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, the probability that “777” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and then, the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high. ing. Here, if a decorative symbol other than “777” is determined in the case of 15R probable big hit, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.) A notification that the 15R probability variation is a big hit is made. In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and the decorative symbol “777” is set not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, if a decorative symbol other than “333” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.) A notification that the 8R probability variation big hit is made is made. In the case of 4R probability variation big hit, the probability that a symbol composed of odd numbers (“111”, “555”, “999”) is determined as a decorative symbol is set high (however, “333”, The decorative pattern “777” is set not to be selected). Here, after the display of the determined decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), a notification that the 4R probability variation big hit is given. In the case of 4R normal big hit, there is a high probability that symbols (“222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) composed of even numbers are determined as decorative symbols, “333” and “777”. The decoration symbol "" is set not to be selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers “0” to “9” are determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and the decorative symbol is configured by these three symbols. 120 and 121, when “777” in which each symbol is “7” is a decorative symbol depending on the contents of the decorative symbol determination table as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, the 15R probability variable big hit is confirmed, and each symbol is “ When “333” aligned with “3” is a decorative symbol, 8R probability variation big hit or more is confirmed, and when a decorative symbol with three numbers other than the above is confirmed, 4R normal big hit or larger is confirmed. Here, the reason why the 8R probability variation big hit or more is determined is that there is a possibility of promotion to a probability variation big hit having a larger number of rounds than 8R (that is, a 15R probability variation big hit). Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal big hit or more is determined is that there is a possibility of being promoted to a 15R positive change big hit, an 8R positive change big hit, or a 4R positive change big hit.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
In the seventh embodiment, since the same table as the special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 123 is used, detailed description regarding these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. The special symbol variation pattern determination table is triggered by the fact that the determination result of the jackpot type is obtained, based on the variation time determination random numbers, the variation pattern, variation time, and the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231, These are referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The random number for changing time used for the lottery of the changing condition is 100 from 0 to 99. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the gaming state is different. However, a different table may be used for each gaming state.

  Further, the data indicating the variation pattern related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 and the variation pattern designation command determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table are stored in a predetermined manner in the main RAM 62. Stored in the area. Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 123 is configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the big hit type by the special symbol, but the big hit type by the special symbol corresponding to each gaming state The variation pattern may be determined based on the determination result. Further, only one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing the special symbol or the gaming state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation gaming state may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table is referred to regardless of the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. Not limited to this, different special symbol variation pattern determination tables may be referred to according to the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table for which a shorter variation time is easily determined as the number of start memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the number of start memories related to the second special symbol 231, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 is determined. The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated in accordance with the determination result of a specific jackpot type in the special symbol variation pattern determination table. However, as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the jackpot type One variation pattern may be associated with each determination result.

[Decoration pattern determination table]
FIG. 156 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the seventh embodiment. 156 (a) shows a first decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first decorative design 31, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a second decorative design effect pattern determination table corresponding to the second decorative design 32. Shows the table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decoration symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b) is triggered by the fact that the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 has been received, and is based on the effect determination random number. This is referred to when determining the effect conditions such as the effect content (hereinafter also referred to as “effect pattern”) for the symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and the effect data corresponding thereto. The random number for effect determination used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 pieces of 0-99. In the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), the time (variation time) during which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed is also defined. However, this variation time is also a time during which other effects linked to the variation display of the decorative symbol are executed. The variation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the variation pattern designation command. That is, the variation times of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 coincide with the variation times of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (a), when “h0” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 60 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted. Then, the big hit variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73, while the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted. The specific big hit variation effect 1 is determined, and the corresponding effect data 2 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h1” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “97” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 3 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “98” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 4 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h2” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, Corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h3” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 4 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h4” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 5 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h5” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 6 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 8 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determining random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the big hit variation effect 7 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 9 is Set in the work RAM 73. When “h6” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 20 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h7” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content. Corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h8” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect contents, When the corresponding effect data 12 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach lose variation effect 2 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 13 is stored in the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach-losing variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (b), when “h9” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 50 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. Then, the big hit variation effect 8 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h10” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 90 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 9 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h11” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 10 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h12” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 11 is determined as the effect contents, Corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h13” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content. When the corresponding effect data 19 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 20 is Set in the work RAM 73. When “h14” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “94” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect contents. When the corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “95” to “99” are extracted, the specific loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 22 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h15” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 90 s, and when the random numbers “0” to “90” for determining the effect are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the reach lose variation effect 5 is determined as the effect contents, and the corresponding effect data 24 is Set in the work RAM 73.

  In the present embodiment, the specific big hit variation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss variation effect 1 are defined as the specific effect patterns for the first decorative symbol 31, and the specific lose variation variation 1 is specified for the second decorative symbol 32. When the specific effect pattern is executed in the second decorative design 32 and then the specific effect pattern is executed in the first decorative design 31 within a predetermined period, the first decorative design 31 and the second design pattern are defined. An effect (additional display effect of a decorative design) related to the decorative design 32 is performed. In this example, the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 156 (b) is not provided with the specific big hit variation effect, but like the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 156 (a). In addition, one or more specific big hit variation effects can be provided. In the present embodiment, as described above, when both of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined as the specific effect pattern, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed. Although a mechanism is provided, for example, one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is made to correspond to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the normal symbol with respect to the other decorative symbol. It is good also as a mechanism which performs the additional display effect of a decoration symbol based on the relationship between a special symbol and a normal symbol.

[Additional display area determination table]
FIG. 157 shows an additional display area determination table used in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 157 (a) shows a table for determining an additional display area at the time of big hit, which is referred to when the big hit type determination result is a big hit, and FIG. 157 (b) shows a case where the big hit type determination result is lost. The table for determining an additional display area at the time of losing is shown. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  The additional display area determination table shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b) is a decorative pattern in the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 in the effect pattern determination process described later executed by the sub CPU 71. When the combination (display area additional pattern) of the above is a predetermined combination, the reference is made when determining the corresponding additional display area determining data based on the display area additional pattern and the additional display area determining random number It is. The additional display area determination data defines the mode of the change of the first decorative symbol 31 and the additional display of the decorative symbol, and an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed based on the determined additional display region determining data. Is called. There are three additional display area determination random numbers 0-2. In addition, the display area addition pattern and the aspect of the additional display effect of the decorative design based on the additional display area determination data will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the display area addition pattern is pattern 1, when additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, they are added as corresponding additional display area determination data. When the display area determining data 1-1 is determined and the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73, when the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the corresponding additional display area determining data is determined. The additional display area determination data 1-2 is determined as data, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 2, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 2-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 2-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 2-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 3, when additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, additional display area determination data 3-1 is determined as corresponding additional display area determination data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73, and when the additional display area determination random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 3- 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 4, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 4-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 4-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 4-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 5, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 5-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 5-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 5-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), when the display area addition pattern is pattern 6, when additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, they are added as corresponding additional display area determination data. When the display area determining data 6-1 is determined and the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73, when the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the corresponding additional display area determining data 6-1 is determined. The additional display area determination data 6-2 is determined as data, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 7, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 7-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 7-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data, When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 7-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data, The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 8, when additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, additional display area determination data 8-1 is determined as corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 8- 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 9, when additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, additional display area determination data 9-1 is determined as corresponding additional display area determination data. The additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73, and when the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 9- 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is the pattern 10, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 10-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 10-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data, When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 10-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is the pattern 11, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 11-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 11-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 11-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data, The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73.

[Prerequisites for additional display effects]
Next, the premise of the additional display effect executed in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 (a) shows a basic decorative symbol display mode, and FIG. 158 (b) shows a decorative symbol display area for explaining the premise of the additional display effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 158 (c) shows a modification of the additional display effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 158 (d) shows another modification of the additional display effect in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol 32 for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 are displayed. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing variable display and stop display is provided. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. When the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 constituted by a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, respectively, Become.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a second decorative design in addition to the first decorative design display area 3A and the second decorative design display area 3B shown in FIG. 158 (a). An additional display area 3P is arranged below the display area 3B. In the additional display area 3P, a decorative symbol 38 is displayed. In this example, the decorative symbol 38 is composed of three symbols (third decorative symbol 33) of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. However, it is not necessary to display all the symbols. For example, the symbols may be composed of only the left symbol, or may be composed of the middle symbol and the right symbol. Further, the display areas 3Q-1 to 3Q-5 shown in FIG. 158 (b) correspond to the display lines 1 to 5, respectively, and at least one of these can be configured as the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. . Each of these third decorative symbol display areas 3Q includes at least a portion of the first decorative symbol 31, at least a portion of the second decorative symbol 32, and (the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol). It is composed of one or a plurality of third decorative symbols 33 (displayed in an additional display area 3P different from the symbol 32). For example, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1 corresponding to the display line 1 is a display area extending vertically on the left side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The left symbol of the decorative symbol 31, the left symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display region 3P). Is displayed. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 corresponding to the display line 2 is a display area extending vertically through the center of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. 31 middle symbols, a second decorative symbol 32 middle symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and a third decorative symbol 33 (a middle symbol displayed in the additional display area 3P) are displayed. The The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3 corresponding to the display line 3 is a display area extending vertically on the right side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. 31 right symbol, the right symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display region 3P) are displayed. The The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4 corresponding to the display line 4 is a display area that extends obliquely from the upper left side to the lower right side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display region 3P) ) Is displayed. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5 corresponding to the display line 5 is a display area extending obliquely from the upper right side to the lower left side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display region 3P) ) Is displayed. In FIG. 158 (b), each of the first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, and the third decorative symbol 33 is indicated by a down arrow indicating a variable display, but stopped. In this case, for example, any number from “0” to “9” is displayed. In any third decorative design display area 3Q, the third decorative design 33 becomes the same number as the first decorative design 31 or the second decorative design 32, or the first decorative design 31, the second decorative design 32, and the second decorative design display area 3Q. All the symbols of the three decorative symbols 33 may have the same number (for example, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is “7” and the second decorative symbol is 32, the middle symbol is “7”, and the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 is “7”).

  When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned third decorative symbol display area 3Q is formed. When the three decorative symbols displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q are displayed in a predetermined combination mode, a big hit is obtained. . In this example, the third decorative symbol display areas 3Q-1 to 3Q-5 are display areas corresponding to the straight display lines 1 to 5, respectively, but are formed by display lines having other shapes. May be. For example, display lines having various shapes such as a V shape, a Z shape, and an L shape can be set. Further, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, two or more symbols of the first decorative symbols 31 can be included (the same applies to the second decorative symbol 32 and the decorative symbol 38).

  Moreover, on the premise of the additional display effect in this embodiment, basically, the same display area as the additional display area 3P, such as the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-6, is set, and each symbol is stopped and displayed there. However, such a configuration is also possible. In this case, for example, a big hit is determined by stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative symbol in the third decorative symbol display region other than the third decorative symbol display region 3Q-6, but the third decorative symbol display region 3Q- Depending on the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in FIG. Examples of the benefits to be granted include the presence / absence of probability change, the presence / absence of time reduction, and the number of rounds. For example, if all the decorative symbols displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-6 are “7”, it is a probable big hit, and if all the decorative symbols are “4”, it is a normal big hit and a difference is provided in the profit to be given. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (c), in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the additional display area 3P are arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Furthermore, a partition, a space for partitioning, or a display can be provided between the display regions and between the symbols in the display region. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, the symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, which is a reach mode (reach display mode). The third decorative symbol (decorative symbol 38) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. Accordingly, in the additional display area 3P, when there is one third decorative symbol 33 to be displayed, any one of “0” to “9” is displayed in one of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, Others are not displayed. Further, when there are two third decorative symbols 33 to be displayed, any one of “0” to “9” is displayed in two of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the others are not displayed. However, even in such a case, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), all the symbols (that is, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are displayed on the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P. May be.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (d), before the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B are stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the decorative design 38 in the additional display area 3P may be stopped and displayed so that the fact that the first decorative design 31 or the second decorative design 32 is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode may be notified first.

[Additional display effects for decorative designs]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, the decorative symbol additional display effect is produced in any manner according to the determination result of the jackpot type, the display area additional patterns 1 to 11 and the additional display area determining random number. Decide what to do. Here, with reference to FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, it will be described in what manner an additional display effect of a decorative design is performed in each case. In the additional display effect in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is changed, and the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P is added and displayed.

  FIG. 159 shows an additional display effect of the decorative symbol when the determination result of the jackpot type is a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), in the display area addition pattern 1, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbols arranged in the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol, and the left symbol in the middle symbol This is a case where the symbol (“A”) is different from the symbol, and the right symbol is in a losing manner that is a symbol (“B”) different from the left symbol and the middle symbol. In the present embodiment, numbers “0” to “9” are displayed as the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In FIG. 159, for convenience, “●”, “★”, “A” ”And“ B ”, and the same symbol represents the same arbitrary number, and the numbers represented by different symbols are different from each other. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 1, the additional display region determination data 1-1 is obtained by lottery based on the additional display region determination random number. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 1-2. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 1-1 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative pattern 31 from “●” to “★” and the additional display area. “●” is displayed on the left symbol of the 3P decoration symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-1. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 1-2 is changed by changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★”. “●” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-1.

  In the display area addition pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. In addition, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbols arranged in the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol, This is a case where the symbol (“A”) is different from the symbol, and the right symbol is in a losing manner that is a symbol (“B”) different from the left symbol and the middle symbol. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 2, the additional display region determining data 2- 1 is determined to perform any of the additional display effects represented by 1, the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 2-2, and the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 2-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative pattern 31 from “●” to “★” and adds the additional display area. “●” is displayed on the left symbol and the middle symbol of the 3P decoration symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the big hit mode is displayed. In this example, two “●” are displayed on the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P, so that there are two or more display lines that are displayed in the big hit mode in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. However, in such a case, only one “●” can be displayed, and the other “●” can be displayed with a symbol different from “●”. In addition, which symbol “●” is displayed on may be determined by lottery. The display method of “●” is the same for all the display area addition patterns for the subsequent big hits. Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-2 is changed by changing the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★”. “●” is displayed on the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-4 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the big hit mode is displayed. Further, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-3 is changed by changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” as shown in FIG. 159 (b). “●” is displayed in the middle symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (c), in the display area addition pattern 3, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbols arranged in the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol, and the right symbol in the left symbol This is a case where the symbol (“A”) is different from the symbol, and the middle symbol is in a lost mode that is a symbol (“B”) that is different from both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 3, the additional display region determining data 3- It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 3-2. As shown in FIG. 159 (c), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 3-1 changes the left design of the first decorative design 31 from “●” to “★” and adds the additional display area. “●” is displayed in the right symbol of the 3P decoration symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-3. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 3-2 is changed by changing the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★”. “●” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-3.

  In the display area addition pattern 4, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. And the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbols arranged in the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol and the middle symbol, and the right symbol , The case where it is in a lost mode that is a symbol (“A”) different from the left symbol and the middle symbol is shown. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 4, the additional display region determining data 4- 1 is determined to perform any of the additional display effects represented by 1, the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 4-2, and the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 4-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 159 (d), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative pattern 31 from “●” to “★” and adds the additional display area. “●” is displayed on the left symbol and the middle symbol of the 3P decoration symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the big hit mode is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-2 is changed by changing the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★”. “●” is displayed on the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-1, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the big hit mode is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-3 is changed by changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★”. “●” is displayed on the left symbol and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-1 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (e), in the display area addition pattern 5, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbols arranged in the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol , The case where it is a losing aspect which is a symbol (“A”) different from the middle symbol and the right symbol is shown. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 5, the additional display region determination data 5- 1 is determined to perform any one of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 5-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 5-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 159 (e), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative pattern 31 from “●” to “★” and adds the additional display area. “●” is displayed in the middle symbol and the right symbol of the 3P decoration symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3. Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (e), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-2 is performed by changing the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★”. “●” is displayed on the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-3, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the big hit mode is displayed. Further, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-3 is added while changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” as shown in FIG. 159 (e). “●” is displayed in the middle symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and finally the third decorative pattern is displayed before the big hit pattern is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4.

  FIG. 160 shows an additional display effect of decorative symbols when the determination result of the big hit type is a loss. In the display area addition pattern 6, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the pattern is a lost pattern which is the symbol (“▲”), and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol. And the same symbol (“●”) as the right symbol, and the middle symbol is a symbol (“A”) different from the left symbol, and in the right symbol, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 for both the left symbol and the middle symbol. The figure shows a case of a losing mode that is a symbol (“B”) different from (“▲”). In the present embodiment, numbers “0” to “9” are displayed as the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In FIG. 160, for convenience, “●”, “★”, “▲” are displayed. ”,“ A ”, and“ B ”, and the same symbol represents the same arbitrary number, and the numbers represented by different symbols are different from each other. The symbol “◇” represents any number other than “●”, and the symbol “□” represents any number other than “▲”. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 6, the additional display region determination data 6-6 is obtained by lottery based on the additional display region determination random number. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 6-2. As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 6-1 changes the middle design of the first decorative pattern 31 from “▲” to “★” and the additional display area. “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In this case, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 need not be changed from “▲” to “★”. Henceforth, it is the same about the same case in the display area addition pattern at the time of loss. On the other hand, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 6-2 is performed by changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” as shown in FIG. “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In this case, it is not essential to change the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★”, but it is meaningful in that the reach mode is not displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. Yes (that is, after making the player think that it is a loss at first glance, let the player pay attention and expect the display of the reach mode in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1). Henceforth, it is the same about the same case in the display area addition pattern at the time of loss.

  In the display area addition pattern 7, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the second symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol. And the same symbol (“●”) as the right symbol, and the left symbol is a symbol (“A”) different from the middle symbol, and in the right symbol, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 for both the left symbol and the middle symbol. The figure shows a case of a losing mode that is a symbol (“B”) different from (“▲”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 7, the additional display region determining data 7- 1 is determined to perform any of the additional display effects represented by 1, the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 7-2, and the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 7-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-1 changes the left design of the first decorative design 31 from “●” to “★” and the additional display area. “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbols, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5 until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In addition, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-2 is changed while changing the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “▲” to “★” as shown in FIG. 160 (b). “◇” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, and the third decorative symbol 33 (decorative symbol 38) is displayed. The left symbol and the right symbol) can be expected to be a big hit. In this example, two “◇” are displayed on the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P, so that there are two display lines for displaying the big hit mode in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. However, in such a case, only one of “◇” can be displayed, and the other “◇” can be displayed with a symbol different from “◇”. In addition, it may be determined by lottery as to which symbol “◇” is displayed. Further, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-3 is changed by changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” as shown in FIG. 160 (b). “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit.

  In the display area addition pattern 8, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, it is a losing pattern that is a symbol (“▲”), and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol. And the same symbol (“●”) as the right symbol, and the left symbol is a symbol (“A”) different from the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 for both the left symbol and the right symbol The figure shows a case of a losing mode that is a symbol (“B”) different from (“▲”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 8, the additional display region determining data 8- It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 8-2. As shown in FIG. 160 (c), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 8-1 changes the left design of the first decorative design 31 from “●” to “★” and the additional display area. “◇” is displayed on the right side of the 3P decorative pattern 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. On the other hand, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 8-2 is changed while changing the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “▲” to “★” as shown in FIG. 160 (c). “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit.

  In the display area addition pattern 9, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the second symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is a middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol. Is the same symbol (“▲”) as the left symbol and is different from the middle symbol (“A”) in the left symbol. In the right symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 are both the left symbol and the middle symbol. The figure shows a case in which the pattern is different from (“●”) (“B”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 9, the additional display region determining data 9- is selected by lottery based on the additional display region determining random number. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 9-2. As shown in FIG. 160 (d), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 9-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative pattern 31 from “●” to “★” and adds the additional display area. “□” is displayed in the middle symbol of the 3P decoration symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. ) Can be expected until it is stopped. On the other hand, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 9-2 is changed by changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” as shown in FIG. 160 (d). “□” is displayed in the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. ) Can be expected until it is stopped.

  In the display area addition pattern 10, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the pattern is a lost pattern which is the symbol (“▲”), and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol. And the same symbol (“●”) as the right symbol, the middle symbol is the same symbol (“▲”) as the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, and the right symbol is different from the left symbol and the middle symbol (“ “A”) is shown in the case of the loss mode. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 10, the additional display region determination data 10-is determined by lottery based on the additional display region determination random number. 1 is determined to perform any of the additional display effects represented by 1, the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 10-2, and the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 10-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 160 (e), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative pattern 31 from “●” to “★” and adds the additional display area. “□” is displayed in the middle symbol of the 3P decoration symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. ) Can be expected until it is stopped. Further, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-2 is changed by changing the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “▲” to “★”. “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. Furthermore, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-3 is added while changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” as shown in FIG. 160 (e). “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P, and “□” is displayed on the middle symbol. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In addition, the reach mode (design “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the big hit until the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. Can be expected. In this example, by displaying two symbols “◇” and “□” on the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display region 3P, two display lines are displayed in the third decorative symbol display region 3Q. In such a case, only one of the symbols (that is, “◇” or “□”) is displayed, and for the other symbol, a symbol different from the symbol is displayed. You can Further, which symbol is to be displayed may be determined by lottery (the same applies to the case of additional display area determination data 11-1 described later).

  In the display area addition pattern 11, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, it is a losing pattern that is a symbol (“▲”), and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol. And the same symbol (“●”) as the right symbol, the middle symbol is the same symbol (“▲”) as the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, and the left symbol is different from the middle symbol and the right symbol (“ “A”) is shown in the case of the loss mode. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region additional pattern 11, the additional display region determination data 11-is obtained by lottery based on the additional display region determination random number. 1 is determined to perform any of the additional display effects represented by 1, the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 11-2, and the additional display effects represented by the additional display area determination data 11-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 160 (f), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative pattern 31 from “●” to “★” and adds the additional display area. “□” is displayed in the middle symbol of the 3P decoration symbol 38 and “◇” is displayed in the right symbol. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. ) Can be expected until it is stopped. In addition, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and a big hit can be expected until the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. In addition, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-2 is changed as shown in FIG. 160 (f) by changing the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “▲” to “★”. “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. Further, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-3 is changed by changing the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” as shown in FIG. 160 (f). “□” is displayed in the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. ) Can be expected until it is stopped.

  In this embodiment, in order to change a part of the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the original symbol is replaced by the number represented by the symbol “★”. Two or more symbols may be replaced. Alternatively, part or all of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B may be replaced with a number represented by the symbol “★”. Then, it is possible to replace all of the first decorative symbol 31 and all of the second decorative symbol 32 using a maximum of six numbers represented by the symbol “★”, but the symbol “★” does not become a big hit mode depending on the symbol. It is desirable to replace “ Further, the number to be replaced with the number represented by the symbol “★” and the position of the symbol to be replaced can be determined by lottery. It is also possible to perform replacement with two or more different numbers. The display area addition patterns shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 are not limited, and other patterns can be set, and additional display area determination data (additional data) corresponding to each display area addition pattern can be set. Various types of display effects can also be set.

[Control of decorative movement of decorative pattern]
In the present embodiment, the fluctuating operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 (that is, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol) is controlled by an actual aspect as shown in FIGS. 161 to 162. It has become.

  161 and 162, in the example of the series of changing operations, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and the first decorative symbol display region 3A. A second decorative symbol display area 3 </ b> B for performing variable display and stop display of the two decorative symbols 32 is provided. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start memory display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as “first start memories”) related to the first special symbol 221 in a mark or indicator format. There is provided a second start memory display area 3D for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as “second start memory”) related to the area 3C and the second special symbol 231 in a mark or indicator format. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start memory display area 3C is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and on the left side, and the second start memory display area 3D is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and arranged on the right side. Is done.

  The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first special symbol variation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped. The second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the two decorative symbols 32 is variably displayed or stopped is provided. For example, in these regions, variably displayed When the mark is displayed, the corresponding mark is turned on. When the stop mark is displayed, the mark is turned off. In this example, for the sake of convenience in the drawings, the mark lighting display is represented by a black square mark, and the mark off display is represented by a white square mark. The first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the first special symbol variation state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and the second special symbol 231 are variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. The second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changing is provided. You can also.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. One start memory is displayed in the start memory display area 3C, and one second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D, as shown in FIG. 161 (b). In addition, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to be changed based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start memory display area 3C and the second start memory display area 3D, the numbers of the first start memory and the second start memory subtracted by one when the decorative symbol variation display is started are displayed. In this example, both the first start memory and the second start memory are not displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 corresponds to the specific jackpot variation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns with reference to the first decorative effect effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (a). The effect data 2 is determined, and the second decorative design 32 is referred to the second decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is assumed that the corresponding effect data 22 has been determined.

  In the present embodiment, when both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed according to the specific effect pattern as described above, there is a relationship between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. A characteristic effect (that is, in this example, the display of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed and the third decorative symbol is displayed to add a decorative symbol additional display effect) is performed. In addition, when the 1st decoration design 31 and the 2nd decoration design 32 are fluctuate-displayed by combinations other than the above production patterns, you may perform the additional display production of a decoration design. Moreover, you may make it perform the additional display effect of a decoration symbol based on the decoration symbol to stop-display instead of the combination of such an effect pattern.

  Further, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change, a square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and a second special symbol variation state display area 3F are displayed. Each square mark changes from white to black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  In this example, it is assumed that the first decorative symbol 31 is determined to be a specific combination mode (big hit mode) such as “777” and the second decorative symbol 32 is determined to be a loss mode of “773”. . This corresponds to the display area addition pattern 4 at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 159 (d).

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect data, as shown in FIG. 161 (c), the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a second display. A decorative design in which a part of the 1 decorative design 31 (left design) is changed is displayed, and this is a non-reach variation display. “5” is displayed on the left design and “7” is displayed on the right design. (Here, the first decorative symbol 31 is referred to as the first decorative symbol 31 even if part or all of the symbol is changed). That is, the first decorative symbol 31 is the left of the decorative symbol “777” of the first decorative symbol 31 determined based on the additional display region determining data 4-1 in the display region additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d). The symbol is changed from “7” to “5” (if applied to the notation in FIG. 159 (d), “●” corresponds to “7” and “★” corresponds to “5”) . On the other hand, a second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, which is a non-reachable variation display, “7” is displayed on the left symbol, and “3” is displayed on the right symbol. Has been. That is, the second decorative design 32 uses the decorative design “773” of the second decorative design 32 determined as it is based on the additional display region determination data 4-1 in the display region additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d). (If applied to the notation in FIG. 159 (d), “●” corresponds to “7” and “A” corresponds to “3”). At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and It shows that the second special symbol 231 is changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (d), in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the first decorative symbol is determined based on the additional display area determining data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d). The first decorative symbol 31 (decorative decorative pattern “577”) obtained as a result of changing 31 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the second decorative symbol 32 (decorative decorative symbol “773”) is displayed. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and It shows that the second special symbol 231 is changing. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative symbol is not in a fixed display state, the decorative symbol is not displayed as a complete stop, but slightly. It is also possible to configure so as to display such as shaking (swing fluctuation display). Here, as shown in FIG. 161 (e), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, a message 34 (for example, indicating that the current situation is a reach mode) , A text message such as “Reach!” Is displayed. In this message 34, as described above, since the first decorative symbol 31 obtained as a result of changing the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, there is still a possibility that the determination result of the big hit type is a big hit. It indicates to the player that there is something. Further, by this message 34, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area such as the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5 shown in FIG. 158 (b). It is possible to make the player feel that the reach mode is in another display line different from 3B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (f), the decorative design 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P disposed below the second decorative design display area 3B on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. The third decorative pattern 33 is variably displayed. Here, the third decorative pattern 33 is determined based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d), and is displayed in the additional display area 3P. “7” is displayed as the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 (third decorative symbol 33 of the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2), and the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display region 3P (third decorative symbol display region). “7” is determined as the third decorative pattern 33) of 3Q-5 (“●” corresponds to “7” if applied to the notation of FIG. 159 (d)). At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and It shows that the second special symbol 231 is changing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the two third decorative symbols 33 are stopped and displayed in the additional display area 3P. Here, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, the decorative symbol “777” which is a big hit mode is stopped and displayed, and in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the decorative symbol “777” which is a big hit mode is stopped. It will be displayed, and the specific combination aspect in the 1st decoration symbol 31 before a change is reproduced here. In this example, the symbol “7” is displayed only in the third decorative symbol 33 corresponding to the display line that is displayed in the reach mode, but other third decorative symbols (in the example of FIG. 161, the additional display area is displayed). A predetermined number may be displayed on the right design of the decorative design 38 displayed on 3P.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), the third decorative symbol 33 that is stopped and displayed in the additional display area 3P is not displayed, and the original first decorative symbol 31 is not displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The decorative pattern “777” is stopped and displayed. At this time, the stop display of the decorative symbol “773” of the second decorative symbol 32 is maintained in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. It shows that 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative symbol is not in a fixed display state, the decorative symbol is not displayed as a complete stop, but slightly. It is also possible to configure so as to display such as shaking (swing fluctuation display).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F changes from black to white display, indicating that the second special symbol 231 has stopped. Then, it is shown that the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B has reached a fixed display state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from black to white, indicating that the first special symbol 221 has stopped. This shows that the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is in a fixed display state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when “777” in which each symbol is “7” is a decorative symbol, the 15R probability variation big hit is confirmed. In addition, when “333” where each symbol is aligned with “3” is a decorative symbol, 8R probability variation big hit or more is fixed, and when a decorative symbol with three numbers other than the above is fixed, 4R normal big hit is fixed. However, the big hit mode may be determined by other methods without determining the big hit mode according to the stop display of such decorative symbols.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol after 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, and further stop the right symbol after 3 seconds, and the middle symbol It is stopped at a time corresponding to the variation time defined by the production data of the production pattern determined for the decorative design. In this example, the production pattern of the first decorative design 31 is production data 2 and the variation time is 60 seconds, and the production pattern of the second decoration design 32 is production data 22 in this example, and the variation time. Is 50 seconds. Therefore, in the first decorative symbol 31, the left symbol “5” (the symbol changed from “7”) stops 3 seconds after the start of variation, and the right symbol “7” becomes 6 seconds after the variation starts. The middle symbol “7” stops 60 seconds after the fluctuation starts. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol “7” stops 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol “3” stops 6 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and the middle symbol “7” changes. It stops 50 seconds after the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed at the same time in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, The first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, and the third decorative symbol 33 are displayed, whereby the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be related. The third decorative symbol is a display area addition pattern (stopping mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32) when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfy a predetermined condition. To be determined. Even if the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is a big hit, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3A and the second In the display area different from the decorative symbol display area 3B (that is, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, which is another display line), there is a possibility that the reach mode display and the big hit mode stop display may be performed. The expectation that the determination result of the jackpot type is a jackpot can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the seventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same or similar steps as those according to the fifth embodiment is omitted unless otherwise specified. Note that the processing flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 of the seventh embodiment is the same as that described with respect to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. Here, in particular, a description will be given of a processing flow relating to control of the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIGS. 161 and 162.

  The sub CPU 71 is a sub control circuit main process, command reception interrupt process, timer interrupt process, decoration symbol stop process, effect pattern change process, command analysis process, stop symbol determination process, decoration symbol forced stop process, effect pattern determination process Is configured to run. The command analysis process is executed as a sub-control circuit main process subroutine. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern change process are executed as a subroutine of a timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative symbol forced stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. The command reception interrupt process is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
The sub control circuit main process of the present embodiment is the same as the sub control circuit main process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 updates values of an effect determination random number counter, a stop symbol determination random number counter, a decoration symbol determination random number counter, and the like, which will be described later, and updates an additional display area determination random number counter.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt process of this embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt process in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. In the timer update process (S7022), the sub CPU 71 sets values set in various timers stored in the work RAM 73, for example, a display area addition possible timer, a display area addition standby timer, a display area addition execution timer, and the like described later. Update (subtract).

  In addition, the sub CPU 71 performs control for performing an additional display effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the effect pattern changing process (S7024). The effect pattern change process will be described later in detail.

[Decoration stop processing]
The decorative symbol stop process of this embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol stop process in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 163, as the first step of the effect pattern changing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition possible flag is on (S9041). When the display area addition flag is off (S9041: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S9044 described later. On the other hand, when the display area addition possible flag is ON (S9041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition possible timer is 0 (S9042). When the display area addition possible timer is not 0 (S9042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern changing process. If the display area addition timer is 0 (S9042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the display area addition flag (S9043), and then ends the effect pattern change process.

  If NO in step S9041, it is determined whether the display area addition standby flag is on (S9044). When the display area addition standby flag is off (S9044: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S9053 described later. On the other hand, if the display area addition standby flag is on (S9044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition standby timer is 0 (S9045). When the display area addition standby timer is not 0 (S9045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the display area addition standby timer is 0 (S9045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the display area addition standby flag (S9046), turns on the display area addition execution flag (S9047), and specifies the period of the additional display effect. A predetermined value is set in the display area addition execution timer (S9048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the display area addition execution timer is a value corresponding to 40 s. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 1 s is set in the display area addition possible timer that defines a grace period until the first decorative pattern 31 is determined as the specific effect pattern after the second decorative pattern 32, and the display area is added. A value corresponding to 1 s is set in the display area addition waiting timer that waits for execution of the display area, and here, a value corresponding to 40 s is set in the display area addition execution timer. Then, since the shortest variation time in the specific effect pattern is 50 seconds of the specific loss variation effect 1 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the display area addition possible timer, the display area addition standby timer, and the display area addition execution timer. Does not exceed the fluctuation time of 50 s.

  After step S9048, the sub CPU 71 performs an additional display area determination process (S9049). This additional display area determination process extracts an additional display area determination random number from the additional display area determination random number counter, refers to the additional display area determination table shown in FIG. Based on the display area addition pattern (stopping mode of the first decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32), the additional display area determination data to be set is determined. As shown in FIG. 157, in this example, as the additional display area determination table, different tables are used for the big hit and the lost time, but the same table may be used. Further, in this example, the additional display area determination data is the additional display area determination data 1-1 according to the additional display area determination random number and the stop pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. 28 types of data 1 to 11-3 are prepared.

  Next, the determined additional display area determination data is set (S9050), the decorative design data to be changed is set based on the set additional display area determination data (S9051), and the display area additional data is set. (S9052), and then the effect pattern change process ends. The decorative symbol data is data for changing the first decorative symbol 31 and generating the first decorative symbol 31 (see FIG. 161) to be displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, as shown in FIGS. This is data for replacing a symbol (number) represented by the symbol “★” with an existing symbol. Further, the display area additional data is data for performing an effect until immediately before the display area addition state is ended by additionally displaying the third decorative pattern 33 in the additional display area 3P and not displaying the third decorative pattern 33. It is.

  If NO in step S9044, it is determined whether the display area addition execution flag is on (S9053). When the display area addition execution flag is off (S9053: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, if the display area addition execution flag is on (S9053: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition execution timer is 0 (S9054). If the display area addition execution timer is not 0 (S9054: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the display area addition execution timer is 0 (S9054: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets display area addition end data (S9055), turns off the display area addition execution flag (S9056), and ends the effect pattern change process. . The display area addition end data is data for performing effects until the display area addition state ends. With this data, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is returned to the original first decorative symbol 31, and the display of the third decorative symbol 33 displayed in the additional display region 3P is completed. (End of additional display effect), the display returns to the decorative symbol variation display and effect display based on the original effect data.

  As described above, in the effect pattern change process, the contents of the display area addition possible flag, the display area addition possible timer, the display area addition standby flag, the display area addition standby timer, the display area addition execution flag, and the display area addition execution timer are determined. Then, the additional display effect of the decorative design is controlled. The display area addition possible flag is set to ON when a specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative pattern by the effect pattern determination processing of FIG. 164 described later. When this display area addition possible flag is ON, When the specific effect pattern is determined for the first decorative symbol (that is, after the specific effect pattern is determined for the first decorative symbol after the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol), the display area addition possible flag Is turned off and the display area addition standby flag is turned on. However, in this example, after the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol by the display area addition possible timer, the display region is added when the timing for determining the specific effect pattern for the first decorative symbol is longer than 1 second. Control is performed so that the standby flag does not turn on (the display area addition flag is reset to off).

  Next, in the effect pattern change process, when the display area addition standby flag is set to ON, the display area addition standby timer (in this example, 1 second) is monitored to become 0 during that time, and the additional display effect is displayed. Wait for execution. In the effect pattern change process, when the display area addition standby timer becomes 0, the display area addition execution flag is set to ON, and an additional display effect of decorative symbols is started. The time for the additional display effect of the decorative design is managed by a display area addition execution timer (40 seconds in this example).

[Command analysis processing]
The command analysis processing of this embodiment is the same as the command analysis processing in the fifth embodiment shown over FIGS. 131 and 132. Here, the sub CPU 71 displays the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the second region displayed on the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 in the special symbol variation state display setting process (S7069, S7071, S7079). The display of the special symbol variation state display area 3F is controlled. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command or the first special symbol stop command is received, the special symbol variation state display area corresponding to the display area where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. In (3E, 3F), when the data for turning off the mark indicating the special symbol variation state is set and the second special symbol forced stop command or the second special symbol stop command is received, it corresponds to the second special symbol In the special symbol variation state display area (3E, 3F) corresponding to the display region where the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed, data for turning off the mark representing the special symbol variation state is set.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol variation start command is received, in the special symbol variation state display region (3E, 3F) corresponding to the display region where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, When data for turning on the mark representing the special symbol variation state is set and the second special symbol variation start command is received, the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the display area. In the corresponding special symbol variation state display area (3E, 3F), data for lighting a mark representing the special symbol variation state is set.

[Stop symbol determination processing]
The stop symbol determination process of this embodiment is the same as the stop symbol determination process in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Decorative design forced stop processing]
The decorative symbol forced stop processing of this embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol forced stop processing in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 164, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts effect determination random numbers from the effect determination random number counter (S9111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the random number for effect determination becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S9112). The variation pattern designation command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Then, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). When the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S9112: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S9123 described later. When the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S9112: YES), the sub CPU 71 refers to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data determined based on the pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S9113). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding to them are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern is in the reach mode. ing. That is, if the production pattern shows a loss and reach, the decorative pattern for reach variation set in the stop symbol determination process is used. If the production pattern shows a loss, the decoration pattern is set in the stop symbol determination process. The decorative pattern for changing the lost pattern will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S9114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S9115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of the effect data 2, the effect data 4, and the effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S9116). In this example, as a condition for performing the additional display effect of the decorative symbol, since both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to execute the effect by the specific effect pattern, It is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the first decorative design 31 is a specific effect pattern. Further, in this example, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed only when the specific effect pattern determination of the second decorative symbol 32 is performed earlier than the specific effect pattern determination of the first decorative symbol 31 for a predetermined time. Yes. When it is not the production data corresponding to the specific production pattern (S9116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the production pattern determination process. When it is the production data corresponding to the specific production pattern (S9116: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition possible flag is on (S9117).

  When the display area addition flag is off (S9117: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if the display area addition possible flag is on (S9117: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition possible flag to off (S9118), and clears the display area addition possible timer (S9119). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition pattern corresponds to the patterns 1 to 11 as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 from the stop mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. (S9120). When it does not correspond to any display area addition pattern (S9120: NO), sub CPU71 complete | finishes an effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if any of the patterns 1 to 11 is satisfied (S9120: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition standby flag to ON (S9121), and sets a predetermined value to the display area addition standby timer (S9122). ). For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s. Here, by setting the display area addition standby flag to ON and setting a predetermined value in the display area addition standby timer, the additional display effect of the decorative design is in the standby state for the time set in the display area addition standby timer. . Whether or not the display area addition standby flag is on is determined in step S9044 of the effect pattern changing process shown in FIG. 163 described above, where it is determined that the display area addition standby flag is on and in step S9045. When the display area addition standby timer is determined to be 0, an additional display effect of decorative symbols is started. In this example, the predetermined value set in the display area addition standby timer is set to a value corresponding to 1 s, but is not limited to this. In this example, only when the specific effect pattern determination of the second decorative symbol 32 is made earlier than the specific effect pattern determination of the first decorative symbol 31 for a predetermined time, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed. Although the specific effect pattern determination of the first decorative design 31 is made earlier than the determination of the specific effect pattern of the second decorative design 32, an additional display effect of the decorative design may be performed. Further, even when the above condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform control so as not to add the decorative symbol display area according to another predetermined condition.

  In the case of NO in step S9112, in step S9123, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decorative design effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (b) and determines based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command. The rendered effect data is set in the work RAM 73. Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding to them are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h13 to h15) in the case where the determination result is “losing”, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected differs depending on whether or not the effect pattern is in the reach mode. ing. That is, if the production pattern shows a loss and reach, the decorative pattern for reach variation set in the stop symbol determination process is used. If the production pattern shows a loss, the decoration pattern is set in the stop symbol determination process. The decorative pattern for changing the lost pattern will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S9124). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S9125).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S9126). In this example, the condition for performing the additional display effect of the decorative design is determined so that the effect of the specific effect pattern is executed in the second decorative design 32, and then the specific effect pattern in the first decorative design 31 within a predetermined time. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative design is a specific effect pattern. When it is not the production data corresponding to the specific production pattern (S9126: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the production pattern determination process. When it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S9126: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition possible flag to ON (S9127), sets a predetermined value to the display area addition possible timer (S9128), Thereafter, the effect pattern determination process ends. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s. By setting in this way, the first decorative symbol 31 is set within 1 s after setting the display area addition timer (that is, within 1 s after the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol 32). When the effect pattern is determined as the specific effect pattern, an additional display effect of the decorative design is performed. In this example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set. In this example, when the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative pattern 32, the display area addition possible flag is set to ON, but when the specific effect pattern is determined, a lottery is performed, Only when winning in the lottery, the display area addition possible flag may be set to ON to wait for the specific effect pattern to be determined for the first decorative symbol 31.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modification example of the liquid crystal display device and a modification example of the additional display effect of the decorative design will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

[Liquid Crystal Display]
FIG. 165 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 165, in the present embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is arranged with the upper position above the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from the initial position until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3. It is configured. On the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, an additional display area 3P is provided under a predetermined condition, and a decorative design 38 is displayed during an additional display effect of the decorative design. In this example, for the first decorative symbol 31, an effect corresponding to the specific jackpot variation effect 1 that is one of the specific effect patterns is referred to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (a). Data 2 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 corresponds to the specific loss variation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns with reference to the second decorative effect effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (b). It is assumed that the production data 22 to be determined is determined. In this example, it is assumed that the first decorative symbol 31 is determined to be a big hit mode of “666” and the second decorative symbol 32 is determined to be a lost mode of “567”. This corresponds to the display area addition pattern 2 at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. 159 (b), but the additional display effect corresponding to this is the additional display area determination data 2 shown in FIG. 159 (b). Data for determining an additional display area other than -1 to 2-3 is used.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (a), first, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is second. The decorative pattern 32 is displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol 31 is obtained by changing the left symbol “6” of the first decorative symbol 31 to “5” and changing the right symbol “6” to “7”. FIG. 165 (b) The left symbol “5” and the right symbol “7” are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed as it is. In FIG. 165 (b), the left symbol “5” and the right symbol “7” are stopped and displayed. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. It shows that 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol “567” and displayed in the second decorative symbol display region 3B. The displayed second decorative design 32 is stopped and displayed with the decorative design “567”. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. It shows that 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing. Here, a message 34 (for example, a text message such as “reach!”) Is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ indicating that the current situation is the reach mode. In this message 34, as described above, since the first decorative symbol 31 obtained as a result of changing the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, there is still a possibility that the determination result of the big hit type is a big hit. It indicates to the player that there is something.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (d), the decorative design 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, and there are three third decorative designs 33 (of the decorative design 38). The left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) are variably displayed. In the example of FIGS. 161 and 162, the additional display region 3P is arranged below the second decorative symbol display region 3B on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but in this example, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is arranged. The display screen is arranged over almost the entire area. Here, it is assumed that the third decorative symbol 33 is not determined according to FIG. 159 (b) but is determined to be “768”. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. It shows that 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (e), the left symbol “7” and the right symbol “8” of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is variably displayed. In the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the stop display of the decorative symbol “567” and the decorative symbol “567” is maintained, respectively, in the first special symbol variation state display region 3E. The square mark displayed and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F remain black.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (f), the middle symbol “6” of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol “768” is stopped and displayed in the additional display region 3P. It will be. Also at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F remain black. In this state, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P. Are all displayed in the form of a loss, but the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 (in this example, the additional display area 3P is located above the first decorative symbol display area 3A shown in FIG. 158 (b). As shown in FIG. 158 (b), it is assumed that the additional display area 3P is positioned below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and is applied to the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2. ) Is a stop display of the big hit mode of “666” after the display of the reach mode.

  Here, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ moves until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3. Therefore, when the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, as shown in FIG. 165 (g), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 ′ has been displayed in the additional display area 3P until then. The displayed decorative design 38 is deleted, and on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative design 31 displayed in the first decorative design display area 3A is changed to a stop display of the decorative design "666". In the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the decorative symbol “567” of the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed without change. Thereafter, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ moves to the original position. In this way, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is moved, and at a predetermined timing, the decorative pattern “666” which is a specific combination mode configured across the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. Is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the display content of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is affected by the movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'to the player. In response, the first decorative symbol display area 3A can appear as if a big hit mode is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (h), the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are changed from black to white. The first and second decorative symbols 31 and 3B displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A indicate that the change display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the screen is in a determined display state. Although the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a stopped state, a square mark and a second special symbol variation state display displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E. When the square mark displayed in the region 3F is black, it indicates that the displayed decorative symbol is not in a fixed display state in the first decorative symbol display region 3A or the second decorative symbol display region 3B. For this reason, it is possible to configure so that the decorative symbol is not completely stopped and displayed, but slightly swayed (sway fluctuation display).

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is positioned below the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device is placed in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. You may control to arrange | position at least one part of 3 '. In addition, after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ displays the liquid crystal display only after the player operates the operation buttons. When the player moves in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation buttons or the like, an effect as if the sub-liquid crystal display device 3 ′ has affected the liquid crystal display device 3 as described above is performed. It may not be possible.

  As described above, according to the modification of the present embodiment, the additional display area 3P is arranged on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, and the decorative pattern 38 displayed on the display screen 3P is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q is formed by the displayed first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, and the player can display the jackpot mode on the display line corresponding to the display region. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be expected to be a big hit even if they are lost, and such additional display effects including the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ eliminate the monotony of the game. , Which leads to an increase in interest in games.

  Further, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and a normal symbol, a normal symbol hold number, a special symbol hold number, or the like may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to secure a larger space for displaying other effect images of the decorative design on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. The initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be oblique with respect to the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship that combines the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

  FIG. 166 shows a modification of the decorative symbol additional display effect. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 166 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed). When the decorative symbol 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (in this example, “123”) that is not a big hit mode, the combination of these decorative symbols corresponds to the display area addition pattern, and FIG. As shown, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined to be the specific effect pattern, and an additional display effect is performed irrespective of this.

  FIG. 167 shows another modified example of the additional display effect of decorative symbols. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), the liquid crystal display device is displayed while the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. 3 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 3 (for example, a text message such as “It is a button push!”), And when the player operates the operation button, these decorative symbols are displayed. The combination corresponds to the display area addition pattern, and as shown in FIG. 167 (b), an additional display effect of the decorative design is performed, and the decorative design 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P.

  FIG. 168 shows another modification of the decorative symbol additional display effect. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed (for example, Message 34 indicating a command to the player (for example, a text message such as “Stop with the same symbol !!”) on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed. As a result of the player operating the operation button (s) so that the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 that is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with its decorative symbol (for example, “113”), as shown in FIG. 168 (b), a message to the effect that the command has been achieved is displayed on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. 34 (for example, a text message such as “achievement!”) Is displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed. In this case, the combination of these decorative symbols corresponds to the display area addition pattern, as shown in FIG. 168 (c). Then, an additional display effect of the decorative design is performed, and the decorative design 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 is matched with the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing and the operation order of the player's operation buttons, etc. Regardless, it may be determined according to other conditions. In the case of determining according to the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether or not the player has operated the operation button, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the operation button itself, and the like.

  FIG. 169 shows another modification of the decorative symbol additional display effect. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 169 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed (for example, Message 34 indicating the command to the player (for example, “pull the lever to display the A symbol in a stopped state!”) On the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed). When the player operates the lever so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed at the symbol “A” as shown in FIG. As shown in b), a message 34 indicating that the command has been achieved (for example, a text message such as “achievement!”) is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed. In this case, the combination of these decorative symbols corresponds to the display area addition pattern, as shown in FIG. 169 (c). Then, an additional display effect of the decorative design is performed, and the decorative design 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. In this example, since the symbol “A” that is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 31 is a symbol that cannot be a big hit, for example, the variation again at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol 38 is started. Is displayed. Here, whether or not to stop the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 with the symbol “A” may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and is related to such an operation. It may be determined according to other conditions. In the case of determining according to the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether or not the player has operated the lever, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the lever itself, and the like.

  In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 165 to 169 described above, when the decorative design 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P due to the additional display effect of the decorative design, individual symbols of the additional display area 3P and the decorative design 38 are displayed. The display period can be defined in various ways. For example, it may straddle a plurality of special symbols, until one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are finished, or until a big hit game is executed. The predetermined operation means may be operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various design changes can be made.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the start of variation of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first start memory and the start of variation of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second start memory are within a predetermined period. When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying this condition are determined to be the specific effect pattern, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed. Various other conditions can be employed. For example, when a predetermined lottery (random lottery, etc.) is performed and this lottery is won, the effect pattern of one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed to the big hit variation effect (or a specific loss) (Variation effect), when the jackpot information is included in the start-up memory related to the special symbol (decoration symbol) for which the variation display is not started, or one of the first ornament symbol 31 and the second ornament symbol 32, or Various triggers are conceivable, for example, in the case of shifting to a predetermined winning (surprise or small hit) after the end of both variable displays. The timing for performing the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is, for example, when the decorative symbol is variably displayed at the same time, when one decorative symbol is variably displayed, and when both decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Various timings can be considered.

  In addition, based on the fact that one of the above-mentioned triggers has been established, it is possible to perform control such that the execution of the additional display effect of decorative symbols is repeated a plurality of times. Also, a decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is provided, and it is determined whether or not the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is executed based on the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol. Good. In addition, in the state where the decorative symbol additional display effect is being performed, if the display is stopped in a big hit mode, it may not be restored. Still further, a first special symbol variation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped is displayed, and a second corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. The second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether the special symbol 231 is variably displayed or stopped is displayed as a variation display state relating to the decorative symbol, and these special symbol variation state displays. It is possible not to provide the regions (3E, 3F).

1 Pachinko machine 10 Game board 14A First start port (first passage area)
14B 2nd starting port (2nd passage area)
143 Blade member (variable member)
16A 1st grand prize opening 16B 2nd big prize opening 3 Liquid crystal display device (decorative symbol display means)
3A First decorative symbol display area 3B Second decorative symbol display region 31 First decorative symbol 32 Second decorative symbol 22 First special symbol display device (first special symbol display means)
23 Second special symbol display device (second special symbol display means)
221 First special symbol (first identification symbol)
231 Second special symbol (second identification symbol)
40 Shutter role (movable member)
5 display decoration member 6 main control circuit 60 main CPU (first determination means, first special symbol variation pattern determination means, second determination means, second special symbol variation pattern determination means, specific game state transition control means, normal game state Transition control means)
61 Main ROM (first special symbol variation pattern storage means, second special symbol variation pattern storage means)
62 Main RAM (first information storage means, second information storage means)
7 Sub control circuit 71 Sub CPU (first decorative design effect pattern determination means, second decorative design effect pattern determination means)
72 program ROM (first decorative design effect pattern storage means, second decorative design effect pattern storage means)
73 Work RAM

Claims (2)

A game board on which game media rolls,
A first passing area provided in the game board;
First determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first passage area;
First identification symbol display means for performing variable display of the first identification symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means;
A second passage area provided in the game board;
Second determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second passage area;
Second identification symbol display means for performing variable display of the second identification symbol in accordance with the determination result of the second determination means;
First decorative symbol display means capable of displaying decorative symbols;
With
The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be variably displayed at the same time,
In the first determination means or the second determination means, when it is determined to shift to a specific gaming state that is a gaming state different from the special gaming state, the specific gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. Without controlling the gaming state more advantageous than the gaming state before the occurrence,
When one of the first determination means or the second determination means determines that the game state is to be shifted to the special gaming state, the other determination means during the change of the identification symbol corresponding to the one determination means When the change of the identification symbol corresponding to the other determination means that is determined to shift to the specific gaming state is finished, the identification symbol corresponding to one determination means is stopped and displayed in a manner that does not shift to the special gaming state Is possible,
In front of the first decorative symbol display means, second decorative symbol display means which is different from the first decorative symbol display means, first decorative symbol display means and second decorative symbol display means. A third decorative symbol display means which is a decorative symbol display means different from any of the above,
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are each movable from a standby position to a driving position;
In the driving position, the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means overlap with the first decorative symbol display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are capable of displaying the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display means when in the standby position, and display the decorative symbols. A gaming machine that moves from the standby position to the drive position in a displayed state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a movable member that makes at least a part of the first decorative symbol display means difficult to visually recognize from the front of the gaming machine.

Images